DPPS Neet Disha Physics Original_Part64

t.me/Ebooks_Encyclopedia27. t.
me/Magazines4all
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 01
1 8. (a) Let radius of gyration [ k ] µ [ h]x [c ] y [G ]z
1. (d) f =
2p LC By substituting the dimension of
æ Cö [k] = [L] [h] = [ ML2T -1 ],[c ] = [ LT -1 ],
\ç ÷ does not represent the dimension of frequency..
è Lø
[G ] = [M -1 L3T -2 ]
2. (d) [n] = Number of particles crossing a unit area in unit
time = [L –2T –1] and by comparing the power of both sides
[n2] = [n1] = number of particles per unit volume = [L–3] we can get x = 1/2, y = – 3/2, z = 1/2
[x2] = [x1] = positions So dimension of radius of gyration are
[h]1/2 [c]–3/2[G]1/2
é L-2T -1 ù ´ [ L]
[n][ x2 - x1 ] 9. (b) Because magnitude is absolute.
\ D= =ë û = [ L2T -1 ]
[n2 - n1 ] -3 E
[L ] 10. (c) Stefan's law is E = s(T 4 ) Þ s =
T4
X M -1L-2T 4 A2
3. (d) Y = = = [M -3 L-2T 8 A4 ] Energy Watt
3Z 2 [ MT -2 A-1 ]2 where, E = = 2
Area ´ Time m
4. (a) In given equation, aZ should be dimensionless
kq Watt - m-2
s= = Watt - m-2 K -4
4
K
kq [ML2T -2 K -1 ´ K ]
\ a= Þ [a ] = = [ MLT -2 ] 11. (d) ct2 must have dimensions of L
Z [ L] Þ c must have dimensions of L/T2 = LT
T–2
a -2 12. (b) 6 × 10–5 = 60 × 10–6 = 60 microns
é a ù [ MLT ]
and P = Þ [b] = ê ú = = [ M 0 L2T 0 ]
b ë P û [ ML-1T -2 ] 1 q1q2 1 q1q2
13. (d) F= Þ Î0 = = C 2 m-2 N -1
4p Î0 r 2 4p Fr 2
1/ 2
P éF ù 2 P2 é F ù F 14. (b) According to the defition.
5. (c) v= Þ v = 2 êë m úû
\m µ
2l êë m úû 4l 2 2
l v 15. (b) Pyrometer is used for measurement of temperature.
16. (d) x = Ay + B tan Cz,
é MLT -2 ù -1 0 From the dimensional homogenity
Þ [m] = ê 2 -2 ú = [ ML T ]
ëê L T ûú éxù éBù
[ x ] = [ Ay] = [ B] Þ ê ú = [ y] = ê ú
6. (d) By substituting the dimensions of mass [M], length [L] ë Aû ë Aû
and coefficient of rigidity [ML–1T–2] we get [Cz] = [M0L0T0] = Dimensionless
M B
T = 2p is the right formula for time period of x and B; C and z–1; y and have the same dimension
hL A
oscillations. but x and A have the different dimensions.
7. (a) Time µ c x G y h z Þ T = kc x G y h z 17. (a) Let T µ S x r y r z
Putting the dimensions in the above relation by substituting the dimension of
Þ [ M 0 L0T 1 ] = [ LT -1 ]x [ M -1L3T -2 ] y [ ML2T -1 ]z [T] = [T], [ S ] = [ MT -2 ],[r ] = [ L ],[r] = [ML-3 ]
Þ [ M 0 L0T 1 ] = [ M - y + z Lx+ 3 y + 2 z T - x- 2 y - z ] and by comparing the power of both the sides
x = –1/2, y = 3/2, z = 1/2
Comparing the powers of M, L and T
–y+z=0 ....(i) 3
x + 3y + 2z = 0 ....(ii) so T µ rr 3 / S Þ T = k rr
– x – 2y – z = 1 ....(iii) S
On solving equations (i) and (ii) and (iii) 18. (c) E = hv Þ [ML2T -2 ] = [h][T -1 ] Þ [h] = [ ML2T -1 ]
-5 1
x= ,y=z=
2 2 ur ur ur
19. (c) P = A + B
Hence, dimension of time are [G1/2 h1/2c–5/2]. ur ur ur
Q= A–B
t.me/Ebooks_Encyclopedia27. t.me/Magazines4all
EBD_7156
2 DPP/ P 01
ur ur ur ur ur ur
P.Q = 0 Þ (A + B).(A – B) = 0 hc 6.6 ´10 -34 ´ 3 ´108
ur ur 27. (a) E= = = 4.95 ´10-19 J
Þ A2 – B2 = 0 Þ | A |=| B | l 4 ´10-7
= 3.0 eV
QP ^ Q 28. (a) Both statement -1 and statement -2 are correct and
20. (a) By substituting dimension of each quantitity in R.H.S. statement -1 follows from statement -2
of option (a) we get 29. (c) Let us write the dimension of various quantities on
two sides of the given relation.
é mg ù é M ´ LT -2 ù -1
ê hr ú = ê -1 -1 ú = [ LT ]. L.H.S. = T = [T],
ë û ëê ML T ´ L ûú
LT -2
This option gives the dimension of velocity. R.H.S. = 2p g / l = = [T -1 ]
21. (a) By principle of dimensional homogeneity L
(\ 2p has no dimension).
é a ù As dimension of L.H.S. is not equal to dimension of
ê 2 ú = [ P] R.H.S. therefore according to principle of homogeneity
ëV û
the relation.
\ [a ] = [ P ][V ]2 = [ ML-1T -2 ] ´ [ L6 ] = [ ML5T -2 ]
T = 2p g / l .
22. (c) f = c mx ky;
30. (a) Unit of quantity (L/R) is Henry/ohm.
Spring constant k = force/length.
As Henry = ohm × sec,
[M0L0T–1] = [Mx (MT–2)y] =[ Mx + y T–2y]
hence unit of L/R is sec
1 i.e. [L/R] = [T].
Þ x + y = 0, - 2 y = -1 or y =
2 Similarly, unit of product CR is farad × ohm
1 Coulomb Volt
Therefore, x = – or ×
2 Volt Amp
23. (a) Try out the given alternatives.
When x = 1, y = –1, z = 1 Sec×Amp
or = second
Amp
PC
P x S y C z = P1S-1C1 = i.e. [CR] = [T]
S
therefore, [L/R] and [CR] both have the same
[ML–1T –2 ] [LT –1 ] dimension.
= = [M 0 L0 T 0 ]
2 –2 2
[ML T / L T]
24. (c) Dimensions of angular momentum, [ L] = éë ML T ùû

2 -1
Dimensions of work, [ W ] = éë ML T ùû
2 -2
Dimensions of torque, [ t ] = éë ML T ùû
2 -2
Dimensions of energy, [ E ] = éë ML T ùû
2 -2
Dimensions of Young¢s modulus,
[ Y] = éëML-1T-2 ùû
Dimensions of light year = [L]
Dimension of wavelength = [L]
25. (d), 26. (b)
hG kgm 2s-1 ´ m3kg -1s-2

5
= 5 5
= s2 = s
c m /s
Putting the values of h, G and c in above relation
Planck time = 1.3 × 10– 43 s.
DPP/ P 02 3
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 02
M M l
1. (d) Density r = = 2 10. (c) T = 2p
V pr L g
Dr DM Dr DL l 4p 2 l
Þ = +2 + Þ T 2 = 4p 2 Þ g= 2
r M r L g T
0.003 0.005 0.06 1mm 0.1
= + 2´ + Here % error in l = ´ 100 = ´ 100 = 0.1%
0.3 0.5 6 100cm 100
= 0.01 + 0.02 + 0.01 = 0.04
0.1
Dr and % error in T = ´ 100 = 0.05%
\ Percentage error = ´ 100 = 0.04 ´100 = 4% 2 ´ 100
r
\ % error in g
2. (a) In division (or multiplication), the number of significant = % error in l + 2(% error in T)
digits in the answer is equal to the number of = 0.1 + 2 × 0.05 = 0.2%
significant digits which is the minimum in the given 11. (c) Mean time period T = 2.00 sec
numbers. & Mean absolute error DT = 0.05 sec.
3. (d) Percentage error in A To express maximum estimate of error, the time period
should be written as (2.00 ± 0.05) sec
æ 1 ö
= ç 2 ´ 1 + 3 ´ 3 + 1´ 2 + ´ 2 ÷ % = 14%
è 2 ø 12. (b) V = 4 pr 3
4. (a) Percentage error in X = aa+ bb + cg 3
5. (c) Errors in A and B will be added. \ % error in volume = 3 × % error in radius
6. (c) Given, L = 2.331 cm = 3 × 1 = 3%
= 2.33 (correct upto two decimal places) 13. (a) Weight in air = (5.00 ± 0.05)N
and B = 2.1 cm = 2.10 cm Weight in water = (4.00 ± 0.05)N
\ L + B = 2.33 + 2.10 = 4.43 cm. = 4.4 cm Loss of weight in water = (1.00 ± 0.1)N
Since minimum significant figure is 2.
weight in air
7. (d) The number of significant figures in all of the given Now relative density =
number is 4. weight loss in water
8. (c) 4MgL so maximum permissible error in Y 5.00 ± 0.05

Y= i.e. R.D =
pD 2l 1.00 ± 0.1
Now relative density with max permissible error
DY æ DM Dg DL 2DD Dl ö
= ´ 100 = ç + + + + ÷ ´ 100 5.00 æ 0.05 0.1 ö
Y è M g L D l ø = ±ç ± ÷ ´100 = 5.0 ± (1 + 10)%
1.00 è 5.00 1.00 ø
= æç
1 1 1 1 1 ö = 5.0 ± 11%
+ + + 2 ´ + ÷ ´ 100
è 300 981 2820 41 87 ø
æ DR ö DV Dl
= 0.065 × 100 = 6.5% 14. (b) \ ç ´100 ÷ = ´100 + ´ 100
è R ømax V l
b a cb
9. (d) a = 5 0.2
d g ed = ´ 100 + ´100 = (5 + 2)% = 7%
100 10
So, maximum error in a is given by
15. (c) Volume of cylinder V = pr2l
æ Da ö Db Dc Percentage error in volume =
ç ´ 100 ÷ = a. ´ 100 + b. ´100
è a ømax b c DV 2Dr Dl
´ 100 = ´ 100 + ´ 100
Dd De V r l
+ g. ´ 100 + d. ´ 100
d e æ 0.01 0.1 ö
=ç 2´ ´100 + ´ 100 ÷ = (1 + 2)% = 3%
= (ab1+ bc1+ gd1+ de1)% è 2.0 5.0 ø
EBD_7156
4 DPP/ P 02
24. (d) Here, s = (13.8 ± 0.2) m
DV 2Dr Dl
t = (4.0 ± 0.3) s
´ 100 = ´ 100 + ´ 100
V r l s 13.8
velocity, v = = = 3.45 ms–1 = 3.5 ms–1
t 4.0
æ 0.01 0.1 ö
= ç 2´ ´100 + ´ 100 ÷ = (1 + 2)% = 3% (rounding off to two significant figures)
è 2.0 5.0 ø
16. (b) H = I2Rt Dv æ Ds Dt ö

= ±ç + ÷ = ±ç
æ 0.2 0.3 ö ( 0.8 + 4.14)
+ ÷=±
v è s t ø è 13.8 4.0 ø 13.8 ´ 4.0
DH æ 2D I D R D t ö
´ 100 = ç + + ÷ ´ 100
H è I R t ø Dv 4.94
Þ =± = ±0.0895
= (2 × 3 + 4 + 6)% = 16% v 13.8 ´ 4.0
17. (c) Quantity C has maximum power. So it brings maximum D v = ± 0.0895 × v = ± 0.0895 × 3.45 = ± 0.3087 = ± 0.31
error in P. (rounding off to two significant fig.)
1
Hence, v = (3.5 ± 0.31) ms–1
18. (d) Kinetic energy E = mv 2
2 Dv
% age error in velocity = ´ 100 = ± 0.0895 × 100 = ± 8.95
v
DE v '2 - v 2 % = ± 9%
\ ´ 100 = ´ 100 = [(1.5)2 – 1] × 100
E v2 25. (a) Maximum percentage error in measurement of e, as given
by Reyleigh’s formula.
DE
\ ´100 = 125% (Given error is measurement of radius is 0.1 cm)
E De = 0.6 DR = 0.6 × 0.1 = 0.06 cm.
x De 0.06
19. (b) Required random error = Percentage error is ´ 100 = ´ 100 = 3.33%
4 e 0.6 ´ 3
1 2 26. (b) Speed of sound at the room temperature.
20. (b) \ E = mv l1 = 4.6 cm, l2 = 14.0 cm.,
2
\ % Error in K.E. l = 2 (l2 – l1) = 2 (14.0 – 4.6) = 18.8 cm.
= % error in mass + 2 × % error in velocity 18.8
= 2 + 2 × 3 = 8% v = f l = 2000 ´ = 376 m / s
100
21. (c)
27. (c) End correction obtained in the experiment.
22. (d) Since for 50.14 cm, significant number = 4 and for
0.00025, significant numbers = 2 l 2 - 3l1 14.0 - 3 ´ 4.6
e= = = 0.1 cm.
23. (a) Since percentage increase in length = 2% 2 2
Hence, percentage increase in area of square sheet 28. (d) Since zeros placed to the left of the number are never
= 2 × 2% = 4% significant, but zeros placed to right of the number are
significant.
29. (b) The last number is most accurate because it has
greatest significant figure (3).
30. (a) As the distance of star increases, the parallex angle
decreases, and great degree of accuracy is required for
its measurement. Keeping in view the practical
limitation in measuring the parallex angle, the maximum
distance of a star we can measure is limited to 100 light
year.
DPP/ P 03 5
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 03
1. (a) If t1 and 2 t2 are the time taken by particle to cover first 4. (a) The body starts from rest at x = 0 and then again comes
and second half distance respectively. to rest at x = 1. It means initially acceleration is positive
x/2 x and then negative.
t= = ...(i) So we can conclude that a can not remain positive for
3 6
x1 = 4.5t2 and x2 = 7.5 t2 all t in the interval 0 £ t £ 1 i.e. a must change sign
during the motion.
x x 5. (b) The area under acceleration time graph gives change
So, x1 + x2 = Þ 4.5t2 + 7.5t2 =
2 2 in velocity. As acceleration is zero at the end of 11 sec.
x i.e. vmax= Area of DOAB
t2 = ...(ii)
24 1
= ´11´10 = 55m/s
Total time t = t1 + 2t2 = x + x = x 2
6 12 4
So,average speed = 4 m/sec. a
2 B
dv bt 2 10 m/s
2. (c) = bt Þ dv = bt dt Þ v = + K1
dt 2
At t = 0, v = v0 Þ K1 = v0 A
t
1 2 O 11 sec.
We get v = bt + v0
2
6. (d) Let the car accelerate at rate a for time t1 then maximum
dx 1 2 1 bt 2 velocity attained, v = 0 + at1 = at1
Again = bt + v0 Þ x = + v0t + K 2
dt 2 2 3 Now, the car decelerates at a rate b for time (t – t1) and
finally comes to rest. Then,
At t = 0, x = 0 Þ K 2 = 0
0 = v – b(t – t1)
1
x = bt 3 + v0 t Þ 0 = at1 – bt + bt1
\
6
b
dv dv Þ t1 = t
3. (d) = 6 - 3v Þ = dt a +b
dt 6 - 3v
ab
dv Þ v= t
Integrating both sides, ò (6 - 3v) = ò dt a+b
log e (6 - 3v ) a
Þ = t + K1 7. (c) Sn = u + (2 n - 1)
-3 2
Þ loge(6 – 3v) = – 3t + K2 ....(i) a
At t = 0, v = 0 Þ loge 6 = K2 = (2 n - 1) (Qu = 0)
Substituting the value of K2 in equation (i) 2
loge(6 – 3v) = – 3t + loge 6 a a
Sn+1 = [ 2(n + 1) - 1] = (2n + 1)
æ 6 - 3v ö -3t 6 - 3v 2 2
Þ loge ç ÷ = -3t Þ e =
è 6 ø 6
Sn 2n - 1
\ =
Þ 6 - 3v = 6e-3t Þ 3v = 6(1 - e -3t ) Sn+1 2n + 1
Þ v = 2(1 - e-3t ) 8. (b) Distance = Area under v – t graph
\ vterminal = 2 m/s (when t = ¥) = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4
dv d é 1 1
Acceleration a = = 2(1 - e-3t ) ù = 6e -3t = ´1 ´ 20 + (20 ´ 1) + (20 + 10) ´1 + (10 ´ 1)
dt dt ë û 2 2
2
Initial acceleration = 6 m/s . = 10 + 20 + 15 + 10 = 55 m
EBD_7156
6 DPP/ P 03
æ t 2 t3 ö
Þ x = a0 ç - ÷ Qa=0Þ t=T
30 è 2 6T ø
Velocity (m/s)
20
displacement
Average velocity =
time
10 A2 æ T 2 T3 ö
A1 A3 A4 a0 ç - ÷
0 è 2 6T ø a 0 T
1 2 3 4 = =
T 3
Time (in second)
1 2 14. (b) Let u1, u2, u3 and u4 be velocities at time t = 0, t1,

9. (c) As acc. is constant so from s = ut + at we have (t1 + t2) and (t1 + t2 + t3) respectively and acceleration
2 is a then
1 2
x= at [u = 0] ....(i) u1 + u2 u + u3 u3 + u4
2 v1 = , v2 = 2 and v3 =
2 2 2
Now if it travels a distance y in next t sec.
in 2t sec total distance travelled Also u2 = u1 + at1, u3 = u1 + a(t1 + t2)
and u4 = u1 + a(t1 + t2 + t3)
1 By solving, we get
x+y= a(2t)2 ....(ii) (t + t = 2t)
2
v1 - v2 (t1 + t2 )
x+y =
Dividing eqn. (ii) by eqn (i), = 4 or y = 3x v2 - v3 (t2 + t3 )
x
dx d
g 15. (c) vx = = (3t2 – 6t) = 6t – 6. At t = 1, vx = 0
(2 ´ 4 - 1) dt dt
x ( 4) 2 7
= = a
10. (b) x (5) g 9 [QS = u+ (2n - 1)] dy d 2
(2 ´ 5 - 1) n th 2 vy = = (t – 2t) = 2t – 2. At t = 1, vy = 0
2 dt dt
11. (c) Let body takes T sec to reach maximum height.
Then v = u – gT B v=0 Hence v = v x2 + v 2y = 0
v = 0, at highest point.
16. (c) Initial relative velocity = v1 – v2.
u C Final relative velocity = 0
T= ...................(1]
g From v2 = u2 – 2as
Velocity attained by body in (T – t) sec
H
Þ 0 = (v1 – v2)2 – 2 × a × s
v = u – g (T – t)
u ( v1 - v2 ) 2
u Þ s=
+ gt 2a
= u – gT + gt = u – g
g A
If the distance between two cars is 's' then collision will
or v = gt ...................(2) take place. To avoid collision d > s
\Distance travelled in last t sec of its ascent
(v1 - v2 ) 2
1 1 \ d>
S = (gt ) t - gt 2 = gt 2 2a
2 2 where d = actual initial distance between two cars.
dx d 17. (c) If the body starts from rest and moves with constant
12. (c) v = = (2t2 + t + 5) = 4t + 1 m/s
dt dt acceleration then the ratio of distances in consecutive
dv d equal time interval S1 : S2 : S3 = 1 : 3 : 5
and a = = (4t + 1) ; a = 4 m/s2
dt dt Dx
18. (c) Instantaneous velocity v =
dv æ tö Dt
13. (a) = a0 çè1 - ÷ø
dt T By using the data from the table
t v
æ tö æ t2 ö 0 - ( -2) 6-0
v1 = = 2m/s, v2 = = 6m/s,
Þò dv = ò è Tø
a 0 ç 1 - ÷ dt Þ v = a 0 ç t - ÷ 1 1
0 0 è 2T ø
16 - 6
dx æ t
t2 ö v3 = = 10m/s
Q = v so, ò dx = ò v dt Þ x = ò a 0 çè t - 2T ÷ø dt 1
dt So, motion is non-uniform but accelerated.
0
DPP/ P 03 7
23. (c) For an inertial frame of reference, its acceleration should
19. (a) 1 2 2v
at = vt Þ t = be zero. As reference frame attached to the earth i.e. a
2 a rotating or revolving frame is accelerating, therefore, it
20. (b) x = 4(t – 2) + a(t – 2)2 will be non-inertial.
At t = 0, x = – 8 + 4a = 4a – 8 Thus (2) & (4) are correct, so correct answer is (c).
dx 24. (c) Average speed
v= = 4 + 2 a (t - 2)
dt Total distance 2x 2v1v 2
= = =
At t = 0, v = 4 – 4a = 4(1 – a) Total time x x v1 + v 2
+
v1 v 2
d2x
But acceleration, a = = 2a
dt 2 Total displacement
Average velocity =
-at bt Total time
21. (d) x = ae + be
Q It comes back to its initial position
dx d
Velocity v = = (ae -at + bebt ) \ Total displacement is zero.
dt dt Hence, average velocity is zero.
= a.e-at (-a) + bebt (b) = -aae-at + bbebt Sol. For Qs. 25-27. a = sin pt
-at bt 2
Acceleration = -aae (-a ) + bbe .b \ ò dv = ò 2sin pt dt or v = - cos pt + C
p
= aa 2 e-at + bb2 eb t 2 2
Acceleration is positive so velocity goes on increasing At t = 0, v = 0 \ C = or v = (1 - cos pt)
p p
with time.
Velocity is always non-negative, hence particle always moves
22. (d) (1) a = 3 sin 4t
along positive x-direction.
dv \ Distance from time t = 0 to t = t is
Þ = 3sin 4t
dt
t t
2 2æ 1 ö 2 2
S=ò (1 - cos pt) dt = ç t - sin pt ÷ = t - 2 sin pt
Þ ò dv = ò 3sin 4t dt + c 0
p pè p ø0 p p
-3
Þ v= cos 4t + c 2t 2
4 Also displacement from time t = 0 to t = - sin pt
p p2
For initial velocity, t = 0
3 2
v0 = - +C Distance from time t = t to t = 1s = meters.
4 p
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (b)
3
At particular value of C = , v0 = 0 28. (d) Negative slope of position time graph represents that
4 the body is moving towards the negative direction and
Therefore, initial velocity may or may not be zero. if the slope of the graph decrease with time then it
(2) Acceleration = 0 represents the decrease in speed i.e. retardation in
Þ a = 3 sin4t = 0 Þ sin 4t = 0 motion.
np 29. (c) As per definition, acceleration is the rate of change of
Þ 4t = np Þ t= velocity,
4
r
where n = 0, 1, 2, ................. r dv
i.e. a = .
Therefore, the acceleration of the particle becomes zero dt
p If velocity is constant
after each interval of second. r
4 dv r
= 0, \ a = 0
(3) As acceleration is sinusoidal function of time, so dt
particle repeats its path periodically. Thus, the particle Therefore, if a body has constant velocity it cannot
comes to its initial position after sometime (period of have non zero acceleration.
function). 30. (d) The displacement is the shortest distance between
(4) The particle moves in a straight line path as it initial and final position. When final position of a body
performs S.H.M. coincides with its initial position, displacement is zero,
Since (1) & (3) are correct, hence correct answer is (d). but the distance travelled is not zero.
EBD_7156
8 DPP/ P 04
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 04
1. (c) If a stone is dropped from height h
-2 2 g ± 8 g + 8 g - 2 ± 2
1 2 t2 = =
then h = gt ......... (i) 2g g
2
If a stone is thrown upward with velocity u then Taking + ve sign t2 = (2 - 2) / g
1 2
h = -ut1 + gt1 ......... (ii) t1 2/ g 1
2 \ = = and so on.
t2 (2 - 2) / g 2 -1
If a stone is thrown downward with velocity u then
4. (d) Interval of ball throw = 2 sec.
1 2
h = ut2 + gt2 ......... (iii) If we want that minimum three (more than two) ball
2 remain in air then time of flight of first ball must be
From (i), (ii) and (iii) we get greater than 4 sec.
1 2 1 2 T > 4 sec.
-ut1 + gt1 = gt ......... (iv)
2 2 2u
> 4sec Þ u > 19.6m / s
1 2 1 2 g
ut2 + gt2 = gt ......... (v)
2 2 for u = 19.6 First ball will just strike the ground(in sky)
Dividing (iv) and (v) we get Second ball will be at highest point (in sky)
Third ball will be at point of projection or at ground
1 (not in sky)
g (t 2 - t12 )
-ut1 2 5. (a) The distance covered by the ball during the last t
\ =
ut2 1 seconds of its upward motion = Distance covered by it
g (t 2 - t22 )
2 in first t seconds of its downward motion
1 2
t t2 - t2 From h = ut + gt
or - 1 = 2 12 2
t2 t - t2
1 2
h= gt [As u = 0 for it downward motion]
By solving t = t1t2 2
2. (c) Since direction of v is opposite to the direction of g 6. (d) In the positive region the velocity decreases linearly
and h so from equation of motion (during rise) and in the negative region velocity
increases linearly (during fall) and the direction is
1 2 opposite to each other during rise and fall, hence fall is
h = -nt + gt
2 shown in the negative region.
7. (a) For the given condition initial height h = d and velocity
Þ gt 2 - 2nt - 2h = 0
of the ball is zero. When the ball moves downward its
velocity increases and it will be maximum when the ball
2n ± 4n2 + 8 gh
Þ t= hits the ground & just after the collision it becomes
2g half and in opposite direction. As the ball moves
upward its velocity again decreases and becomes zero
né 2 gh ù at height d/2. This explanation match with graph (a).
Þ t= ê1 + 1 + 2 ú
gë n û 8. (c) Acceleration of body along AB is g cos q
1 2
1 2 1 Distance travelled in time t sec = AB = ( g cos q)t
3. (c) h = ut + gt Þ 1 = 0 ´ t1 + gt12 Þ t1 = 2 / g 2
2 2
Velocity after travelling 1m distance 1
From DABC, AB = 2R cosq; 2 R cos q = g cos qt 2
2
v 2 = u 2 + 2 gh Þ n 2 = (0) 2 + 2 g ´ 1 Þ n = 2 g
4R R
For second 1 meter distance t2 = or t = 2
g g
1 2 9. (b) It has lesser initial upward velocity.
1 = 2 g ´ t2 + gt2 Þ gt22 + 2 2 gt2 - 2 = 0
2 10. (b) At maximum height velocity n = 0
DPP/ P 04 9
We know that n = u + at, hence uuur
Velocity of car w.r.t. train (nct ) is towards
0 = u - gT Þ u = gT West – North
u 21. (a) As the trains are moving in the same direction. So the
When n = , then initial relative speed (v1 – v2 ) and by applying
2 retardation final relative speed becomes zero.
u u gT T
= u - gt Þ gt = Þ gt = Þt = From v = u - at Þ 0 = (v1 - v2 ) - at Þ t = v1 - v2
2 2 2 2 a
r r
T u 22. (d) Let v A and v B be the respective velocities of the
Hence at t = , it acquires velocity .
2 2 particles at A and B. The relative velocity of particle at
A. w.r.t. to that at B is given by
2h t h r r r r
11. (b) t= Þ 1 = 1 v A - v B = v A + (- v B )
g t2 h2
12. (c) Speed of the object at reaching the ground n = 2 gh

If heights are equal then velocity will also be equal.
A B
10 vA=25m/s
13. (b) S = 10 + (2 ´ 3 - 1) = 35m
3rd 2 300m
10 S rd 7
S nd = 10 + (2 ´ 2 - 1) = 25 Þ 3 = (see figure). From triangle law of velocities if OP and
2 2 S nd 5
2 r r
PQ represent v A and - v B , then the required relative
14. (c) Sn µ (2n - 1) . In equal time interval of 2 seconds r
velocity v R is given by OQ .
Ratio of distance = 1 : 3 : 5
15. (c) Net acceleration of a body when thrown upward r
| vR | = 252 + 202 = 625 + 400 = 32.02 m / s
= acceleration of body – acceleration due to gravity
=a–g
16. (d) The initial velocity of aeroplane is horizontal, then the 25 æ 5ö
vertical component of velocity of packet will be zero. If Ð PQO = q, then tan q = Þ q = tan -1 ç ÷
20 è 4ø
2h
So t = vA 25
g P
vB=20m/s O
Totallength 50 + 50 100
17. (b) Time = = = = 4sec
Relative velocity 10 + 15 25 20
18. (d) Relative velocity
= 10 + 5 = 15 m/sec
Q
150
\t = = 10 sec Thus, the particle at A, appears to approach B, in a direction
15 making an angle of tan–1 (5/4) with its direction of motion.
19. (a) When two particles moves towards each other then
Let us draw a line from A, as AC, such that Ð BCA is equal
v1 + v2 = 4 ....... (i)
When these particles moves in the same direction then to q .
v1 – v2 = 4 ....... (ii) 300m B
By solving v1 = 5 and v2 = 1 m/s A
uuur uur uur
20. (b) nct = nc - nt
uuur uur uur
n ct = n c + (-nt ) M
vc
C
vct Thus, to B, A appears to move along AC. From B, draw a
perpendicular to AC as BM.
BM is the shortest distance between them.
4
45° \ BM = ABcos q = 300 ´ = 187.41 m
41
Also, AM = AB sin q = 234 .26 m
-vt vt \ time taken to cover a distance
EBD_7156
10 DPP/ P 04
AB = 234.26 m with a velocity of 32.02 m/s 25. (b) Vplane = 100 m/s
234.26
= = 7.32 sec.
32.02
23. (d) Since the wind is blowing toward the east, the plane
must head west of north as shown in figure. The velocity
of the plane relative to the ground vr pg will be the sum of vplane
the velocity of the plane relative to the air vr pa and the
velocity of the air relative to the ground vr ag.
(i) 1. The velocity of the plane relative to the ground is
given by equation :
r r r
v pg = v pa + v ag vwind vtotal
2. The sine of the angle q between the velocity of
the plane and north equals the ratio of vag and
vpa . Vtotal = (20)2 + (100)2 + 2 ´ 20 ´ 100 ´ cos135°
v ag 90 km / h æ 1 ö
sin q = = = 0.45 \ q = 26.74 = 400 + 10000 + 2 ´ 20 ´ 100 ´ ç - ÷
v pa 200 km / h è 2ø
(ii) Since vag and vpg are perpendicular, we can use the = 87 m/s
Pythagorean theorem to find the magnitude of vr pg.
v2pg = v2ag + v2pg v wind
26. (c) tan f = vwind
vplane vtotal
vpg = v 2pa 2
- v ag = (200 km / h )2 - (90 km / h )2
= 179 km/h. 20
=
100
r r 1r
24. (a) Using, S = uT + aT 2
2 æ 20 ö
\ f = tan -1 ç
è 100 ÷ø f
1 2 vplane
(i) -40 = 10T - gT u=10m/s
2 u vplane
2 27. (d) cos f =
or -40 = 10T - 5T 40m v total
v v plane 100
\ v total = = m /s
or 5T 2 - 10T - 40 = 0 h cos f cos f
28. (a) If components of velocities of boat relative to river is
2
10 + 10 - 4 ´ 5(-40) 10 + 100 + 800 same normal to river flow (as shown in figure) are same,
or T= = both boats reach other bank simultaneously.
2´5 10
10 + 30
= = 4 sec.
10 Boat 2 v Boat 1
v q q
2 ´ 10 River
(ii) t = = 2 sec.
g
29. (a) Both statement - 1 & statement - 2 are correct and
(iii) v = 10 + g × 2 = 30 m/s
statement - 2 is correct explanation of statement - 2
30. (d) Statement - 1 is true but statement - 2 is false.
DPP/ P 05 11
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 05
5. (b) Time taken to cross the river along shortest possible
æ 90° ö path is given by
1. (d) Dv = 2v sin ç
è 2 ÷ø
d
t=
1 v - u2
2
= 2v sin 45° = 2v ´ = 2v
2 v = velocity of boat in still water
u = velocity of river water
2p 2p d = width of river
= 2 ´ rw = 2 ´ 1 ´ = cm/s
60 30 15 1
\ =
10 60 5 - u2
2
æ qö
2. (b) Dv = 2v sin ç ÷ = 2 ´ 5 ´ sin 45° =
è2ø 2 Þ u = 3 km/h
320
Dv 10 / 2 1 6. (d) Here d = 320 m = km
\ a= = = m/s2 1000
Dt 10 2 t = 4 min
3. (c) For motion of the particle from (0, 0) to (a, 0) 5
ur ur v= u
F = - K (0iˆ + ajˆ) Þ F = - Ka $j 3
r
Displacement r = (aiˆ + 0 ˆj ) - (0iˆ + 0 ˆj ) = ai$ Putting values in t =
d
, u = 60 m/min
So work done from (0, 0) to (a, 0) is given by v - u2
2
ur r
W = F . r = - Ka $j . ai$ = 0 P Q R
7. (c) = =
For motion (a, 0) to (a, a) sin q1 sin q2 sin150°
ur
F = - K (ai$ + a $j ) and displacement 1.93 R
Þ =
r sin q1 sin150°
r = (aiˆ + ajˆ) - (aiˆ + 0 ˆj ) = a $j
So work done from (a, 0) to (a, a) 1.93 ´ sin150° 1.93 ´ 0.5
Þ R= = =1
ur r sin q1 0.9659
W = F . r = - K (ai$ + a $j ). a $j = - Ka 2
150°
So total work done = - Ka 2
P Q
4. (d) q2 q1
T T cos q
R
q
T sin q 8. (b)
P T
T cos 30°
W
30°
As the metal sphere is in equilibrium under the effect
of the three forces therefore
ur ur uur
T + P +W = 0 T sin 30° 30 N
From the figure
T cos q = W ................... (i)
T sin q = P ................... (ii)
From equation (i) and (ii) we get
P = W tan q and T 2 = P 2 + W 2
W
EBD_7156
12 DPP/ P 05
From the figure ur ur ur ur
T sin 30° = 30 ...(i) 16. (b) | A ´ B | = A. B
T cos 30° = W ...(ii) Þ AB sin q = AB cos q
By solving equation (i) and (ii) we get Þ tan q = 1
W = 30 3 N and T = 60 N \ q = 45°
ur ur
9. (c) Relative velocity = (3iˆ + 4 ˆj ) - (-3iˆ - 4 ˆj ) = 6iˆ + 8 ˆj 17. (a) P . Q = 0
10. (c) Þ a 2 - 2a - 3 = 0
vr
Þa=3
r uur ur
18. (a) S = r2 - r1
ur ur
vm W = F .S
30°
= (4$i + $j + 3k$ ).(11$i + 11$j + 15k$ )
90°
= (4 × 11 + 1 × 11 + 3 × 15) = 100 J
ur ur ur
19. (c) A = 3iˆ - 2 ˆj + kˆ, B = iˆ - 3 ˆj + 5kˆ , C = 2iˆ + ˆj - 4kˆ
vr 1 r
sin 30° = = A = 32 + ( -2) 2 + 12 = 9 + 4 + 1 = 14
vm 2
r
vm 0.5 B = 12 + ( -3) 2 + 52 = 1 + 9 + 25 = 35
Þ vr = = = 0.25 m/s
2 2 r
11. (a) To cross the river in minimum time, the shift is given C = 2 2 + 12 + ( -4) 2 = 4 + 1 + 16 = 21
du
by . As B = A2 + C 2 therefore ABC will be right angled
v triangle.
12. (d) Relative velocity = 10 + 5 = 15 m/s. r r
F1.F2
120 20. (b) cos q =
Time taken by the bird to cross the train = = 8 sec F1 F2
15
r ur r
13. (d) v = w ´ r (5iˆ + 10 ˆj - 20kˆ).(10iˆ - 5 ˆj - 15kˆ)
=
$i $j k$ 25 + 100 + 400. 100 + 25 + 225
= 3 -4 1 = -18i$ - 13 $j + 2 k$ 50 - 50 + 300
=
5 -6 6 525. 350
ur ur ur ur 1
14. (d) | A ´ B | = 3 ( A . B) Þ cos q =
2
AB sin q = 3 AB cos q
\ q = 45°
Þ tan q = 3
r r r r
Þ q = 60° 21. (a) r = a + b + c = 4iˆ - ˆj - 3iˆ + 2 ˆj - kˆ = iˆ + ˆj - kˆ
ur ur ur
Now | R | = | A + B | r
r iˆ + ˆj - kˆ iˆ + ˆj - kˆ
rˆ = = =
|r| 2 2
1 + 1 + (-1) 2
= A2 + B 2 + 2 AB cos q 3
æ1ö
= A2 + B 2 + 2 AB ç ÷
è 2ø D C
2 2 1/ 2
= ( A + B + AB )
r r ur 300 m
15. (a) t = r ´ F = (7$i + 3 $j + k$ )(-3$i + $j + 5k$ )
22. (a)
$i $j k$
r A B
t= 7 3 1 = 14$i - 38 $j + 16k$ 400 m
uuur uuur uuur
-3 1 5 Displacement AC = AB + BC
DPP/ P 05 13
AC = (AB)2 + (BC) 2 = (400)2 + (300) 2 = 500 m r r æ - ˆj + kˆ ö

Unit vector perpendicular to A and B is ç ÷.
Distance = AB+BC =400+300=700 m è 2 ø
r r r
23. (a) A = 3iˆ - 2ˆj + k,
ˆ B = î - 3jˆ + 5k,
ˆ C = 2iˆ - ˆj + 4kˆ Any vector whose magnitude is k (constant) times
r r 2iˆ + ˆj + kˆ
A = 32 + ( -2) 2 + 12 = 9 + 4 + 1 = 14 (2iˆ + ˆj + kˆ) is parallel to A so, unit vector
6
r r
B = 12 + ( -3) 2 + 52 = 1 + 9 + 25 = 35
is parallel to A .
uv
C = 22 + 12 + ( -4) 2 = 4 + 1 + 16 = 21 r r r r
28. (b) A+ B = A- B
As B = A 2 + C2 therefore ABC will be right angled Þ A2 + B2 + 2AB cosq = A2 + B2 + 2AB cosq
triangle. Hence cosq = 0 which gives q = 90°
r r Also vector addition is commutative.
24. (a) A ´ B = 0 \ sin q = 0 \q = 0°
r r r r
Two vectors will be parallel to each other. Hence A + B = B + A
25. (a), 26 (b), 27. (b) r r
29. (a) Let P and Q are two vectors in opposite direction,
iˆ ˆj kˆ r r r r
r r then their sum P + (-Q) = P - Q
A´ B = 2 1 1
= iˆ(1 - 1) - ˆj(2 - 1) + kˆ(2 - 1) r r
If P = Q then sum equal to zero.
1 1 1
30. (d) The resultant of two vectors of unequal magnitude
= - ĵ + kˆ given by R = A2 + B 2 + 2 AB cos q cannot be zero
for any value of q.
EBD_7156
14 DPP/ P 06
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 06
1. (b) Given, that y = 3 x – (1/2) x2 ....(1) 2u sin q 2u sin q
8. (b) T = Þ2= Þ u sin q = g
The above equation is similar to equation of trajectory g g
of the projectiles
u 2 sin 2 q g 2 g
g H= = = =5m
y = tan q x – 1/2 x2 ....(2) 2g 2g 2
u 2 cos 2 q
Comparing (1) & (2) we get 9. (b) Let u1 and u2 be the initial velocities respectively. If h1
and h 2 are the heights attained by them, then
tan q = 3 Þ q = 60º
u12 u 22 sin 2 q
g h1 = and h2 = ...(1)
and 1/2 = (1/2) 2 2
2g 2g
u cos q
The times of ascent of balls are equal,
Þ u2 cos2 q = g Þ u2 cos2 60° = 10
we have t = u1/g = u2 sin q/g
Þ u2 (1/4) = 10 Þ u2 = 40 Þ u = 2 10 m/s \ u1 = u2 sin q ... (2)
2. (a) For angle of elevation of 60º, we have maximum height 2
h1 u
From eq. (1) = 2 12 ... (3)
u 2 sin 2 60º 3u 2 h2 u 2 sin q
h1 = =
2g 8g
h1 1
For angle of elevation of 30º, we have maximum height From (2) & (3), =
h2 1
u 2 sin 2 30 º u 2 h1 3
h2 = = ; = u 2 sin 2 q u 2 sin 2 (90 - q)
2g 8g h 2 1
10. (a) h1 = and h2 =
3. (b) Total time of flight = 2 × time taken to reach max. height 2g 2g
Þ t2 = 2t1 Þ t2/t1 = 2/1 \ h1 + h2 = u2/2g (sin 2q + cos2q)
4. (d) vx = dx/dt = 2ct, vy = dy/dt = 2bt
982
\v= v 2x + v 2y = u2/2g = = 490
= 2t c2 + b 2 2 ´ 10
5. (c) vy = dy/dt = 8 – 10 t = 8, when t = 0 (at the time of h1 – h 2 = 50, \ h1 = 270 m and h 2 = 220 m
projection.) 11. (c) Greatest height attained
v 2x + v 2y = u 2 sin 2 q
vx = dx/dt = 6, v = 8 2 + 6 2 = 10 m/s h= ... (1)
2g
6. (a) Horizontal component of velocity
Horizontal range
vx = ux = u cos q = 30 × cos 30º = 15 3 m/s
2
Vertical component of the velocity u 2 sin 2q 2u sin q cos q
R= = ... (2)
vy = u sin q – gt = 30 sin 30º – 10 × 1 = 5 m/s g g
v2 = vx2 + vy2 = 700 Þ u = 10 7 m/s Given that R=2h
7. (a) Let ux and uy be the components of the velocity of the
2u 2 sin q cos q 2 u 2 sin 2 q
particle along the x- and y-directions. Then Þ =
ux = dx/dt = u0 and uy = dy/dt = wa cos wt g 2g
Integration : x = u0 t and y = a sin wt Þ tan q = 2 ... (3)
Eliminating t : y = a sin (wx/u0)
This is the equation of the trajectory Hence sin q = 2/ 5 , cos q = 1/ 5 ,
At t = 3p/2w, we have, \ From (2) R = 4u2/5g
x = u0 3p/2w and y = a sin 3p/2 = – a
u 2 sin 2q
\ The distance of the particle from the origin is 12. (d) R = = (19.6)2 sin 90º /10 = 39.2 m
g
éæ 3pu ö 2 ù Man must run (67.4m – 39.2 m) = 28.2 m in the time
2
x +y 2 = êç 0
÷ + a2 ú taken by the ball to come to ground. Time taken by the
êëè 2w ø úû
ball.
DPP/ P 06 15
(b) Let at the time of impact, vx and vy be the horizontal
2u sin q 2´ 19.6 sin 45º 4
t= = = = 2.82 sec and vertical velocities respectively, then
g 9.8 2 vx = 700 × cos 37° = 700 × 0.8 = 560 cm/s
28 . 2 m and vy = – 700 × sin 37° + 1000 × (5/7)
Velocity of man = = 10 m/s = – 700 × 0.6 + (5000/7) = – 420 + 714.3
2 . 82 sec
= + 294.3 cm/sec (downward)
13. (a) Referring to (fig.) let P be a point on the trajectory B
whose co-ordinates are (4, 4). As the ball strikes the
ground at a distance 14 metre from the wall, the range is m
0c h
4 + 14 = 18 metre. The equation of trajectory is 50
vx
x2 / s
y = x tan q -(1/2) g cm
0
70 v
u 2 cos 2 q 37º
vy
A C
Y O 40 0cm
Velocity of the ball at the time of collision
v sina v= ( v 2x + v 2y )
v
·
usinq
u P v cosa \v= [(560 ) 2 + ( 294 .3) 2 ] = 632.6 cm/sec

q h
vy 294 .3
A ucosq B X Again tan q = =
vx 560
é gx ù æ 294 .3 ö
or y = x tan q ê1 - 2 2 ú or q = tan–1 ç ÷ = 27° 43'
ë 2 u cos q. tan q û è 560 ø
15. (d) Initial velocity is constant let the ball touches the
é 2u 2 x ù
ground at an angle q and velocity 3u
or y = x tan q ê1 - g sin q cos q ú
ëê ûú Hence 3u cos q = u or cos q = 1/3 or sin q = 8 /3
é xù The vertical component of velocity at the ground
= x tan q ê1 - ú ... (1)
ë Rû 3 8
Here x = 4, y = 4 and R = 18 = 3u sin q = = 8u
u 3
é 4ù æ7ö
\ 4 = 4 tan q ê1 - ú = 4 tan q ç ÷
ë 18 û è9ø 20 m
or tan q = 9/7, sin q = 9/ 130 and
cos q = 7/ 130 q u
Again R = (2/g) u2 sin q cos q
= (2/9.8) × u2 × (9/ 130 ) × (7/ 130 )
For a freely falling body it covers 20 m to acquire veloc-
18´ 9.8 ´ 130 ´ 130 98 ´ 13
u2 = = = 182, ity 8u
2´ 9 ´ 7 7
\ ( 8 u)2 – 0 = 2 × 9.8 × 20 or u = 7 m/s
u = 182 metre per second.
16. (b) The horizontal range of the projectile on the ground
14. (b) The situation is shown in fig.
(a) Let the ball collide after t sec 2h 2 ´ 10
From fig. OC = OB cos 37° = 500 cos 37° R= u g ÞR= 2 10
= 2 . 2 = 2m
= 500 × 0.8 = 400 cm ...(1)
Horizontal velocity = 700 × cos 37º 17. (a) R = ut Þ t = R/u = 12/8
\ OC = 700 × cos 37° × t Now h = (1/2) gt2 = (1/2) × 9.8 × (12/8)2 = 11 m
= 700 × 0.8 × t = 560 t ... (2) 18. (b) The situation is shown in the adjoining figure.
From eqs. (1) and (2) 560 t = 400 The time taken by the body is equal to the time taken
or t = (5/7) sec. by the freely falling body from the height 29.4 m. Initial
Now h = (1/2) g t2 = (1/2) × 1000 × (5/7)2 = 255.1 cm velocity of body
EBD_7156
16 DPP/ P 06
Here uy = – uy' = – 5.0 m/s and t = 2.0 s
30º \ h = (–5.0) × 2.0 + 1/2 × 10 × (2.0)2
v = – 10 + 20 = 10 meter
29.4 m 21. (b) Let the ball B hits the ball A after t sec
The X-component of velocity of A is
v0 cos 37º = 700 cos 37º
A B The X-compoment of position of B is 300 cos 37º
u sin q = 9.8 sin 30º = 4.9 m/s
The collision will take place when the X-coordinate of
From the relation, h = u sin q t + (1/2) gt2,
A is the same as that of B.
we get 29.4 = 4.9 t + (1/2) × 9.8 t2 Þ t = 2 sec
19. (b) The horizontal and vertical velocities of the bomb are As the collision takes place at a time t, hence
independent to each other. The time taken by the bomb 700 cos 37º × t = 300 cos 37º
to hit the target can be calculated by its vertical mo- or t = (300/700) = (3/7) sec
tion. Let this time be t. Putting h = 490 m and g = 9.8 m/
In this time the ball B has fallen through a distance
s2 in the formula h = 1/2 gt2,
we have 490 = (1/2) × 9.8 × t2, y = – 1/2 gt2 (Free fall of body B)
= – 1/2 × 980 × (3 / 7)2 = – 90 cm
2 ´ 490
\t= = 10 sec Hence the ball B falls a distance 90 cm
9.8
22. (b)
The bomb will hit the target after 10 sec of its dropping. (1) Because force is constant hence acceleration will be
The horizontal velocity of the bomb is 60 km/hr which constant. When force is in oblique direction with initial
is constant. Hence the horizontal distance travelled by velocity, the resultant path is parabolic path.
the bomb in 10 sec (horizontal velocity × time)
= 60 km/hr × 10 sec 2u sin q
(2) Total time of flight = T = ,
= 60 km/hr × 10/(60 × 60) hr = 1/6 km g
Hence the distance of aeroplane from the enemy post
is 1/6 km = 1000/6 m = 500/3 meter. u 2 sin 2 q
The trajectory of the bomb as seen by an observer on Maximum height attained H =
2g
the ground is parabola. Since the horizontal velocity of
the bomb is the same as that of the aeroplane, the fall- H u sin q
ing bomb will always remain below the aeroplane. Hence Now =
T 4
the person sitting inside the aeroplane will observe the
bomb falling vertically downward. (3) Initially the height of the monkey = MB = y = x tan q
20. (a) The angle of projection of the ball is q0 ( = 30º) and the Let the monkey drop to along line MA and the bullet
velocity of projection is u ( = 10 m/s). Resolving u in reach along the parabolic path OA. If both reach at A
horizontal and vertical components, simultaneously, the monkey is hit by the bullet.
we have horizontal component,
gx 2
ux = u cos q0 = 10 cos 30º = 8.65 m/s AB = x tan q – ,
and vertical component (upward), 2u 2 cos 2 q
uy = u sin 30º = 5.0 m/s \ MA = MB – AB
If the ball hit the ground after t sec of projection, then
the horizontal range is R = ux × t = 8.65 t meter gx 2
MA = x tan q – x tan q +
R 17 . 3m 2u 2 cos 2 q
\t= = = 2.0 s
8 .65 8 .65 m / s
gx 2
If h be the height of the tower, = ....(i)
then h = u'y t + (1/2) g t2, 2u 2 cos 2 q
where uy' is the vertical component M
v
(downward) of the velocity of the ball. A
Y
u
uy
X
ux
q
O B
h
Tower Time taken by the bullet to reach point A,
X x
t= ....(ii)
R=17.3m u cos q
DPP/ P 06 17
Hence from (1), MA = (1/2) gt2 25. (c) If the ball hits the n th step, the horizontal
The monkey drops through distance (1/2) gt2 in the and vertical distances traversed are nb and nh
same time. So the monkey is hit by the bullet. respectively.
u 2 sin 2q u
(4) The range R =
g h 1
b
u2 2
\ Maximum range Rmax = d = ....(iii)
g
u 2 sin 2 q
Height H = nth step
2g
\ Maximum height R
u2 Let t be the time taken by the ball for these horizontal

Hmax= ....(iv) and vertical displacement. Then velocity along
2g
horizontal direction remains constant = u ; initial vertical
From (iii) & (iv), Hmax = d/2 velocity is zero
\ nb = ut ....(1)
u 2 sin 2q
23. (a) Range of projectile, R = nh = 0 + (1/2) gt2 ....(2)
g From (1) & (2) we get
The range is same for two angle q1 and q2 provided nh = (1/2) g (nb/u)2
q2 = 90º – q1
2hu 2
2
u sin 2q1 Þ n= (eleminating t)
gb 2
At an angle q1, range R1 =
g 26. (a) y = (1/2) gt2 (downward)
At an angle of projection q2, Þ 1000 = (1/2) × 10 × t2 Þ t = 14.15 sec
u 2 sin 2q 2 æ 144´10 3 ö
Range R2 = ç ÷
g x = ut = ç 60´60 ÷ × 14.15= 571.43 m
è ø
u 2 sin 2 ( 90 º - q1 ) u 2 sin 2q1 27. (b) Horizontal component of velocity
= = = 720 × 5/8 = 200 m/s
g g Let t be the time taken for a freely falling body from 490.
Þ R1 = R2 Then y = (1/2) gt2
\ other angle = 90º - q1 = 90º – 15º = 75º Þ 490 = (1/2) × 9.8 × t2 Þ t = 10 second
Now horizontal distance = Velocity × time
= 200 × 10 =2000m
2u sin q
24. (a) t1 = Hence the bomb missed the target by 2000 m
g 28. (a) Since W = D K implies that the final speed will be same.
2u sin(90º -q) 2u cos q 29. (a) The time of flight depends only on the vertical
t2 = = component of velocity which remains unchanged in
g g
collision with a vertical wall.
2 u 2 sin 2q 2 30. (a) In statement-2, if speed of both projectiles are same,
t1 t2 = = .R horizontal ranges will be same. Hence statement-2 is
g g g
correct explanation of statement-1.
where R is the range, Hence t1t2 µ R
EBD_7156
18 DPP/ P 07
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 07
(1) (b) We have angular displacement (6) (d) We know that
linear displacement Circumference 2pr
= radius of path Time period = =
Criticalspeed gr
DS 2 ´ 22 ´ 4
Þ Dq = = = 4 sec
r 7 ´ 10 ´ 4
Here, DS = n (2pr) = 1.5 (2p × 2 × 10–2) = 6p × 10–2
Circumference 2 pr
6 p ´ 10 -2 (7) (b) Velocity = =
\ Dq = = 3p radian Time of revolution 60
2 ´ 10 -2
2p ´ 1 p
® Total angular displacement = = cm/s
60 30
(2) (a) We have w av =
Total time
2 2
For first one third part of circle, æ pö æ pö
Change in velocity Dv = çè 30 ÷ø + çè 30 ÷ø
S1 2 pr / 3
angular displacement, q1 = =
r r p
= 2 cm/s
For second one third part of circle, 30
2pr / 3 2 p (8) (a) Let the radius of the orbit be r and the number of
q2 = = rad revolutions per second be n. Then the velocity of electron
r 3
is given by v = 2pnr,
Total angular displacement,
q = q1 + q2 = 4p/3 rad v2 4p 2 r 2 n 2
Total time = 2 + 1 = 3 sec \ Acceleration a = = = 4 p2 r n2
r r
® 4p / 3 4p 2p Substituting the given values, we have
\ w av = rad/s = = rad/s a = 4 × (3.14)2 × (5.3 × 10–11) (6.6 × 1015)2
3 6 3
= 9.1 × 1022 m/s2 towards the nucleus.
(3) (c) Angular speed of hour hand,
The centripetal force is
Dq 2p FC = ma = (9.1 × 10–31) (9.1 × 1022)
w1 = = 12 ´ 60 rad/sec = 8.3 × 10–8 N towards the nucleus.
Dt
(9) (b) Given that radius of horizontal loop
Angular speed of minute hand, r = 1 km = 1000 m
2p w 12 9000 ´ 5
w2 = rad/sec Þ 2 = Speed v = 900 km/h = = 250 m/s
60 w1 1 18
1 2 dq v2 250 ´ 250
(4) (d) We have q = w0t + at Þ = w0 + at Centripetal acceleration ac= = = 62.5 m/s2
2 dt r 1000
This is angular velocity at time t.
Now angular velocity at t = 2 sec will be Centripetal acceleration ac 62.5
\ Gravitational acceleration = = = 6.38 : 1
g 9.8
æ dq ö
w = çè dt ÷ø = w0 + 2a = 1 + 2 × 1.5 = 4 rad/sec 2
t =2sec æ 5ö
2 ç 18 ´ ÷
(5) (d) The distance covered in completing the circle is v è 18 ø
(10) (b) We know that, tan q = =
2pr = 2p × 10 cm rg 100 ´ 10
2 pr 2p ´ 10
The linear speed is v = = = 5p cm/s 1 1
t 4 = Þ q = tan–1
40 40
The linear acceleration is,
v
v2 (5p )2 (11) (a) The angular velocity is w =
a= = = 2.5 p2 cm/s2 r
r 10 Hence, v = 10 m/s
This acceleration is directed towards the centre of the circle r = 20 cm = 0.2 m \ w = 50 rad/s
DPP/ P 07 19
(12) (b) Given that w = 1.5t – 3t2 + 2 (18) (a) Let W = Mg be the weight of the car. Friction
force = 0.4 W
dw
a= = 1.5 – 6t
dt M v2 W v2
Centripetal force = =
When, a = 0 r gr
Þ 1.5 – 6t = 0
1.5 W v2
Þt= = 0.25 sec 0.4 W =
6 gr
(13) (c) Given v = 1.5 t2 + 2t Þ v2 = 0.4 × g × r = 0.4 × 9.8 × 30 = 117.6
Linear acceleration a = dv/dt = 3t + 2 Þ v = 10.84 m/sec
This is the linear acceleration at time t (19) (c) Let v be the speed of earth's rotation.
Now angular acceleration at time t We know that W = mg
a 3t + 2 3 m v2
a= Þa= Hence W = mg –
r 2 ´ 10 -2 5 r
Angular acceleration at t = 2 sec
3 m v2
3 ´ 2+2 8 or mg = mg –
5 r
(a)at t = 2sec = = × 102
2 ´ 10 -2 2
2 m v2 2g r
= 4 × 102 = 400 rad/sec2 \ mg = or v2 =
3 r 5
(14) (a) Angular displacement after 4 sec is
1 2 1 2 1 2 ´ 9.8 ´ (6400 ´ 103 )
q = w0t + at = at = × 4 × 42 = 32 rad Now v2 =
2 2 2 5
Angular velocity after 4 sec Solving, we get v = 5 × 109 m/sec,
w = w0 + at = 0 + 4 × 4 = 16 rad/sec
(15) (a) Given a = 3t – t2 æ 2g ö
w= çè ÷ø = 7.8 × 104 radian/sec.
5r
dw
Þ = 3t – t2 Þ dw = (3t – t2)dt (20) (a) Let T be the tension produced in the stretched string.
dt
The centripetal force required for the mass m to move in a
3t 2 t 3 circle is provided by the tension T. The stretched length of
Þ w= - +c the spring is r (radius of the circle). Now,
2 3
Elongation produced in the spring = (r – l0)
At t = 0, w = 0 Tension produced in the spring,
3t 2 t 3 T = k (r – l0) ........ (1)
\ c = 0, w = - Where k is the force constant
2 3 Linear velocity of the motion v = 2p r n
Angular velocity at t = 2 sec, (w)t = 2 sec
mv2 m(2prn)2
3 8 10 \ Centripetal force = =
= (4) - = rad/sec r r
2 3 3
= 4p2 r n2 m ........ (2)
Since there is no angular acceleration after 2 sec
Equating equation. (1) and (2), we get
\ The angular velocity after 6 sec remains the same.
k (r – l0) = 4p2 r n2 m (\ T = mv2/r)
(16) (d) îx + yj
ˆ , x = r cos q, Þ kr – k ll0 = 4 p r n m
2 2
y = r sin q where q = wt r (k – 4p2 n2 m) = k l0

k l0
r = î ( r cos wt) + ĵ (r sin wt) Þ r= ........(3)
(k - 4 p 2 n 2 m)
v = dr/dt = – î (wr sin wt) – ĵ (w r cos wt) Substituting the value of r in eqn. (1) we have
a = d2 r/dt2 = – w2 r
(17) (c) Let R be the normal reaction exerted by the road on the é kl 0 ù 4p 2 n 2 ml 0 k
T=k ê 2 2
- l 0 ú or T =
car. At the highest point, we have ë (k - 4p n m) û (k - 4 p2 n 2 m)
m v2
= mg – R, R should not be negative. (21) (c) Two types of acceleration are experienced by the car
(r + h)
(i) Radial acceleration due to circular path,
Therefore v2 £ (r + a)g = (8.9 + 1.1) × 10
or v2 £ 10 × 10v £ 10 m/sec v2 (30)2
ar = = = 1.8 m/s2
\ vmax = 10 m/sec r 500
EBD_7156
20 DPP/ P 07
(ii) A tangential acceleration due to increase of tangential
speed given by
at = Dv/Dt = 2 m/s2
Radial and tangential acceleration are perpendicular to each
other.
Net acceleration of car
a= 2
a 2r + a 2t = (1.8) 2 + (2) 2 = 2.7 m/s
(22) (a) For A :
N sin q mg rg
Þ = Þ tan q = 2
N cos q 2
mv / r v
mv A2
Required centripetal force = r r rg
3l But tan q = \ = 2
h h v
(net force towards centre = T1)
This will provide required centripetal force Þ v= hg = 9.8 ´ 9.8 ´ 10 -2 = 0.98 m/s
mv A2 (24) (d) (1) Centripetal force is not a real force. It is only the
particle at A, \ T1 = requirement for circular motion. It is not a new kind of
3l force. Any of the forces found in nature such as gravitational
force, electric friction force, tension in string, reaction force
m(vB2 ) may act as centripetal force.
For B : Required centripetal force =
2l (3) Work done by centripetal force is always zero.
Remember w i.e. angular velocity, of all the particles is same
v2
vA vB vC (25) (a) We know, a =
\ w= = = r
3l 2l l
When a system of particles rotates about an axis, the (10)2
Hence v = 10 m/s, r = 5 m \ a = = 20 m/s2
angular velocity of all the particles will be same, but their 5
linear velocity will be different, because of different (26) (a) Given that the mass of the particle, m = 2 kg
distances from axis of rotation i.e. v = rw. Radius of circle = 3 m
Angular velocity = 60 rev/minute
2mv 2A 60 ´ 2p
Thus for B, centripetal force =
9l = rad/sec = 2p rad/sec
60
Because the angle described during 1 revolution is 2p radian
2mv 2A
Net force towards the centre T2 – T1 = The linear velocity v = rw = 2p × 3 m/s = 6p m/s
9l
v2 (6p )2
The centripetal acceleration = = m/s2
2mv 2A 5mv 2A r 3
Þ T2 = + T1 = (Putting value of T1)
9l 9l = 118.4 m/s2
For C :
mv2
(27) (a) F = = mrw2
mvC2 mvA2 r
Centripetal force. = Here m = 0.10 kg, r = 0.5 m
3l 9l
Net force towards centre = T3 – T2 2pn 2 ´ 3.14 ´ 10
and w = = = 2 rad/s
2 2 t 31.4
mvA mvA F = 0.10 × 0.5 × (2)2 = 0.2
\ T3 – T 2 = Þ T3 = + T2
9l 9l (28) (a) In non-uniform circular motion acceleration vector
makes some angle with radius hence it is not
6mvA2 perpendicular to velocity vector.
T3 = (on putting value of T2)
9l (29) (c) If speed is increasing there is a tangential acceleration.
Net acceleration is not pointing towards centre.
mv2 (30) (b) Both statements are true but statement-2 is not correct
(23) (b) N cos q = and N sin q = mg
r explanation for statement-1.
DPP/ P 08 21
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 08
(1) (a). O centrifugal force acting upward at point D, should be equal
or greater than the force mg acting downward at point D
q l should be equal or greater than the force mg acting
T Tcosq downward. Therefore
T q m v2D
·A · Tsinq · r
³ mg or v 2D ³ r g
mg
mg From equation (2) v 2D = 2g (h – 2r),
5
Form figure \ 2g (h – 2r) ³ r g Þ h ³ r
2
T cos q = mg ...... (1)
(3) (d). See fig, Here v = 360 km/hr = 100 m/sec
2 2
mv mv
T sin q = = ...... (2)
r l sin q N
mg
mg
Form eq. (1), T = · N
cosq
When the string is horizontal, q must be 90º i.e.,cos 90º = 0
N
mg
\T= =¥
0
mg
Thus the tension must be infinite which is impossible, so
mv2
the string can not be in horizontal plane. At lower point, N – mg = ,
The maximum angle q is given by the breaking tension of R
the string in the equation T cos q = m.g
mv2
Here T (Maximum) = 8 N and m = 0.4 kg N = weight of the flyer = mg +
\ 8 cos q = 0.4 × g = 0.4 × 10 = 4 R
1 70 ´ (10000)
cos q = (4/8) = , q = 60º N = 70 × 10 + = 2100 N
2 500
The angle with horizontal = 90º – 60º = 30º
mv2
At upper point, N + mg = ,
0.4 ´ v 2 R
From equation (2), 8 sin 60º =
4 sin 60o mv2
N= – mg = 1400 – 700 = 700 N
R
32sin 2 60º
v2 = = 80 sin2 60º
0.4 mv2
At middle point, N = = 1400 N
Þ v = 80 sin 60º = 7.7 m/sec R
(2) (a). Let m be the mass of the ball. When the ball comes (4) (a). Given that U(r) = 10r3
down to B, its potential energy mgh which is converted So the force F acting on the particle is given by,
into kinetic energy. Let vB, be the velocity of the ball at B. ¶U ¶
F=– =– (10 r3) = –10 × 3 r2 = –30 r2
1 ¶r ¶r
Then, mgh = m vB2 For circular motion of the particle,
2
The ball now rises to a point D, where its potential energy
m v2
is mg(h – 2r). If vD be the velocity of the ball at D, then, F= = 30 r2
r
1 Substituting the given values, we have,
m g (h – 2 r) = m v 2D ......(2)
2
Now to complete the circular path, it is necessary that the 3 ´ v2
= 30 × (10)2 or v = 100 m/s
10
EBD_7156
22 DPP/ P 08
The total energy in circular motion (8) (b). Suppose v be the velocity of particle at the lowest
position B.
1
E = K.E. + P.E. = mv2 + U(r) According to conservation of energy
2 (K.E. + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B
1
= × 3 × (100)2 + 10 + (10)3 = 2.5 × 104 joule A
2 l
O
Angular momentum
= mvr = 3 × 100 × 10 = 3000 kg–m2/sec l
2pr 2 ´ p ´ 10 p
Also time period T = = = sec
v 100 5
B
(5) (a). Let T be the tension, q the angle made by the string
with the vertical through the point of suspension.
h 1 mg
The time period t = 2p = = p/2 1
g frequency
Þ 0 + mgl = mv2 + 0 Þ v = 2gl
2
g h 1
Therefore w = =4Þ = mv2
h g 16 q (9) (a). Maximum tension T = + mg
T r
h g
cos q = = h mv2
l 16 \ = T – mg
= 0.6125 Þ q = 52º 14' r
Linear velocity · mv2
= (l sin q)w =1 × sin 52º 14' × 4 or = 163.6 – 4 × 9.8 Þ v = 6 m/s
mg r
= 3.16 m/s
(10) (c). The situation is shown in fig. Let v be the velocity of
v2 the bob at the lowest position. In this position the P.E. of
(6) (d). Centripetal acceleration, ac = = k2 rt2 bob is converted into K.E. hence -
r
\ Variable velocity v = k2r 2 t2 = k r t
The force causing the velocity to varies
dv
F= m =mkr
dt
The power delivered by the force is,
P = Fv = mkr × krt = mk2r2t
1
(7) (a). We know centripetal acceleration mgl = mv2 Þ v2 = 2gl ....(1)
2
(tangential velocity) 2 (200)2 If T be the tension in the string,
ac = = = 400 m/sec2
radius 100
mv 2
then T – mg = ....(2)
at l
From (1) & (2), T = 3 mg
r
(11) (b). The velocity of the swimmer w.r.t. water vSR = 4.0 km/
ac h in the direction perpendicular to the river. The velocity of
O r
river w.r.t. the ground is vRG = 3.0 km/h along the length
of river.
Y
Tangential acceleration
at = 100 m/sec2 (given) VSG
2 2 o VSR
\ anet = a c + a t + 2a c a t cos 90 = 2
ac + a t 2
X
= (400) 2 + (100) 2 = 100 17 m/s2
VRG
DPP/ P 08 23
r
The velocity of the swimmer w.r.t. the ground is vSG where
mv2
= T + mg cos a
® ® ® l
V SG = V SR + V RG
On leaving the circular path
2
VSG = VSR 2
+ VRG = 4 2 + 32 T=0
= 16 + 9 = 25 = 5 km / hr mv2
\ = mg cos a
(12) (b). The minimum speed at highest point of a vertical circle l
Þ v2 = g l cosa ....(1)
is given by vc = rg = 20 ´ 9.8 = 14 m/s According to law of conservation of energy
(13) (a). The speed at highest point must be (K.E. + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B
2p 1
v> gr , v = rw = r Þ 0 + 2mgl = mv2 + mgh
T 2
2p Þ v2 = 2g (2l – h) ....(2)
\ r > rg
T 5
From (1) & (2) h = l
2pr 3
r 0.5
T< < 2p < 2p < 1.4 sec h-l
rg g 9.8 Also, cos a =
Maximum period of revolution = 1.4 sec l
(14) (a). Let the particles leaves the sphere at height h, S
(16) (d) T sin q = M w 2 R
A
q
N T sin q = Mw 2 L sin q
B From (i) and (ii) L
h q q T
mg v
T = Mw 2 L q
2
= M4 p 2 n 2 L mw R
R
2
mv2
æ 2ö
= M4p2 ç ÷ L
= mg cos q – N è pø
R
When the particle leaves the sphere i.e. N = 0 = 16 ML
2
mv 50
= mg cos q (17) (a). v = 60 km/hr = m/s
R 3
Þ v2 = gR cos q ....(1) r = 0.1 km = 100m
According to law of conservation of energy
(K.E. + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B v2
\ tan q = = 0.283
1 rg
Þ 0 + mgR = mv2 + mgh \ q = tan–1 (0.283)
2
Þ v2 = 2g (R – h) ....(2)
v2
2 (18) (c). We know that tan q = ..... (1)
From (1) & (2), h = R rg
3 Let h be the relative raising of outer rail with respect to
2 inner rail. Then
Also cos q=
3 h
(15) (a). Let the body will have the circular path at height h tan q = ...... (2)
l
above the bottom of circle from figure
(l = separation between rails)
v
v2
B From (1) & (2) , h = ×l
rg
120
h
O Hence v = 48 km/hr = m/s, (r = 400 m, l = 1m),
9
mg
(120 / 9)2 ´ 1
\ h= = 0.045 m = 4.5 cm
A 400 ´ 9.8
EBD_7156
24 DPP/ P 08
(19) (a). The woman has two velocities simultaneously while
running on the deck, one velocity is equal to the velocity mv2B
of ship i.e. 12 m/s due east and other velocity is 5 m/s due TB L 4 v 2 + gL 4
\ = = or B =
north. TT mvT2 1 v 2T - gL 1
- mg
N L
/s
13 m or v 2B + gL = 4v 2T - 4gL but v 2B = v 2T + 4gL
5 m/s
12m/s E \ vT2 + 4gL + gL = 4v 2T - 4gL Þ 3v 2T = 9gL

The resultant velocity of woman 10
\ vT2 = 3 ´ g ´ L = 3 ´ 10 ´ or v T = 10m / sec
= (12)2 + (5)2 = 13 m/s 3
r r r
(20) (c). If we consider velocity of rain with respect to the man (22) (d). Use definition of relative velocity VPQ = VP - VQ
is V km/h. r r
VP = const. ; VQ = const.
r r r r
vrg = 4km/h Rain \ | VPQ | = | VQP | = const. ; | VP | > | VQ |
r r
\ VPQ ® + ve ; VQP = - ve i.e. towards origin.
vmg = 3km/h (23) (c). He can only reach the opposite point if he can cancel
up the velocity of river by his component of velocity.
(24) (a). v = Rw
Road v1 > v2
(25) (b), (26) (b), (27) (c).
Relative velocity of man w.r.t. ground The path of a projectile as observed by other projectile is a
® ® ® straight line.
v mg = vm - v g ........(1)
u0sinq
Velocity of rain w.r.t. ground
® ® ® q
u0cosq
v rg = vr - v g ........(2)
u0sinq
u0cosq q v ba
vmg = 3 km/hr u0cosq B
u0sinq
vrm vrm= 4 km/hr v A = u cos q iˆ + (u sin q - gt) ˆj.vAB = (2u cos q) î
v B = -u cos q î + (u sin q - gt) ˆj ; a BA = g - g = 0

-vmg The vertical component u0 sin q will get cancelled.
The relative velocity will only be horizontal which is equal
® ® ® to 2u0 cos q
Velocity of rain w.r.t. man v rm = vr - v m Hence B will travel horiozontally towards left w.r.t A with
On subtracting eqn. 1 from eqn. 2 constant speed 2u0 cos q and minimum distance will be h.
® ® ® Srel l
v rm = v rg - v mg =
Vrel 2u 0 cos q
(28) (a) When two bodies are moving in opposite direction,
| vrm |= vrg 2 + vmg 2 = 42 + 32 = 5 km / hr relative velocity between them is equal to sum of the
(21) (d) Since the maximum tension TB in the string moving in velocity of bodies. But if the bodies are moving in same
the vertical circle is at the bottom and minimum tension TT direction their relative velocity is equal to difference in
is at the top. velocity of the bodies.
(29) (b) Time taken is shortest when one aims perpendicular to
mv2B mv2T the flow.
\ TB = + mg and TT = - mg
L L
(30) (d) v r / m = v r2 + v m
2
DPP/ P 09 25
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 09
(1) (a) Force causing the acceleration = 400 – 200 = 200N (8) (a) (a) The elevator having an initial upward speed of 8 m/
mass of the boy = 200/9.8 sec is brought to rest within a distance of 16 m
200 Hence, 0 = (8)2 + 2a (16) (Q v2 = u2 + 2as),
hence acceleration = F/m = × 9.8 = 9.8 m/s2
200 8´8
r a= - = – 2 m/sec2
F 6iˆ + 8jˆ 2 ´ 16
(2) (a) Acceleration = = in the direction of force Resultant upward force on elevator = T – mg. According to
m 10
and displacement Newton's law.
T – mg = ma
ˆ ˆ
r r 1r 1 æ 6i + 8j ö or T = mg + ma = m (g + a) = 1000 (9.8 – 2) = 7800 N
S = ut + at 2 = 0 + ç 10 ÷ 100 = 30 î + 40 ĵ (b) Let P be the upward force exerted on the man by the
2 2 è ø
elevator floor. If m' be the mass of the man, then, weight of
4 the man acting downward = m' g ,
So the displacement is 50 m along tan–1 with x-axis Upward force on the man = P – m'g
3
According to Newton's law. P–m' g = m' a or
(3) (a) From the law of conservation of momentum
P = m' (a + g) = (– 2 + 9.8) = 624 N
1000 × 5 + 0 = (1000 + 60) v
(9) (d) As P and Q move down, the length l decreases at the
1000 ´ 5 rate of U m/s
Þv= = 4.71 m/s
1060
A b b B
10
(4) (b) Weight of disc = kg , y
1000
q q
Let speed of the bullet = v
So rate of change of momentum of the bullets P Q
2 ´ 10 ´ 5
=
1000
v = applied force on the disc M
2 ´ 10 ´ 5 10 ´ g From figure, l2 = b2 + y2
Now × v=
1000 1000 Differentiating with respect to time
Þ v = 0.98 m/s2 = 98 cm/s2
dl dy
(5) (c) Total mass = 80 + 40 = 120 kg 2l = 2y (Q b is constant)
The rope cannot with stand this load so the fire man should dt dt
slide down the rope with some acceleration dy l dl 1 dl U
\ The maximum tension = 100 × 9.8 N \ = . = . =
dt y dt cos q dt cosq
m (g – a) = tension ,
120 (9.8 – a) = 100 × 9.8 Þ a = 1.63 m/s2 (10) (a) The engine, coach, coupling and resistance are, shown
(6) (b) Suppose the velocity of the body at the instant when it in figure.
reaches the pile of sand be v. Then
v2 = 0 + 2 (9.8) × (5 metre) = 98(Q v2 = u2 + 2as) COACH ENGINE
T
98 DRIVING
a=– = – 980 m/sec2 FORCE
2 ´ (0.05)
Driving force = 4500 N
Now, retarding force
F = mass × acceleration= 0.02 kg × (– 980 m/sec2) = –19.6 N (5 + 4)104
(7) (b) Impulse = F . t = Area under F-t curve from 4 ms to 16 Opposing force (Resistance) = = 900 N
100
ms = Area under BCDFB
= Area of trapizium BCEF + area of DCDE Resultant force = 4500 – 900 = 3600 N
Mass of engine and coach = 9 × 104 kg
1 1 According to Newton's law, F = ma
= (200+800) (2×10–6) + ×10 × 10–6 × 800
2 2 \ 3600 = 9 × 104 a
= 10 × 10–4 + 40 × 10–4 N–s = 50 × 10–4 or a = (3600) / (9 × 104) = 0.04 m/sec2
= 5.0 × 10–3 N-s So acceleration of the train = 0.04 m/sec2
EBD_7156
26 DPP/ P 09
Now considering the equilibrium of the coach only, we (17) (a) The change in momentum in the final direction is equal
have (T – R) = 4 × 104 × 0.04 (Q F = ma)
2.50 æ 250 ö
4 ´ 104
to the impulse = × 28 – çè - 1000 ´ 24÷ø = 13 Ns
1000
or T – = 4 × 104 × 0.04,
100
impulse 13
T = 4 × 104 × 0.04 + 4 × 102 = 1600 + 400 = 2000 N and force = = = 1300 N
time 1/ 100
® ®
(11) (d) Given that F1 = (8iˆ + 10j)ˆ and F = (4iˆ + 8j) ˆ in the direction of the ball.
2
r r dpr r r
Then the total force F = 12iˆ + 18jˆ (18) (b). We know F = Þ Fdt = dp
dt
r r r
r F 12iˆ + 18jˆ Þ 2 × 2 = dp Þ 4 = dp
So acceleration a = = = 2iˆ + 3jˆ m/sec2
m 6 Therefore change in momentum = 4 Ns
Net acceleration r dpr
®
(19) (a) We know = F
dt
| a | = 2 2 + 32 = 4+9 = 13 m/sec2 r r r r r r
(12) (c) From the relation Þ Fdt = dp = p2 - p1 = mv 2 - mv1
F 1000 r
F = ma Þ a = = = 1 m/s2 Þ 4 ĵ . 1 = 2 . v2 – 2(2 î )
m 1000
r ˆ = 2.vr - 2 (2i)ˆ = 4jˆ + 4iˆ
As the force is brake force, acceleration is – 1 m/s2 using Þ 2v2 4j.1 2
relation v2 = u2 + 2as, we obtain r
Þ v2 = 2iˆ + 2ˆj
2
æ 5ö r
2 çè18 ´ ÷ø Þ | v2 | = 2 2 m/s
u 18
2as = u2 Þ s = = = 12.5 m (20) (c) Initial momentum of the ball
2a 2
150
(13) (a) The water jet striking the block at the rate of 1 kg/s at a = × 12 = 1.8 kg.m/sec
speed of 5 m/s will exert a force on the block 1000
dm 150
F=v =5×1=5N Final momentum of the ball =– × 20= – 3.0 kg m/sec
dt 1000
Change in momentum = 4.8 kg m/sec
4.8
2 kg Average force exerted = Impulse/ time = = 480 N
a .01
(21) (b) Initial momentum of the body = mu = 20 × 3 = 60
And under the action of this force of 5 N, the block of mass and final momentum of the body = – mu = –20 × 3 = – 60
2 kg will move with an acceleration given by, The change in momentum of body in initial direction
F = ma Þ a = F/m = 5/2 = 2.5 m/s2 = – 60 – 60 = –120
(14) (a) Relative speed of the ball = (v + u) The change in momemtum imparted to the body in opposite
Speed after rebouncing = – (v + u) direction = 120
Dv m[(v + u) - {-(v + u)}] \ The impulse imparted to the body = 120 Ns
So, F = m = (22) (a) (1) Since the lift is moving down with an acceleration of
Dt t
3 m/sec2, then the inertial force F = ma, acts upwards on
2m(v + u) the body
=
t
2
R a=3 m/s
dp F=ma
(15) (b) F = Þ F dt = dp = p2 – p1
dt
Þ F × 1 = mnv – 0
Þ F = mnv
(Total mass of the bullets fired in 1 sec = mn) mg
(16) (a) The initial momentum = 15 × 10 = 150 kgm/s and Now, R + F= mg
change in momentum 0 - 150 or R = mg – F = mg – ma = m (g – a) = 60 (9.8 – 3) = 408 N
Force = = = –10 N (2) When the lift is moving down with constant velocity
time 15
A constant force of 10 N must be acting in opposite a = 0 and hence, R = mg = 60 × 9.8 = 588 N
direction to the motion of body. (3) The lift is now moving down with a retardation of
DPP/ P 09 27
3 m/sec2. i.e. W' = W + R = m (g + a)
The retardation is 3 m/sec2 in the downward direction is Hence, scale show a reading of
equivalent to an acceleration of 3 m/sec2 upwards.
Hence the direction of fictitious force is downwards. æ 50g ö
m (g + a) Newton = çè 50 +
a ÷ø
kg wt
Now, R = mg + ma = m (g + a) = 60 (12.8) = 768 N
(23) (b) When the lift is moving up m (g + a) = force (26) (a) Tension = m (g + a), when lift moving up, putting the
values, we get
æ gö 175 = 25 (9.8 + a) Þ a = 2.8 m/s2
10 ç g + ÷
m(g + a) è 3ø [negative sign shows that lift is moving downward]
The scale reading = = = 13.3 kg
g g (27) (b) Apparent tension, T = 2T0
When lift is moving down the scale reading æ a0 ö
So, T = 2T0 = T0 ç 1 + ÷
æ gö è gø
10 ç g - ÷
m(g - a) è 3ø
= = = 6.67 kg a
g g or 2 = 1 + 0 Þ a0 = g = 9.8 m/s2
g
(24) (a)
(1) A reference frame in which Newton’s first law is valid is (28) (b) Cloth can be pulled out without dislodging the dishes
called an inertial reference frame. from the table because of inertia. Therefore,
(2) Frame moving at constant velocity relative to a known statement- 1 is true.
inertial frame is also an inertial frame. This is Newton's third law and hence true. But
(3) Idealy, no inertial frame exists in the universe for statement 2 is not a correct explanation of statement 1.
practical purpose, a frame of reference may be considered (29) (d) According to Newton’s second law
as Inertial if its acceleration is negligible with respect to
the acceleration of the object to be observed. Force
Acceleration = i.e. if net external force on the
(4) To measure the acceleration of a falling apple, earth can Mass
be considered as an inertial frame. body is zero then acceleration will be zero.
(25) (a)
(i) In the case of constant velocity of lift, there is no reaction, dp
(30) (c) F= = Slope of momentum -time graph
therefore the apparent weight = actual weight. Hence the dt
reading of machine is 50 kg wt. i.e. Rate of change of meomentum = Slope of
(ii) In this case the acceleration is upward the reaction R = momentum-time graph = force.
ma acts downward, therefore apparent weight is more than
actual weight .
EBD_7156
28 DPP/ P 10
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 10
(1) (c) Force on the block (5) (a) We have acceleration
= Mass of the block × acceleration of the system
Fcos q 50 3
a= = = 5 3 m /sec2
P m 10
=M×
M+m The velocity after 2 sec, v = u + at
1 Þ v = 0 + 5 3 × 2 = 10 3 m/sec
(2) (b) Mass of the rope = 8 × = 4 kg (6) (a) All the forces acting on the two blocks are shown in
2
fig. As the blocks are rigid under the action of a force F,
Total mass = 50 + 4 = 54 kg both will move together with same acceleration.
F 108 R1
\ a= = = 2 m/s2
m 54
Force utilised in pulling the rope =4×2 = 8 N R1 M
Force applied on mass = 108 – 8 = 100 N
(3) (b) Mass of the rope = 15 × 2 = 30 kg F R
A
m
F 25 5
acceleration = = = m/s2
m 30 6 mg Mg
At the point 7 m away from point of application the a = F/(m+M) = 3/(1+2) = 1 m/s2
mass of first part of rope = 14 kg Now as the mass of larger block is m and its acceleration
5 a so force of contact i.e. action on it.
\ Force used in pulling 14 kg = 14 × = 11.67 N MF 2´3
6
f = Ma = = = 2N
The remaining force = (25 –11.67)N = 13.33 N M + m 2 +1
(4) (b) The various forces acting are shown in fig. (7) (a) As the same force is applied to the combined
The force of 100N has mass, we have
(i) horizontal component of 100 cos 30º = 50 3 N 1 1 1 a1a 2 5 ´ 15

= + or a= = = 3.75 m/s2
and (ii) A vertical component = 100 sin 30º = 50N a a1 a 2 a1 + a 2 5 + 15
(8) (a) As net force on the rod = F1 – F2 and its mass is M so
R acceleration of the rod will be
a = (F1 – F2)/M ...(i)
100 Now considering the motion of part AB of the rod,
N 50 3N which has mass (M/L)y,
30° Acceleration a given by
(i) Assuming that tension at B is T
M
W=10×10N F1 – T = y×a (from F = ma)
L
50N
M F1 - F2
Since the block is always in contact with the table, the Þ F1 – T = y (using eq. (1))
L M
net vertical force
R = mg + F sin q = (10 × 10 + 50) N = 150N æ yö æ yö
Þ T = F1 ç 1 - ÷ + F2 ç ÷
When the block moves along the table, work is done è Lø è Lø
by the horizontal component of the force. Since the (9) (b) The net acceleration of the system is given by
distance moves is 10 m, the work done is 1 1 1
= +
50 3 × 10 = 500 3 Joule. a a1 a 2
If v is the speed acquired by the block, the work done 1 1 1 1
must be equal to the kinetic energy of the block. = + + ...... = 1 + 2 + 3 + ......... + n
a a1 a 2 an
Therefore, we have
1 n n 2
500 3 = × 10 × v2 Þ v2 = 100 3 Þ v = 13.17 m/sec = [2 + (n – 1) 1] = [n + 1] =
2 2 2 n(n + 1)
DPP/ P 10 29
(10) (a) As the mass of the system is 6 + 4 + 2 = 12 kg and (15) (b) The string is massless and inextensible the tension T is
applied force is 60 N, the acceleration of the system same. Let mass B move down the inclined plane.
F 60 For B the equation of motion m1g sin q – T = m1a
a= = = 5 m/s2 30 × 9.8 × sin 53º – T = 30a
m 12
Þ 235.2 – T = 30 a ...(1)
Now at point A as tension in pulling the rope of mass
and for A the equation of motion
2kg and block Q of mass 4kg.
TA = (2 + 4) × 5 = 30N T – 20 × 9.8 × sin 37º = 20a
Similarly for B and C, T – 117.6 = 20a ...(2)
TB= (1 + 4) × 5 = 25N From (1) & (2) T = 164.64 N
and TC = (0 + 4) × 5 = 20N (16) (c)
(11) (a) In case (a), the pulling force = 2mg – mg = mg
and the mass is 2m + m = 3m
so acceleration a = mg/3m = g/3
While in case (b), the pulling force = 2mg – mg = mg
T
but, the mass in motion = m + 0 = m
Acceleration, a = mg/m = g ma m a
(12) (c) It this problem as the pulling force is 2mg while
a
opposing force is mg, so net force
F= 2mg – mg = mg,
mg
and as the mass in motion = m + m + m = 3m (Force diagram in the frame of the car)
force mg g Applying Newton’s law perpendicular to string
So the acceleration = = =
mass 3m 3 mg sin q = ma cos q
Now as A is accelerated up while B and C down. so
tension T1, is such that mg < T1 < 2mg a
tan q =
Actually for the motion of A, g
4 Applying Newton’s law along string
T1 = m (g + a) = m(g + g/3) = mg
3 Þ T - m g 2 + a 2 = ma
Now to calculate tension in the string BC we consider
the downward motion of C,
i.e. T2 = m (g – a) = m (g – g/3) = (2/3) mg or T = m g 2 + a 2 + ma
(13) (a) As pulley Q is not fixed so if it moves a distance d the (17) (a) As A moves up and B moves down with acceleration a
length of string between P and Q will changes by for the motion of A ,
2d (d from above and d from below) i.e. M will move 2d. T – 11 g = 11 a ... (i)
This in turn implies that if a (®2d) is the acceleration of for the motion of B,
M, the acceleration of Q and so 2M will be of (a/2) 11.5 g – T = 11.5 a ...(ii)
Now if we consider the motion of mass M, it is From (i) & (ii) ,
accelerated down so T = M(g – a) ...(1)
And for the motion of Q, m1 - m 2
2T – T' = 0 × (a/2) = 0 Þ T' = 2T ...(2) a= m +m
1 2
And for the motion of mass 2M,
T' = 2M (a/2) Þ T' = Ma ...(3) (11.5 - 11)9.8
g= = 0.218 m/sec2
1 11.5 + 11
From equation (2) and (3) T = Ma, so eq. (1) reduces Assuming that the particles are initially at rest, their
2
velocity at the end of 4 sec will be
æ 1ö 2 v = u + at = 0 + 0.218 × 4 = 0.872 m/s
çè 2 ÷ø Ma = M (g – a) Þ a = g (18) (a) The height ascended by A in 4 sec
3
(14) (a) The tension is same in two segments 1 2 1
For B the equation is h = ut + at = 0 + (0.218) 42 = 1.744 m
2 2
(40 × 9.8 – T) = 40a ...(1)
This is also the height descended by B in that time.
For C the equation is
(19) (c) At the end of 4 sec the string is cut. Now A and B are no
1 longer connected bodies but become free ones, falling
(T – 50 × 9.8 × ) = 50a ...(2)
2 under gravity.
From equation (1) and (2) a = 1.63 m/s2 Velocity of A, when the string was cut
distance of fall = 0.872 m/s upwards.
1 2 1 Acceleration a = – g (acting downwards),
S= at = × 1.63 × 42 = 13.04 m displacement from this position in the subsequent 2 sec
2 2
EBD_7156
30 DPP/ P 10
(2) If the downward acceleration of the lift is a = g, then the
1 2 1
h = ut + at = (0.872) × 2 + (–9.8) 22 body will enjoy weightlessness.
2 2 (3) If the downward acceleration of the body is a > g, then
= 1.744 – 4.9 × 4 = –17.856m the body will rise up to the ceiling of lift
A descends down by a distance of 17.856 m from the (25) (d), (26) (d), (27) (a).
position it occupied at the end of 4 sec from its start. B
has a free fall. Its position is given by Initial elongation = 2R cos 30° = 3R
So the acceleration of mass M is (2/3)g
while tension in the string PQ will be N
T = M(g – (2/3)g) = (1/3)Mg F
The force exerted by clamp on the pulley
30° 60° mg
2 2 2
= T +T = Mg
3
(20) (a) Here the system behaves as a rigid system, therefore
every part of the system will move with same accelera-
tion. Thus applying newton’s law
mg – T = ma ......... (i) Extension in the spring is
2T – mg = ma ......... (ii) x = AB – R = 2R cos 30° – R = ( 3 - 1) R
Doubling the first equation and adding
\ Spring force
1
mg = 3ma or acceleration a = g ( 3 - 1) mg
3 F = kx = ( 3 - 1) R = 2mg
(21) (c) Tension in the string R
FBD of bead is
æ gö
T = m (g – a) = m çè g - ÷ø 3 3 3
3 N = F (mg cos 30°) = (2mg + mg) = mg
2 2
2 Tangential force F1 = F sin 30° – mg sin 30°
T= mg
3
mg
(22) (a) = (2mg – mg) sin 30° =
(1) Inertia µ mass 2
(2) 1 Newton = 105 dyne \ tangential acceleration = g/2
28. (d) Here the acceleration of both will be same, but their
r DM r r masses are different. Hence, the net force acting on
(3) Thrust on rocket F = v - Mg
Dt each of them will not be same.
(4) Apparent weight of a body in the lift accelerated up is 29. (c) The FBD of block A in Figure is
W = m (g + a).
(23) (b) N
(1) If a1, a2, ... an be the accelerations produced in n
different bodies on applying the same force, the mg
acceleration produced in their combination due to the
The force exerted by B on A is N (normal reaction). The
1 1 1 1
same force will be = + + ...... force acting on A are N (horizontal) and mg (weight
a a1 a 2 an downwards). Hence statement I is false.
(2) Newton's Ist and IIIrd law can be derived from second 30. (d) T – m1g = m1a – .... (1)
law therefore IInd law is the most fundamental law out m2g – T = m2a – .... (2)
of the three law.
(24) (a) æ 2m1m2 ö æ m 2 - m1 ö
Solving (1) and (2), T1 = çè m + m ÷ø g a = ç m + m ÷ g
(1) For equilibrium of a body under the action of concurrent 1 2 è 1 2ø
® ® ® ®
forces F1 + F2 + F3 + .....Fn = 0
DPP/ P 11 31
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 11
(1) (a) Let the contact force on the block by the surface be F
minimum possible force F that can be applied, the friction
which makes an angle q with the vertical. The component
is limiting and hence
of F perpendicular to the contact surface is the normal f = mN, where N is normal force.
force N and the component F parallel to the surface is the in the vertical direction, there is no acceleration
friction f. As the surface is horizontal, N is vertically upward. \ N = mg
For vertical equilibrium in the horizontal direction,
F N let the acceleration be a, then
q mN = ma
mmg = ma
a = mg
f f = mN
Next consider the motion of M
The equation of motion is
N = Mg = (0.400) (10) = 4.0 N
F = mN = Ma
The frictional force is f = 3.0 N
F – mmg = Mmg
f 3 F = mg (M + m)
tan q = = Þ q = tan–1 (3/4) = 37º
N 4
N
(2) (c) The magnitude of the contact force is
F= 2 2
N 2 + f 2 = (4) + (3) = 5.0 N
(3) (c) The forces on the block are f = mN F
N f
Mg
(5) (b) When A moves with B the force opposing the motion is
mg the only force of friction between B and S the horizontal
q and velocity of the system is constant
(i) the weight mg downward by the earth R2

(ii) the normal contact force N by the incline, and
(iii) the friction f parallel to the incline up the plane, by the A
incline.
R1
As the block is at rest, these forces should add up to zero. F
Also since q is the maximum angle to prevent slipping, this B
is a case of limiting equilibrium and so f1
f = mSN
Taking component perpendicular to the lncline, F = f1 = mR1 = 0.25 (4 + 8) = 3N
N – mg cos q = 0 Þ N = mg cos q ....... (1) (6) (d) When A is held stationary the friction opposing the
Taking component parallel to the incline motion is between A and B and B and S. So
f – mg sin q = 0 Þ f = mg sin q ........ (2)
\ mSN = mg sin q R2 A
Dividing (2) by (1) ms = tanq
q = tan–1mS = tan–1 (0.3) f2
(4) (a) When the maximum force F is applied, both the blocks R1
F B
move together towards right. The only horizontal force on
the upper block of mass m is that due to the friction by the
S f1
lower block of mass M. Hence this force on m should be
towards right. The force of friction on M by m should be F = mR1 + mR2 = 3 + 0.25 (4)
towards left by Newton's third law. As we are talking of the F= 3+1= 4N
EBD_7156
32 DPP/ P 11
(7) (d) In this situation for dynamic equilibrium of B (10) (c) If y is the maximum length of chain which can be hang
out side the table without sliding, then for equilibrium of
R2 A the chain, the weight of hanging part must be balanced by
force of friction from the portion on the table
f2
f2 L–y
F R1 R
f1 f1
F = mR1 + mR2 + T ..... (1) W’

While for the uniform motion of A y
T = mR2 ....... (2)
Substituting T from Equation (2) in (1) we get
F = mR1 + 2mR2 = 3 + 2 x 1 = 5N
(8) (a) Figure shows the forces acting on the two blocks. As
we are looking for the maximum value of M/m, the W
equilibrium is limiting. Hence the frictional forces are equal
to m times corresponding normal force. W = fL ....... (1)
Equilibrium of the block m gives
M
N1 But from figure W = y g and
L
T M
m R = W' = (L – y)g
mN1 N2 L
mM
mg mN1 M So that fL = mR = (L – y) g
L
mg Substituting these values of W and fL in equation (1) we
q
get
T = mN1 and N1 = mg Þ T = mmg .... (1) M M
Next consider the equilibrium of the block M. Taking yg = m (L – y) g
L L
components parallel to the incline
T + mN2 = Mg sin q (11) (d) The insect will crawl up the bowl till the component of
Taking components normal to the Incline its weight along the bowl is balanced by limiting friction
N2 = Mg cos q so, resolving weight perpendicular to the bowl and along
These give T = Mg (sin q – m cos q) ...... (2) the bowl we get
From (1) and (2) mmg = Mg (sin q – m cos q)
M m R
=
m sin q - m cos q
(9) (a) The situation is shown in figure in the limiting
y
equilibriums the frictional force f will be equal to mN.
fL q R = mg sin
N
F q mg sinq mg cos
q
F q
fS = m N
fL = mg cos q
Mg y 1
R R 1 =
For horizontal equilibrium tanq = = 1 = ; 2 2 m
f L mR1 m R -y
F sin q = mN
For vertical equilibrium R1
F cos q + mg = N m2y2 = R2 – y2 ; y=
Eliminating N from these equations m2 + 1
F sin q = mF cos q + mmg
R é ù
m 1
F= So, h = R – y = R – = R ê1 - ú
(sin q - m cos q) m2 + 1 ê (m 2
+ 1) ú
ë û
DPP/ P 11 33
(12) (a) (18) (a) (i) In the force applied v/s friction graph : The graph is
a straight line of slope 45º for small F and a straight line
parallel to the F-axis for large F.
m (ii) There is small kink on the graph
(19) (a) (i) force of friction between two bodies may be equal to
L h zero
(ii) bodies may be rough
(20) (b) It is easier to pull a body than to push, because the
friction force is more in pushing than that in pulling
Loss in P.E. in reaching the bottom = mgh and gain in K.E. (21) (a)ma = µmg
a = µg
1 (22) (a)
reaching the bottom = mv2
2 (1) Kinetic friction is lesser than limiting friction.
where v is velocity gained by the body in reaching the (2) In rolling the surfaces at contact do not rub each other.
bottom (3) If a body is at rest and no pulling force is acting on it,
force of friction on it is zero.
1
\ Net loss in energy = mgh – mv2 (23) (a)
2 (1) Force of friction is partically independent of microscopic
work done against friction = FL area of surface in contact and relative velocity between
them. (if it is not high)
1 2
\ mgh – mv2 = FL ; v = (mgh - FL) (2) Normally with increase in smoothness friction
2 m decreases. But if the surface area are made too smooth by
(13) (a) Let R be the normal reaction on the block exerted by the polishing and cleaning the bonding force of adhesion will
floor. The limiting (maximum) force of static friction is increase and so the friction will increase resulting in 'Cold
fs = msR = msmg welding'
(3) Friction is a non conservative force, i.e. work done
= 0.4 × 2kg × 9.8 ms–2 = 7.84 N
against friction is path dependent.
The applied force F is 2.5 N, that is less than the limiting
(24) (c)
frictional force. Hence under the force F, the block does
(2) Friction may opposes the motion
not move. So long the block does not move, the (adjustable)
(4) If the applied force is increased the force of static friction
frictional force is always equal to the applied force. Thus
also increases upto limiting friction.
the frictional force is 2.5 N.
(25) (a), (26) (a), (27) (a).
(14) (b) When the block does not slip on the table surface, it
Fmax = kx + µ mg
performs simple harmonic motion along with the table.
Fmin = kx – µ mg
x = a sin wt
\ Fmax + Fmin = 2µ mg
The instantaneous acceleration of the block is
or 2 = 2 µ 10
d2 x \ µ = 0.1
= –w2a sin wt Fmax + Fmin = 2kx ......... (1)
dt 2
From graph, Fmax + Fmin = 5 and x = 0.1
Putting in eq. (1)
d2 x
The maximum acceleration is = w2a t = 2k (0.1) ; k = 25 N/m
dt 2 max
When x = 0.03
The maximum force on the block is fmax = mw2a kx = 25 × 0.03 = 0.75 N, which is less than µ mg
where m is its mass. The frictional force on the block is = 0.1 × 10 = 1N
mmg. since the block is at rest with respect to the table, we \ The block will be at rest, without applying force F.
have mw2a = mmg (28) (b) It is easier to pull a heavy object than to push it on a
(2pf)2a = mg level ground. Statement-1 is true. This is because the
mg 0.72 ´ 10 normal reaction in the case of pulling is less as compared
Þa= = = 0.02 m by pushing. (f = m N). Therefore the functional force is
4p 2f 2 4 ´ (3.14) 2 ´ 32
small in case of pulling.
(15) (c) Stopping distance is independent on mass. Statement-2 is true but is not the correct explanation of
(16) (a) (i) coefficient of static friction is always greater than the statement-1.
coefficient of kinetic friction
(29) (c) W = (force) × (displacement of point of application)
(ii) limiting friction is always greater than the kinetic friction
(30) (d) Statement – 2 is false because friction force may be
(iii) limiting friction is never less than static friction
more than applied force when body is retarding and
(17) (d) The system can not remain in equilibrium
external force is acting on body.
EBD_7156
34 DPP/ P 12
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 12
r
(1) (a) Here F = -î + 2jˆ + 3kˆ &
r v2 mu 2
Now from (1), m = kt +
d = (0 – 0) î + (0 – 0) ĵ + (4 – 0) k̂ = 4 k̂ 2 2
rr
\ W (Work done) = F.d = (-î + 2jˆ + 3k) ˆ . 4 k̂ = 12 J 1
Þ m (v2 – u2) = kt .....(2)
(2) (a) The minimum force with a body is to be pulled up along 2
the inclined plane is mg (sin q + m cos q) mdv
rr Again v= k
Work done, W = F.d dt
= Fd cos q = mg (sin q + m cos q) × d dv
= 5 × 9.8 (sin 60º + 0.2 cos 60º) × 2 = 98.08 J Þ m.v v = k Þ mv2 dv = kdx
dx
5 5 Intergrating,
(d) W = ò F dx = (7 - 2x + 3x 2 ) dx
(3)
ò 1
0 0 m (v3 – u3) = kx .....(3)
3
5 5 From (2) and (3),
é 2x 2 ù é 3x3 ù
= [7 x ] – ê 2 ú + ê 3 ú = 135 Joule
5
3 æ v -u ö
2 2
0 êë úû 0 êë úû 0
t= ç ÷ (x)
(4) (d) Given that, power = Fv = P = constant 2 è v3 - u 3 ø
dv mdv (7) (b) Mass of the chain hanging = 4 × 3 = 12 kg
or m v=P [as F = ma = ] Shift in center of gravity = 4/2 = 2m
dt dt
Work done, W = mgh = 12 × 9.8 × 2 = 235 .2 J
P v2 P (8) (b) Mass of 2 litre, water = 2 kg
or ò v dv = ò m dt Þ 2
=
m
t + C1 Total mass to be lifted = 2 + 0.5 = 2.5 kg
Work done , W = mgh = 2.5 × 9.8 × 6 = 147 J
Now as initially, the body is at rest
(9) (b) The following two forces are acting on the body
i.e v = 0 at t = 0 so, C1 = 0
(i) Weight mg is acting vertically downward
2Pt (ii) The push of the air is acting upward.
\ v= As the body is accelerating downward, the resultant force
m
is (mg – F)
1/2 Workdone by the resultant force to fall through a vertical
ds ds æ 2Pt ö
(5) (b) By definition v = or =ç distance of 20 m = (mg – F) × 20 joule
dt dt è m ÷ø
1
1/2 1/2 Gain in the kinetic energy = mv2
æ 2Pt ö æ 2P ö 2 3/2 2
Þ ò ds = ò ç dt Þ s = ç ÷ t + C2
è m ÷ø è mø 3 Now the workdone by the resultant force is equal to the
change in kinetic energy i.e.
Now as t = 0, s = 0, so C2 = 0
1
1/2 (mg – F) 20 = mv2 (From work-energy theorem)
æ 8P ö 2
s= ç t3/2
è 9m ÷ø
F
mdv
(6) (c) The force acting on the particle =
dt
æ mdv ö
Power of the force = ç
è dt ÷ø
v = k (constant)
a
v2
Þm = kt + c .....(1)
2
mu 2
At t = 0, v = u \ c=
2 mg
DPP/ P 12 35
mg l mgl
U= × =
5 10 10
\ Work done = U = mg l/50
(12) (a) At maximum speed all the power is used to overcome
the resistance to motion. Hence if the maximum speed is v,
1 then 50000 = 1000 × v or v = 50 m/s
or (50 – F) 20 = × 5 × (10)2
2 At 25 m/s, let the pull of the engine be P, then the power
or 50 – F = 12.5 or F = 50 – 12.5
50, 000
\ F = 37.5 N or P = = 2000 N
Work done by the force = – 37.5 × 20 = – 750 joule 25
(The negative sign is used because the push of the air is Now resultant force = 2000 – 1000 = 1000 N
upwards while the displacement is downwards.) Applying Newton's law ; F = ma, we have
(10) (a) 1000 = 1000 a or a = 1.0 m/s2
(13) (a) 1 mole i.e.235 gm of uranium contains 6 × 1023 atoms, so
R 2 kg i.e. 2 × 103 gm of uranium will contain
F sin 45°
2 ´ 103 ´ 6 ´ 1023
= atoms = 5.106 × 1024 atoms
235
F cos 45° Now as in each fission only one uranium atom is con-
sumed i.e. Energy yield per uranium atom
= 185 MeV = 185 × 1.6 × 10 –13 J = 2.96 × 10–11 J
So Energy produced by 2 kg uranium
mR = (No. of atoms ) × (energy /atom)
mg = 5.106 × 1024 × 2.96 × 10–11 = 1.514 × 10–14 J
As 2 kg uranium is consumed in 30 days i.e. 1.51 × 10–14 J
The different forces acting on the block are shown in fig.
of energy is produced in the reactor in 30 days i.e.
Now we have
2.592 × 106 sec
R + F sin 45° = m g ............(1)
So, power output of reactor
F cos 45° = m R ............(2)
From equation (1) and (2) E 1.514 ´ 1014 J
= = = 58.4 MW
m mg t 2.592 ´ 106 S
\ F=
cos 45º +m sin 45º (14) (c) When the vehicle of mass m is moving with velocity v,
Substituting the given values, we have 1
the kinetic energy of the where K = mv2 and if S is the
0.20 ´ (5 ´ 9.78) 2
F= = 11.55 N
(0.707) + (0.20 ´ 0.707) stopping distance, work done by the friction
The block is pulled through a horizontal distance W = FS cos q = m MgS cos 180º = – m MgS
r = 20 metre So by Work-Energy theorem,
Hence, the work done W = D K = Kf – ki
W = F cos 45° × r = (11. 55 × 0.707) × 20 = 163. 32 Joule
(11) (c) 1 2
v2
Þ – m MgS = 0 – Mv Þ S =
2 2mg
(15) (a) As T = (2p/w),
so w = 2p/(3.15 × 107) = 1.99 × 10–7 rad/s
Now v = rw = 1.5 × 1011 × 1.99 × 10–7 » 3 × 104 m/s
Now by work - energy theorem ,
l/5
1
W = Kf – Ki = 0 – mv2
2
1
=– × 6 × 1024 (3 × 104)2 = – 2.7 × 1033 J
Mass of the hanging part of the chain = (m/5) The weight 2
mg/5 acts at the centre of gravity of the hanging chain, i.e., Negative sign means force is opposite to the motion.
at a distance = l/10 below the surface of a table. (16) (b) As the particle is moving in a circle, so
The gain in potential energy in pulling the hanging part on
the table. mv2 k 1 k
= 2 Now K.E = mv2 =
r r 2 2r
EBD_7156
36 DPP/ P 12
dU
(22) (a) W = 0
Now as F=– (23) (b)
dr
(1) There will be an increase in potential energy of the
r r
æ kö k system if work is done upon the system by a conservative
Þ P.E, U = – ò Fdr = ò + çè r 2 ÷ø dr = – r
force.
¥ ¥
(2) The work done by the external forces on a system equals
k k k the change in total energy
So total energy = U + K.E = – + =-
r 2r 2r (24) (a)
Negative energy means that particle is in bound state . (1) The work done by all forces equal to change in kinetic
(17) (c) Let the mass of the person is m energy
Work done, W = P.E at height h above the earth surface
(2) The work done by conservative forces equal to change
= (M + m) gh in potential energy
or 4900 = (M + 10) 9.8 × 10 or M = 40 kg
(18) (b) As the rod is kept in vertical position the shift in the (3) The work done by external and nonconservative forces
centre of gravity is equal to the half the length = l/2 equal to change in total energy
(25) (b), (26) (b), 27. (c)
l 4
Work done W = mgh = mg = 20 × 9.8 × = 392 J For vertical block
2 2
(19) (a) We know that the increase in the potential energy mg = kx + 2T ....... (1)
For horizontal block
é1 1 ù
DU = GmM ê - ú T = k (2x) ....... (2)
ë R R 'û
From eq. (1) and eq. (2)
According to question R' = R + R = 2R
mg
é1 1 ù GMm x= = 0.2m
DU = GMm ê - ú = 5k
ë R 2R û 2R
\ Extension of vertical spring = 0.2m
1 Extension of horizontal spring = 2x = 0.4m
(20) (c) In first case, W1 = m(v1)2 + mgh
2
From conservation of energy
1
m(12)2 + m × 10 × 12
= 1 2 1 1 1
2 mgx = kx + k(2x)2 + mv2 + m(2v)2
2 2 2 2
= 72 m + 120 m = 192 m
and in second case,W2 = mgh = 120 m 3 2 3
The percentage of energy saved mgx = kx + mv 2
2 2
192m - 120m
= × 100 = 38% 7 3
192m mgx = mv 2
10 2
a b
(21) (c) Given that, U (x) = -
12
x x6 v=
7
gx
15
du
We know F = – = (–12) a x–13 – (– 6b) x–7 = 0 Required speed = 2v = 1.9 m/s
dx
(28) (d) Statement – 1 is true but statement – 2 is false.
6b 12a
or
7
= (29) (a) Work done by action reaction force may be zero only if
x x13 displacement of both bodies are same.
1/6 (30) (b) Both statements are true and independent.
æ 2a ö
or x6 = 12a/6b = 2a/b or x = ç ÷
è bø
DPP/ P 13 37
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 13
(1) (a) Let m1 and m2 be the masses of bullet and the rifleman
m1. Applying conservation of linear momentum for the
and v1 and v2 their respective velocities after the first shot.
collision of bullet with plate m2.
Initially the rifleman and bullet are at rest, therefore initial
i.e. mv1 = (m2 + m) v
momentum of system = 0.
0.02 v1 = (2.98 + 0.02) v
As external force is zero, momentum of system is constant
i.e. initial momentum = final momentum 3
i.e. v1 = v = 150 v .........(2)
= m1v1 + m2v2 .02
(10 ´ 10-3 kg)(800m / s) Required percentage loss in initial velocity of bullet
m1 v1
or v2 = =– = – 0.08 m/s u - v1 200v - 150v
m2 100 kg
× 100% = × 100 = 25%
Velocity acquired after 10 shots u 200 v
= 10 v2 = 10 × (–0.08) = – 0.8 m/s (4) (a) Part (I) - The horizontal component of the momentum of
i.e, the velocity of rifle man is 0.8 m/s in a direction opposite the bullet is equal to the momentum of the block with the
to that of bullet. bullet
(2) (c) Let the mass of block and bullet be M and m respectively mu cos a = (M + m) V ..........(1)
If v is the velocity of bullet and V is the velocity of block Where V is the velocity of the block plus bullet embedded
with bullet embedded in it, in it.
Now according to conservation of momentum , Part (II) - As the block can move as a pendulum, the block
mv = (M + m) V rises till its kinetic energy is converted into potential energy.
(10×10 –3)(300) = (290×10–3 + 10 ×10–3) V or V = 10 m/s So, if the block rises upto a height h,
1 1
The kinetic energy just after impact is(M + m) V2, which (M + m) V2 = (M + m) gh ..........(2)
2 2
is lost due to work done on it by the force of friction F. From (1) & (2)
Since force of friction F = m (M+m)g and the work done is 2
æ m ö u 2 cos 2 a
given by Fd, we have h= ç ÷ .
èM+mø 2g
1
(M + m) V2 = m (M + m) gd
2 æ 20 ´ 10-3 ö
2
cos2 30o
= çç ÷ .(200)2 .
÷ = 0.15 m
1 V
2
1 10 2 1 2 (2) (10)
è ø
or m= = × =
2 gd 2 (10)(15) 3 (5) (c) Initial velocity of bullet, u1 = 500 m/s
(3) (a) Let the in itial velocity of the bullet of mass Let v1 and v2 be the speeds of bullet and block after collision
m = 20 g = 0.020 kg be u and v the velocity with which each
plate moves.
The initial momentum of system (bullet + plate) = mu
v1
m u1
0.1m m1 m v2
2
m4 m2
Final momentum of system = m1v + (m2 + m) v 1
respectively then, m v 22 = mgh
(Since bullet remains in 2nd plate) 2
\ According to principle of conservation of momentum
Þ v2 = 2gh = 2 ´ 9.8 ´ 0.1 = 1.4 m/s
i.e. mu = m1v + (m2 + m) v,
i.e. 0.02u = 4v According to principle of conservation of linear momentum,
We have
4
or u= = 200 v ..........(1) m1u1 + 0 = m1v1 + m2 v2
.02 or 0.01 × 500 = 0.01 v1 + 2 × 1.4 Þ v1 = 220 m/s
Let v1 be the velocity of the bullet as it comes out of plate
EBD_7156
38 DPP/ P 13
(6) (a) The rate of change of momentum is equal to force \ (v1 – v2) = 0 ......(4)
Solving equations (3) and (4), we have
dp dm
F= =v (Here v is constant) v1 = 3 3 m/s and v2 = 3 3 m/s
dt dt
dm
Here v = 4 × 103 m/s & = 50 × 10–3 kg/s
dt
\ F = 4 × 103 × 50 × 10 –3 = 200 N
v1
(7) (a) Given that, Initial velocity = u
30°
u 30°
Final velocity =
4
v2
So by conservation of momentum, we have
u 3u
1×u+0=1× + m × v2 Þ mv2 = ....... (1) According to law of conservation of energy
4 4
and by conservation of energy, we have Energy before collision = Energy after collision
1 1 1 1
1 1 æ uö 1
2 m u12 + m u 22 = m v12 + m v 22
× 1 × u2 + 0 = × 1 ç ÷ + m v 22 2 2 2 2
2 2 è 4ø 2
1 1 1
m (9)2 + 0 = m (3 3 )2 + m (3 3 )2
15 2 2 2 2
or v 22
= u ....... (2)
16
81 m 54 m
From equation (1) and (3), =
2 2
(mv2 )2 (9 / 16)u 2 L.H.S. # R.H.S.
= or m = 0.6 kg i.e., energy is not conserved in this collision or this is a
mv 22 (15 / 16)u 2
case of inelastic collision.
(8) (a) Initial momentum of the balls (9) (a) The situation is shown in fig.
=m×9+m ×0= 9m ........(1) Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of two pieces after explosion.
where m is the mass of each ball. Applying the law of conservation of energy, we have
Let after collision their velocities are v1 and v2 respectively.
Final momentum of the balls after collision along the same m1 = 4kg v1
line = mv1 cos 30° + mv2 cos 30° m = 8kg
mv1 3 mv2 3 q
= + ........(2) 30°
2 2
According to law of conservation of momentum u = 50m/s
v2
mv1 3 mv2 3
9m= +
2 2 1 1 1
(8) (50)2 + 15000 = (D) v12 + (D) v 22
9´ 2 2 2 2
= v1 + v2 .......(3)
3 or 25000 = 2 ( v12 + v22 ) ......(1)
Applying the law of conservation of momentum along
x-axis and y-axis respectively, we get
8 (50) = 4 v1 cos q + v2 cos 30° ......(2)
and 0 = 4 v1 sin q
Stationary ball
= 4 v2 sin 30° = 2 v2 ......(3)
(a) Before collision
The initial momentum of the balls along perpendicular v2
or sin q = ......(4)
direction = 0 . 2v1
Final momentum of balls along the perpendicular direction From eq. (2)
m 100 = v1 cos q + v2 cos 30°
= mv1 sin 30° – mv2 sin 30° =
(v – v ) (10) (a) Let m be the mass of the rocket and vr the relative
2 1 2
velocity of the gas ejecting from the rocket. Suppose the
Again by the law of conservation of momentum
fuel is burnt at a rate (dm/dt) to provide the rocket an
(m/2) (v1 – v2) = 0
acceleration a.
DPP/ P 13 39
(13) (a) Let the speed of the body before explosion be u. After
vr æ dm ö
Then a = ç ÷ –g ......(1) explosion, if the two parts move with velocities u1 and u2
m è dt ø in the same direction, then according to conservation of
Here vr = 250 m/s, m = 500 kg, g = 10 m/s2 and a = 20 m/s2 momentum,
dm m a Mu1 + (1 – a) M u2 = Mu
Now from (1) = (a + g) The kinetic energy T liberated during explosion is given
dt vr
1 1 1
500 by T = a M u12 + (1 – a) M u 22 – Mu2
= (20 + 10) = 60 kg/s 2 2 2
250
(11) (a) Let m1 and m2 be the masses of electron and hydrogen 1 1 1
= a M u12 + (1 – a) M u 22 –
atom respectively. If u1 and v1 be the initial and final 2 2 2M
velocities of electron, then initial kinetic energy of electron [ a Mu1 + (1 – a) Mu2]2
æ 1ö 1
Ki = çè ÷ø m u12 = M a (1 – a) [ u12 + u 22 – 2 u1 u2]
2 2
æ 1ö 2T
Final kinetic energy of electron Kf = çè ÷ø m v12 (u1 – u2)2 =
2 a (1 - a )M
Fractional decrease in K.E.,
2T
Ki - K f v12 Þ (u1 – u2) =
a(1 - a)M
= 1 - .........(1)
Ki u12 (14) (a) The situation is shown in fig.
For such a collision, we have Let A and B be two pieces of equal mass (1/5 kg) which fly
off perpendicular to a each other with equal velocity
æ m1 - m 2 ö (30 m/sec)
v1 = ç m + m ÷ u1
è 1 2ø Momentum of A or B = (1/5 × 30)
v1 æ m1 - m 2 ö
\ =ç ÷ .........(2) A 1
u1 è m1 + m 2 ø m = kg
5
From eqs. (1) and (2) we have v = 30 m/s
2
Ki - K f æ m1 - m 2 ö 4m1m2
=1– ç =
Ki è m1 + m 2 ÷ø (m1 + m2 )2
B
Ki - K f 4(m 2 / m1 ) 4 ´ 1850
or = =
Ki (1 + m 2 / m1 )2 (1 + 1850) 2 1
m= kg
= 0.00217 = 0.217% 5
(12) (c) v = 30 m/s
3
C m= kg
5
m
\ Resultant momentum
m = {(1 / 5) ´ 30}2 + {(1 / 5) ´ 30}2 = 6 2 kg m/sec
along the bisector of Ð AOB
2m
(3/5) × v = 6 2 Þ v = 10 2 m/sec
(15) (c) The situation is shown in fig.
v/ 2 Equating the total initial and final momentum along each
axis, we get
Now the total energy released in the explosion mv1 + 0 = (M + m) v' cos q .........(A)
2 0 + Mv2 = (M + m) v' sin q ......... (B)
1 1 1 æ v ö 3
= mv2 + mv2 + 2m ç = mv2 Squaring and adding eq. (A) and (B), we get
2 2 2 è 2 ÷ø 2 (mv1)2 + (Mv2)2 = (M + m)2 v'2 .........(C)
EBD_7156
40 DPP/ P 13
(18) (a) A bullet is fired from the gun. The gun recoils, the kinetic
y energy of the recoil shall be less than the kinetic energy of
the bullet.
(M+m)v¢ (19) (a) Conservation of linear momentum is equivalent to
Newton's second law of motion
(20) (a) In an inelastic collision momentum is conserved but
A kinetic energy is not.
q x (21) (a) Inelastic collision is the collision of electron and
mv1 positron to an inhilate each other.
(22) (a) Total kinetic energy is not conserved in inelastic
collisions but momentum is conserved
Mv2 (23) (a) (1) when m1 = m2 and m2 is stationary, there is maximum
transfer of kinetic energy in head an collision
(2) when m1 = m2 and m2 is stationary, there is maximum
transfer of momentum in head on collision
(3) when m1 >> m2 and m2 is stationary, after head on
The final momentum collision m2 moves with twice the velocity of m1.
(24) (a) Momentum remains conserved
P = (M + m) v' = [(mv1 ) 2 + (Mv 2 ) 2 ]
(25) (a) Speed of particle after the collision
[form eqn. (3)]
2
Dividing eqn. (2) by eqn. (1), we have æ 15 ö
= ç ´ 3 ÷ + 25 = 5.036 m /s
è 43 ø
Mv2 æ Mv2 ö
tan q = or q = tan–1 ç mv ÷
mv1 è 1ø 30
(26) (b) Speed of the sphere just after collision = m/s
(16) (a) Let the angle of reflection be q' and the magnitude of 43
velocity after collision be v'. As there is no force parallel to (27) (a) Angular speed of sphere is zero as impulse due to
the wall, the component of velocity parallel to the surface collision passes through centre of sphere.
remains unchanged. (28) (c) When e = 0, velocity of separation along common normal
Therefore, v' sin q ' = v sin q ......(1) zero, but there may be relative velocity along common
As the coefficient of restitution is e, for perpendicular tangent.
component of velocity (29) (c) Statement – 1 is false but statement – 2 is true.
Velocity of separation = e x velocity of approach (30) (d) Momentum remains constant before, during and after
–(v' cos q ' – 0) = –e (v cos q – 0) ......(2) the collision but KE does not remain constant during
From (1) and (2) the collision as the energy gets converted into elastic
potential energy due to deformation.
v' = v sin 2 q + e2 cos 2 q
and tan q ' = tan q/e
(17) (a) The fraction of energy lost is given by,
DE mg(h - h ') h - h'
= =
E mgh h
given that, h = 2 meter and h' = 1.5 meter
DE 2 - 1.5 1
\ = =
E 2 4
DPP/ P 14 41
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 14
r r
1. (c) m1 = 1, m2 = 35.51, r1 = 0, r2 = 1.27iˆ æ b hö
i.e. coordinates of centre of mass is çè , ÷ø
r r 3 3
r m r ´ m2 r2 r 35.5 ´ 1.27 ˆ
r = 11 r= r r
m1 + m2 Þ
i r m v + m2 v2
1 + 35.5 6. (b) vcm = 1 1
m1 + m2
r 35.5
r= ´ 1.27iˆ = 1.24iˆ
36.5 2 ´ 2 + 4 ´ 10
= = 7.3 m/s
2+4
y 7. (b) Let m1 = m, m2 = 2m, m3 = 3m, m4 = 4m
H Cl 2m 3m
x
m1 m2
a sin 60°
1.27Å a
r r
r m1v1 + m2 v2 60°
2. (d) vcm = x
m1 + m2
m 4m
a cos 60°
2 ´ 3 + 3 ´ 2 12
= = = 2.4 m/s
2+3 5 r
3. (c) m1 = 12, m2 = 16 y r1 = 0iˆ + 0 ˆj
r
r1 = 0iˆ + 0 ˆj, r2 = 1.1iˆ + 0 ˆj r a a 3 ˆ
r2 = a cos 60iˆ + a sin 60 ˆj = i + j
r r 2 2
r m r + m2 r2
r1 = 1 1
m1 + m2 r 3 a 3 ˆ
C O x r3 = (a + a cos 60)iˆ + a sin 60 ˆj = aiˆ + j
m1 m2 2 2
r 16 ´ 1.1 ˆ
r1 = i = 0.63iˆ r
28 r4 = aiˆ + 0 ˆj
i.e. 0.63Å from carbon atom. by substituting above value in the following formula
r r r r r r r
r m v + m2 v2 + m3 v3 r m1r1 + m2 r2 + m3r3 + m4 r4 3 ˆ
4. (a) vcm = 1 1 r= = 0.95ai + aj
m1 + m2 + m3 m1 + m2 + m3 + m4 4
20 ´ 10iˆ + 30 ´ 10 ˆj + 50 ´ 10kˆ é 3 ù
= So the location of centre of mass ê0.95a, aú
100 4 û
ë
\ vcm = 2iˆ + 3 ˆj + 5kˆ 8. (d)
5. (c) We can assume that three particles of equal mass m are r r
9. (d) m1 = 2kg, m2 = 4kg, v1 = 2m / s, v2 = -10m / s
placed at the corners of triangle.
ur ur r r
y r m v + m2 v2
r1 = 0iˆ + 0j,r
ˆ = biˆ + 0jˆ
2 vcm = 1 1
ur (0,h) m1 + m2
and r3 = 0iˆ + hjˆ
2 ´ 20 - 4 ´ 10
ur ur ur = = 0m / s
uuur m1 r1 + m2 r2 + m3 r3 2+ 4
\ rcm = 10. (a) As initially both the particles were at rest therefore
m1 + m2 + m3
velocity of centre of mass was zero and there is no
x
(0,0) (b,0) external force on the system so speed of centre of mass
b h
= î + ˆj remains constant i.e. it should be equal to zero.
3 3
EBD_7156
42 DPP/ P 14
11. (a) For translatory motion the force should be applied on
80 80
the centre of mass of the body, so we have to calculate the 0+2´ + 4´ +0
location of centre of mass of 'T' shaped object. 2 2 30
= =
Let mass of rod AB is m so the mass of rod CD will be 2m. 16 2
Let y1 is the centre of mass of rod AB and y2 is the centre of
30
mass of rod CD. We can consider that whole mass of the Similarly y = so, r = x 2 + y2 = 30 cm
rod is placed at their respective centre of mass i.e., mass m 2
is placed at y1 and mass 2 m is placed at y2. 14. (b) Linear density of the rod varies with distance
y dm
= l (Given ) \ dm = ldx
dx
D
A B
y1
l
dx
y2
l
x x
C
Taking point 'C' at the origin, position vector of point y1

ur ur
and y2 can be written as r1 = 2l ˆj, r2 = l ˆj , and m1 = m and
Position of centre of mass
m2 = 2m
Position vector of centre of mass of the system
xcm =
ò dm ´ x
r r
r m r + m2 r2 m2l ˆj + 2ml ˆj ò dm
rcm = 1 1 =
m1 + m2 m + 2m
3
4ml ˆj 4 ˆ ò (l dx) ´ x
= = lj
3m 3 =
0
3
Hence the distance of centre of mass from C = l

4
ò l dx
3 0
12. (a) Initial acceleration is zero of the system. So it will
always remain zero because there is no external force on 3
3 é 2 x3 ù
the system.
ò (2 + x) ´ xdx ê
ëê
x + ú
3 úû
0 0
13. (b) According to figure let A is the origin and co-ordinates = =
3 3
of centre of mass be (x, y) then, é x3 ù
ò (2 + x)dx ê2x + ú
2 úû
y 0 êë 0
2 kg 4 kg
D C 9 + 9 36 12
= = = m.
9 21 7
6+
2
(x,y) 15. (c) Centre of mass lies always on the line that joins the
two particles.
8 kg r 2 kg For the combination cd and ab this line does not pass
x through the origin.
A B
For combination bd, initially it pass through the origin
but later on it moves toward negative x-axis.
m1 x1 + m 2 x 2 + m3 x 3 + m 4 x 4 But for combination ac it will always pass through
x=
m1 + m 2 + m3 + m 4 origin. So we can say that centre of mass of this
combination will remain at origin.
DPP/ P 14 43
1 ´ 0 + 1 ´ PQ + 1 ´ PR PQ + PR m1
16. (b) xcm = = By solving d' = - d
1 +1+ 1 3 m2
and ycm = 0 Negative sign shows that particle m2 should be
17. (a) displaced towards the centre of mass of the system.
R1
1
22. (a) We know m1r1 = m2r2 Þ m × r = constant \ r µ
m
23. (a) Depends on the distribution of mass in the body.
R2 r1 m2 1
24. (a) m1r1 = m2 r2 Þ = \r µ
mg r2 m1 m
m1a1 + m2 a2 m ´ 0 + m ´ 3g 3g
Due to net force in downward direction and towards 25. (b) acm = = =
m1 + m2 m1 + m2 2
left centre of mass will follow the path as shown in
figure. 26. (b)
18. (a) Initially both the particles were at rest so vcm = 0. As
external force on the system is zero therefore velocity
of centre of mass remains unaffected.
r r l0
19. (a) m1r1 + m2 r2 = 0 0 m/s v
m ˆ 3m r m m
Þ 15 j + r2 = 0
4 4
r
Þ r2 = -5 ˆj 2
1 æ 3mg ö 1
i.e. larger fragment is at y = – 5 cm. By COE, kç ÷ = mv 2
2 è k ø 2
20. (b) Centre of mass is closer to massive part of the body
therefore the bottom piece of bat have larger mass.
21. (b) Initial position of centre of mass 9mg 2 m
v= = 3g
k k
m1 x1 + m2 x2
rcm = ...(i)
m1 + m2 m ´ 0 + mv v 3g m
vcm = = =
m+m 2 2 k
1 2 1
27. (a) By COE in CM-frame, mvref = kx 2
x1 d 2 2
2
m1 m2 1m æ mö 1 2
2 2 ç 3g k ÷ = 2 kx
è ø
x2
9 2 m2 x=
3mg
g = kx 2 ;
If the particle of mass m1 is pushed towards the centre 2 k 2k
of mass of the system through distance d and to keep
the centre of mass at the original position let second 28. (b) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2
particle displaced through distance d' away from the is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1.
centre of mass. 29. (a) Initially the electron and proton were at rest so their
m1 ( x1 + d ) + m2 ( x2 + d ') centre of mass will be at rest. When they move towards
Now rcm = ...(ii) each other under mutual attraction then velocity of
m1 + m2
centre of mass remains unaffected because external
Equating (i) and (ii) force on the system is zero.
m1 x1 + + m2 x2 30. (d) The centre of mass of a system of particles depends
m1 + m2 only on the masses of particles and the position of the
particles relative to one another. The location of
m1 ( x1 + d ) + m2 ( x2 + d ') reference frame will not affect the location of centre of
= mass.
m1 + m2
EBD_7156
44 DPP/ P 15
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 15
1. (a) Initial angular momentum of ring. L = Iw =Mr2w 10. (d) Angular momentum, of earth about its axis of rotation,
Final angular momentum of ring and four particles
2 2p 4pMR 2
L = lw = MR 2 ´ =
2 2
( 2 '
system Mr w = Mr + 4mr w = ) Mw
M + 4m
5 T 5T
2. (b) The angular momontum of a system of particles is con 2 2p 2

11. (d) Angular momentum, L = mvr = mwr = m ´ ´r
served when no external torque acts on the system. T
L2 ( )
2
3. (c) Rotational kinetic energy E \ L = 2EI 2 ´ 3.14 ´ 6 ´ 10 24 ´ 1.5 ´ 1011
2l = = 2.7 ´ 1040 kg - m 2 / s
7
3.14 ´ 10
L E A IA 1 2p ´ 1800
Þ A = ´ = 100 ´ = 5 12. (c) w = 2p n = = 60p rad/s
LB E B IB 4 60
4. (c) Angular momentum L = Iw constant P = t ´w
\ I increases and w decreases P 100 ´ 103
5. (c) Conservation of angular momentum Þ t = = = 531 N - m
w 60p
I1w1+I2w2 = (I1w1+I2)w ur
r dL L -L 4 A - A0 3 A0
I1w1 + I2 w 2 13. (a) t= = 2 1= 0 =
Angular velocity of system w = dt Dt 4 4
I1 + I 2
æ 60 ö
1 2p ç 0 - ÷
2p (n2 - n1 ) è 60 ø
\ Rotational kinetic energy = ( I1 + I2 ) w
2
2 14. (c) a = =
t 60
æI w +I w ö
2
( I1w1 + I2 w2 ) 2 -2p -p
1 = = rad / sec2
= ( I1 + I2 ) ç 1 1 2 2 ÷ =
2 ( I1 + I2 ) 60 30
2 è I1 + I2 ø
\t = I a
1 1 2´ p p
6. (d) Kinetic energy E = Lw = L ´ 2pn = = N -m
2 2 30 15
r r ur
L 2 E 2 n1 15. (a) t = r ´ f = (7$i + 3 $j + k$ ) ´ (-3i$ + $j + 5k$ )
\ E ¥L ´ n Þ = ´
L1 E1 n 2
$i $j k$
r
L 2 é E1 / 2 ù é n1 ù L2 L t = 7 3 1
=ê ú´ê ú Þ L2 = =
L1 ë E1 û ë 2n1 û 4 4 -3 1 5
L2 = $i (15 - 1) - $j (35 + 3) + k$ (7 + 9)
7. (b) E = . If boy stretches hgis arm then moment of
2I = 14$i - 38 $j + 16k$
inertia increases and accordingly kinetic energy of the system
t 1000
1 16. (a) a = = = 5 rad / sec 2
decreases because L = constant and E¥ I 200
I
From w = w 0 + a t = 0 + 5 ´ 3 = 15 rad/s
8. (c)According to conservation of angular momentum
t 30
I1w 17. (a) a = = = 15 rad/s 2
\ I1w1 = I2 w 2 Þ I1w = ( I1 + I2 ) w 2 Þ w 2 = I 2
I1 + I2
1 2
-7 -3 2 Q q = w 0t + at
9. (a) L = 2EI = 2 ´ 10 ´ 8 ´ 10 = 4 ´ 10 kg m / s 2
DPP/ P 15 45
22. (a) As mechanical contact is not made, total angular
1
= 0+ ´ (15) ´ (10)2 momentum remains constant.
2 \ Iw0= constant
= 750 rad Differentiating both sides,
18. (d) As the block remains stationary therefore D (Iw0) = 0
For translatory equilibrium Þ I Dw0 + w0 DI = 0
å Fx = 0 \ F = N Dw DI DI Dw 0
Þ + =0 Þ =-
and å Fy = 0 \ f = mg w I I w0
Dw 0 DI
f Also, =-
w0 I
2 DR æ DI 2DR ö
=- çQ = ÷ = -2 a DT
R è I R ø
L2 1
23. (a) E= = K (given) \ K µ (If L = constant)
F 2I I
O
When child stretches his arms the moment of inertia of
system get doubled so kinetic energy will becomes half i.e.
N K/2.
24. (c). Angular impulse = change in angular momentum : Frt =
L Þ L1 < L2
mg
L2
K= Þ K1 = K2
2I
For rotational equilibrium åt = 0 25. (b); 26. (a); 27. (c)
By taking the torque of different forces about point 0 Drawing the F.B. D of the plank and the cylinder.
uuur uur uuur uuuur
t F + t f + t N + t mg = 0 F sin q
As F and mg passing through point O N1
uur uuur
\ t f + tN = 0
As t f ¹ 0 \t N ¹ 0 F cos q
and torque by friction and normal reaction will be in f1
opposite direction.
19. (c) The velocity of the top point of the wheel is twice that
of centre of mass and the speed of centre of mass is mg
same for both the wheels (Angular speeds are different).
æ 4500 - 1200 ö f1
2p ç ÷ø
2p (n2 - n1 ) è 60 N1
20. (d) a = = rad/s2
t 10
Mg
3300
2 p
60 3 6 0 d e g ree N2
= ´
10 2 p s2 f2
a = 1980 degree/s 2 Equations of motion are

F cos q – f1 = ma ....(1)
1 F sinq + N1 = mg ....(2)
21. (b) q = w 0 t + a t 2 f1+ f2 = MA .....(3)
2
f1R – f2R = Ia .....(4)
Þ q = 100 rad A = Ra .....(5)
100
\ Number of revolution = = 16 (approx.)
4 ´ 55 ´
1
2p 4 F cos q 2
a= = = 10 m/s 2
3M + 8m [ ( 3 ´ 1) + (8 ´ 1)]
EBD_7156
46 DPP/ P 15
1 29. (b) t = rF sin q. If q = 90° then t max = rF
3´ 1 ´ 55 ´
3MF cos q 2 = 7.5 N Unit of torque is N-m.
f1 = =
3M + 8 m 3 ´ 1+ 8 ´1 30. (d) Torque = Force × perpendicular distance of the line of
action of force from the axis of rotation (d).
1 Hence for a given applied force, torque or true tendency
1 ´ 55 ´
and f = MF cos q = 2 = 2.5 N of rotation will be high for large value of d. If distance
2
3M + 8 m 3 ´ 1 + 8 ´ 1 d is smaller, then greater force is required to cause the
ur same torque, hence it is harder to open or shut down
r dL
28. (b) t = and L = I w the door by applying a force near the hinge.
dt
DPP/ P 16 47
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 16
(1) (b) As the mass of disc is negligible therefore only moment
1 R 2.5
of inertia of five particles will be considered. (8) (b) MR 2 = MK 2 Þ K = = = 1.76 cm
2 2 2
I= å mr 2 = 5 mr2 = 5 × 2 × (0.1)2 = 0.1 kg-m2 (9) (c) I = 2MR2 = 2 × 3 × (1)2 = 6 gm-cm2
(2) (a) I=
1
2
1
2
(
MR 2 = ´ pR 2 t ´ p ´ R 2 ) (10) (a) I=
5
4
Mr 2
(11) (a)
Þ I µ R4 (As t and p are same)
4 y
4
I æR ö æ 0.2 ö 1 Q
\ 1 =ç 1÷ =ç ÷ =
I2 è R 2 ø è 0.6 ø 81
R/2
1 1
(3) (a) I= MR 2 = ´ 0.5 ´ (0.1)2 = 2.5 ´ 10 -3 kg - m 2
2 2
y¢
t 31.4
(4) (a) I== = 2.5kg m 2
a 4p 2R
(5) (d) Let the mass of loop P (radius = r) = m
So the mass of loop Q (radius = nr) = nm Moment of inertia of the system about yy¢
Iyy¢ = Moment of inertia of sphere P about yy¢
+ Moment of inertia of sphere Q about yy¢
Moment of inertia of sphere P about yy¢
2
r 2 æRö
= M ç ÷ + M ( x) 2 [Parallel axis theorem]
5 è2ø
P
Q 2
2 æRö 2
= = M ç ÷ + M (2R )2 = MR + 4MR 2
Moment of inertia of loop P, IP = mr2 5 è2ø 10
Moment of inertia of loop Q. IQ = nm (nr)2 = n3 mr2 2
2 æRö
IQ Moment of inertia of sphere Q about yy¢ is M çè ÷ø
\ = n3 = 8 Þ n = 2 5 2
IP
2
MR 2 2 æRö 21
(6) (c) Moment of inertia of sphere about its tangent Now I yy ¢ = + 4MR 2 + M ç ÷ = MR 2
10 5 è2ø 5
7 7
MR 2 = MK 2 Þ K = R (12) (a) M.I. of system about the axis which passing through
5 5 m1
(7) (a) Moment of inertia of system about point P
m m m1
l
2 a a
p
m2 m3
m m a/2 a/2
2
æ l ö 2 2
= 4m ç = 2ml 2 and 4mK2 = 2ml2 Isystem = m1 (0)2 + m2 æç ö÷ + m3 æç ö÷
a a
è 2 ÷ø è 2ø è2ø
l
\K = a2
2 Isystem = (m2 + m3 )
4
EBD_7156
48 DPP/ P 16
Ml 2 3
(13) (a) M.I. of rod (1) about Z – axis I1 = Moment of inertia of loop about given axis = MR 2
3 2
2
3 æ Lö 3rL3
= rL ç ÷ =
2 è 2p ø 8p 2
3
1 1 æ M ö 1 M2
(19) (b) M.I. of disc = MR 2 = M ç =
2 2 è pt r ÷ø 2 pt r
2 1
æ M M ö
çè As r = Therefore R 2 =
2
pR t pt r ÷ø
1
Ml 2 If mass and thickness are same then, I µ
M.I. of rod (2) about Z-axis, I 2 = r
3
M.I. of rod (3) about Z – axis, I3 = 0 I r 3
Because this rod lies on Z-axis \ 1 = 2 = .
I 2 r1 1
2Ml 2 (20) (c) According to problem disc is melted and recasted into
\ Isystem = I1 + I2 + I3 = a solid sphere so their volume will be same.
3
(14) (c) Distribution of mass about BC axis is more than that 2 4 3
VDisc = VSphere Þ pRDisc t= pRSphere
about AB axis i.e. radius of gyration about BC axis is 3
more than that about AB axis.
i.e. KBC > KAB \ IBC > IAB > ICA 3 æ RDisc ö 4 3 é RDisc ù
Þ pRDisc çè 6 ÷ø = 3 pRSphere êt = 6 , given ú
ë û
Ml 2 0.12 ´ 12
(15) (a) I= = = 0.01 kg - m 2 RDisc
12 12 3 3
Þ RDisc = 8RSphere Þ RSphere =
(16) (c) 2
Moment of inertia of disc
1 1 2
IDisc = MR Disc = I (given)
2
2
\ M ( R Disc ) = 2I
x 2
2 2
Moment of inertia of sphere Isphere = MRSphere
5
2
1 2 æ RDisc ö M 2I 1
I1 = M.I. of ring about its diameter = mR
2 = M = ( RDiscs )2 = =
2 5 çè 2 ÷ø 10 10 5
I2 = M.I. of ring about the axis normal to plane and (21) (d) Moment of inertia of system about YY'
passing through centre = mR2 I = I 1 + I2 + I3 Y
Two rings are placed according to figure. Then
1 3 3 1
1 3 = MR 2 + MR 2 + MR 2
I xx ¢ = I1 + I 2 = mR 2 + mR 2 = mR 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 3
(17) (a) Mass of the centre disc would be 4M and its moment 7
= MR 2
2
1 2
of inertia about the given axis would be (4 M ) R .
2 (22) (d) As C is the centre of mass, so, IC will be minimum.
For the given section the moment of inertia about the Also more mass is towards B so IA > IB.
(23) (a) Applying the theorem of perpendicular axis,
1
same axis would be one quarter of this i.e. MR 2 . I = I1 + I2 = I3 + I4
2 Because of symmetry, we have I1 = I2 and I3 = I4 Hence
(18) (d) Mass per unit length of the wire = r I = 2I1 = 2I2 = 2I3 = 2I4 or I1 = I2 = I3 = I4
Mass of L length, M = rL i.e. sum of two moment of inertia of square plate about
and since the wire of length L is bent in a or of circular any axis in a plane (Passing through centre) should be
L equal to moment of inertia about the axis passing
loop therefore 2pR = L Þ R = through the centre and perpendicular to the plane of
2p the plate.
DPP/ P 16 49
(24) (d) Moment of inertia depends on all the three factors given (28) (c) Radius of gyration of a body is not a constant quantity.
in (1), (2) & (3). Its value changes with the change in location of the
axis of rotation. Radius of gyration of a body about a
é2 ù r12 + r22 + ..... + rn2

(25) (d) I = 4 ê MR2 + M (R 2)2 ú given axis is given as K =
ë5 û n
(29) (c) The moment of inertia of a particle about an axis of
é2 ù rotation is given by the product of the mass of the
= 4MR 2 ê + 2ú
ë 5 û particle and the square of the perpendicular distance
of the particle from the axis of rotation. For different
4 MR 2 ´ 12 48 MR 2 axis, distance would be different, therefore moment of
= = . inertia of a particle changes with the change in axis of
5 5
rotation.
(26) (b) Let a be the acceleration of centre of mass (30) (a) When earth shrinks, it angular momentum remains
Mg – T = 0 ... (i)
2 2p
F.x = T.2x ... (ii) constant. i.e. L = I w = mR 2 ´ = constant.
5 T
\ T µ I µ R 2 . It means if size of the earth changes
F then its moment of inertia changes.
x In the problem radius becomes half so time period
M 1
(Length of the day) will becomes of the present value
4
(27) (c) remain the same 24
i.e. = 6 hr.
4
EBD_7156
50 DPP/ P 17
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 17
1. (a) Since disc is rolling (without slipping) about point O.
Hence g sin q g sin q g / 2 5 g
w 6. (d) a= = = =
K 2 2 7 / 5 14
1+ 1+
Q R2 5
K2 2
C As q = 30o and =
2 5
R
P 2 gh
7. (b) We know v =
k2
1+
O r2
OQ > OC > OP Q v = rw
\ vQ > vC > vP v 2 gh
\w = =
2. (d) Applying the theorem of perpendicular axis, r r + k2
2
I = I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 2mgh 2mgh 2mgh

Because of symmetry, we have Þw= 2 2
= 2
=
mr + mk mr + I I + mr 2
I1 = I2 and I3 = I4
K2
Hence I = 2I1 = 2I2 = 2I3 = 2I4 8. (a) Because its M.I. (or value of ) is minimum for
R2
or I1 = I2 = I3 = I4
sphere.
i.e. sum of two moment of inertia of square plate about 9. (b) As body is moving on a frictionless surface. Its
any axis in a plane (Passing through centre) should be mechanical energy is conserved. When body climbes
equal to moment of inertia about the axis passing up the inclined plane it keeps on rotating with same
through the centre and perpendicular to the plane of angular speed, as no friction force is present to provide
the plate. retarding torque so
3. (a) By the conservation of energy
1 2 1 1
Iw + mv 2 ³ Iw2 + mgh Þ v ³ 2gh
2 2 2
1
10. (a) MR 2 = I Þ MR 2 = 2I
l/2 2
Moment of inertia of disc about a tangent in a plane
a
5 5 5
= MR2 = (2I ) = I
P.E. of rod = Rotational K.E. 4 4 2
l 1 11. (d) Moment of inertia of system about YY’
mg sin a = Iw 2
2 2 I = I1 + I2 + I3
l 1 ml2 2 3 g sin a 1 3 3 7
= MR 2 + MR 2 + MR 2 = MR 2
Þ mg sin a = w Þw=
2 2 3 l 2 2 2 2
But in the problem length of the rod 2L is given Y
3g sin a
\w =
2L
4. (c) Graph should be parabola symmetric to I- axis, but it 1
should not pass from origin because there is a constant
value Icm is present for x = 0 .
2 3
2 gh 2 gh 4
5. (b) v= = = gh
K2 1 3
1+ 1+
R2 2
DPP/ P 17 51
19. (a) M.I. of complete disc about ‘O’ point
I Ring MR 2
12. (b) = = 2 :1 1
I Disc 1 ITotal - (9M ) R 2
MR 2 2
2
13. (a)
14. (b) It follows from the theorem of parallel axes.
15. (a) l
A B 2R/3
O
P
R
O
Moment of inertia of Rod AB about point P and
MI2
perpendicular to the plane = R/3
12
M.I. of rod AB about point ‘O’
2
MI 2 æ Iö MI2 O
= + Mç ÷ =
12 è 2ø 3 R
(By using parallel axis theorem)
but the system consists of four rods of similar type so
by the symmetry
æ Ml2 ö
Isystem = 4 ç ÷
è 3 ø
Radius of removed disc = R
16. (a) 3
17. (d) l
9M
\ Mass of removed disc = =M
9
b [As M = pR 2 t \ M ¥R 2 ]
O M.I. of removed disc about its own axis
2
1 æRö MR 2
2
Mb = Mç ÷ =
M.I. of plate about O and parallel to length = 2 è3ø 18
12 Moment of inertia of removed disc about ‘O’
18. (d) Iz = Ix + I y Iz 2
MR2 æ 2R ö MR2
Iremoved disc = Icm + mx2 = +M ç ÷ =
18 è 3 ø 2
Ix
M. I. of complete disc can also be written as
ITotal = I Re moved disc + I Re maining disc
MR 2
ITotal = + I Re maining disc ..... (ii)
2
Equating (i) and (ii) we get
Iy
MR 2 9MR 2
+ I Re maining disc =
2 2
200 = I D + I D = 2 I d
9MR 2 MR 2 8MR 2
\ I D = 100 gm ´ cm 2 \ I Re maining disc = - = = 4MR 2
2 2 2
EBD_7156
52 DPP/ P 17
2 æ K2 ö
ML2 æLö 1 1 K2
20. (d) I = Icm + Mx 2 = +M ç ÷ 24. (a) KT = KR Þ mv2 = mv2 ç 2 ÷ Þ \ 2 = 1
12 è4ø 2 2 èR ø R
I I cm
This value of K 2 / R 2 match with hollow cylinder..
25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (d)
(i) Let acceleration of centre of mass of cylinder be a then
acceleration of block will be 2a.
For linear motion of cylinder T + f – 2mgsinq = 2m(a)
For rolling motion of cylinder
L/4 L/4 æ 2mR 2 ö æ a ö
ML2
ML 7ML2 2 (T – f) R = Ia = ç 2 ÷ çè R ÷ø Þ T – f = ma
= + = è ø
12 16 48
For linear motion of block
21. (c) w 2 = w 20 - 2aq Þ 0 = 4p 2 n2 - 2aq 2
mg – T = m (2a) Þ a = (1 - sin q) g
2 7
æ 1200 ö
4p2 ç ÷
q= è 60 ø = 200p2 rad T
2´ 4
2m T
\ 2pn - 200p 2 Þ n = 100 p = 314 revolution R f
1 2 m 2a
22. (b) Rotational K.E. = Iw & 2mgsinq
2 mg
q
1 2 1 ///////////////////////////////////////////
T.E. = Iw + MV 2
2 2
æ2 ö æ 3 + 4sin q ö mg
1 1 1 (ii) T = mg - 2m ç g (1 - sin q)÷ = ç ÷ø
= Iw2 + MR 2 w2 = w2 (I + MR 2 ) è7 ø è 7
2 2 2
For ring I = MR2 æ 1 + 6sin q ö
(iii) F = T – ma = ç
è 7 ÷ø mg
1 2 1
\ T.E. = w (MR 2 + MR 2 ) = w2 ´ 2MR 2 28. (c) The acceleration of a body rolling down an inclined
2 2
g sin q
1 plane is given by a =
Rotational K.E. = MR 2 w2 I
2 1+
MR 2
1
MR 2 w2 I MR 2
2 1 For hollow cylinder
\a = = = =1
1 2
w ´ 2MR 2
2 MR 2 MR 2
2
1
MR 2
2 2I 1
For a solid sphere I = MR 2 For solid cylinder = =
2 2 2
5 MR MR
1 æ2 Þ Acceleration of solid cylinder is more than hollow
ö 1 7
\ T.E. = w2 ç MR 2 + MR 2 ÷ = w2 MR 2 ´ cylinder and therefore solid cylinder will reach the
2 è5 ø 2 5 bottom of the inclined plane first.
\ Statement -1 is false
Rotational K.E. = 1 ´ 2 MR 2 w2 • Statement - 2
2 5
In the case of rolling there will be no heat losses.
1 2 Therefore total mechanical energy remains conserved.
´ MR 2 w2 The potential energy therefore gets converted into
2 5 2
b= = kinetic energy. In both the cases since the initial
1 2 7 7
w MR 2 ´ potential energy is same, the final kinetic energy will
2 5
also be same. Therefore statement -2 is correct.
K2 29. (b) Frictional force on an inclined plane
23. (a) Time of descent µ . Time of descent depends upon
R2 1
= g sin a ( for a disc ) .
the value of radius of gyration (K) or moment of inertia 3
(I). Actually radius of gyration is a measure of moment 30. (c) The moment of inertia about both the given axes shall
of inertia of the body. be same if they are parallel. Hence statement–1 is false.
DPP/ P 18 53
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 18
(1) (c) If r is the distance between m and (M – m), the gravita- (7) (c) The P.E. of the object on the surface of earth is
tional force will be -
GMm
m(M - m) G U1 = –
R
F=G = 2 (mM – m2)
r2 r GMm
The P.E. of object at a height R, U2 = –
dF (R + R)
The force will be maximum if, =0
dm
GMm 1
d éG ù The gain in P E is U2 – U1 = = mgR
i.e, (mM - m 2 ) ú = 0 2R 2
dm êë r 2 û
é GM ù
m 1 êQ g = 2 on surface of earth ú
or = (as M and r are constants) ë R û
M 2 (8) (c) Resultant force on particle '1'
c Fr = 2 F + F'
(2) (c) mg = 3 kg , v = 2
Gm2 Gm2 mv2
m0 3 3 or Fr = 2 2 + 2 =
m= = = kg 2r 4r r
1 - (v 2 / c 2 ) c 2 3
1- 2 Gm æ 2 2 + 1ö
4xc 2
r çè 4 ÷ø
or v =
(3) (a) g' = g – Rew2 (at equator l = 0)
If a body is weightless, (9) (b) The resultant gravitational force on each particle pro-
g' = 0 , g – Rew2 = 0 vides it the necessary centripetal force
g 10 mv2
Þ w= = = 1.25 × 10-3 rad/sec. \ = F2 + F2 + 2F2 cos 60o = 3F ,
R 6400 ´ 103 r
(4) (b) The apparent weight of person on the equator 3 2 l
(latitude l = 0) is given by But r = l´ =
W' = W – m Rew2, 2 3 3
3 3 GM
W' = W = mg \ v=
5 5 l
3 3 (10) (b) The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the
mg = mg – mRw2 or mRw2 = mg – mg earth, in terms of mass Me and radius Re of earth, is
5 5
GM e
2g 2 9.8 given by g =
w= = 5´ rad/ sec R e2
5R 6400 ´ 103
if Mm be the mass of the moon, Rm its radius, then the
= 7.826 × 10–4 rad/sec
acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the moon
(5) (c) According to question,
GM m
G ´ 4M p G Me will be given by g' =
g' = on the planet and g = on the earth R m2
R 2p R 2e
Dividing eq. (ii) by eq. (i), we get
Q Rp = Re and Mp = Me
2 2
g' g' Mm æ Re ö 1 æ 4ö 1
Now, = 4 Þ g' = 4g = 40 m/sec2 = M ç ÷ = ´ ç ÷ =
g g e è Rm ø 80 è 1 ø 5
Energy needed to lift 2 kg mass through 2m distance \ g' = g/5.
= mg'h = 2 × 40 × 2 = 160 J (11) (b) The value of g at the height h from the surface of earth
Gm1 Gm 2 æ 2h ö
(6) (d) Vg = Vg1 + Vg2 = - - g ' = g ç1 - ÷
r1 r2 è Rø
The value of g at depth x below the surface of earth
é102 103 ù
= – 6.67 × 10–11 ê + ú –7 æ xö
ëê 0.5 0.5 ûú = – 1.47 × 10 Joule/kg g ' = g ç1 - ÷
è Rø
EBD_7156
54 DPP/ P 18
(16) (d) In the position of solar eclipse, net force on earth
æ 2h ö æ xö
These two are given equal, hence çè1 - ÷ø = çè 1 - ÷ø FE = FM + FS
R R In the position of lunar eclipse, net force on earth
On solving, we get x = 2h F'E = FS – FM
(12) (a) If g be the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of
the earth, then its value at a height h above the earth's
surface will be -
g g' 1
g¢ = Here =
2 g 9
æ h ö
çè1 + R ÷ø
e
1 1 h
\ =
2
or 1 + =3
9 æ h ö R e
çè 1 + R ÷ø
e
\ Change in acceleration of earth,
or h = 2 Re = 2 × 6400 = 12800 km.
(13) (c) Consider the case of a body of mass m placed on the 2GM 2 ´ 6.67 ´ 10 -11 ´ 7.36 ´ 10 22
Df = =
earth's surface (mass of the earth M and radius R). If g R2 3.822 ´ 1016
is acceleration due to gravity, then = 6.73 × 10-5 m/s2
Me m GM e (17) (c) Let Me be the mass of the earth. The work required
mg = G 2 or g =
R R2 é 1 1 ù
where G is universal constant of gravitation. W = GMe m ê R - R + h ú
ë e e û
Now when the radius is reduced by 1%, i.e., radius
becomes 0.99 R, let acceleration due to gravity be g', GM e mh gR e2 mh
= = [\ GMe = gRe2]
GM e R e (R e + h) R e (R e + h)
then g' =
(0.99R) 2 mgh
From equation (A) and (B), we get =
æ h ö
çè1 + R ÷ø
g' R2 1 e
= =
g (0.99R) 2 (0.99) 2 (18) (a) The P.E of the mass at d/2 due to the earth and moon is
2 Earth
æ 1 ö Moon
\ g' = g × ç P
è 0.99 ÷ø
or g' > g R1 O2
O1 R2
m M 2
Thus , the value of g is increased. M 1
(14) (a) Force of gravity at surface of earth, d
F1 = Gm M/R2 .......... (1) GM1m GM 2 m
Force of gravity at height H is U=– 2 –2
d d
F2 = Gm M (R + H)2 .......... (2)
Dividing (A) by (B) and Rearranging 2Gm
or U = – (M1 + M2) (Numerically)
d
æ F1 ö
H = R ç F - 1÷ = 350 km where (F2 = .9F1) 1 G
è 2 ø m Ve2 = U ÞVe = 2 (M1 + M 2 )
2 d
(15) (a) The extension in the length of spring is
(19) (d) Let m be the mass of the body. The gravitational poten-
mg GMm tial energy of the body at the surface of the earth is
x= = ,
k r2 k GM e m
U=–
Re
x2 R2
\ xµ 1 , \ = The potential energy at a height 10 Re above the sur-
x1 (R + h) 2
r2 face of the earth will be
2 GM e m
æ 6400 ö U' = –
or x2 = 1 × ç
è 7200 ÷ø
= 0.79 cm . (R e +10R e )
DPP/ P 18 55
\ Increase in potential energy (23) (a) All statements except (4) are wrong.
(24) (a) Value of g decreases when we go from poles to equator.
GM e m æ GM e m ö 10 GMe m
U' – U = – + ç R ÷ = 11 R
11R e è e ø e
This increase will be obtained from the initial kinetic
energy given to the body. Hence if the body be thrown (25) (b) r2 r1
with a v velocity then
10 GMe m 20Gme
1
mv2 = 11 R Þ v = 11R Gravitational PE at perihelion < ,GMm / r1 as r1 is
2 e e minimum Therefore, PE is minimum.
Substituting the given values, we get (26) (c) Total energy = constant.
(27) (c) As Pluto moves away, displacement has component
æ 20 ´ (6.67 ´ 10 -11 ) ´ (6 ´ 10 24 ) ö opposite to air force, hence work done is –negative.
v= ç ÷
è 11 ´ (6.4 ´ 106 ) ø Fg
(28) (b) For two electron = 10 -43 i.e. gravitational force is
= 1.07 × 104 m/s. Fe
Gm ∋ M , m( negligible in comparison to electrostatic force of
(20) (b) F< attraction.
r2 (29) (c) The universal gravitational constant G is totally
dF different from g.
For maximum force <0
dm FR 2
G=
d æç GmM Gm2 ö÷÷ Mm
Þ ç , ÷< 0
dm èçç r 2 r 2 ø÷÷
The constant G is scalar and posses the dimensions
é M -1L3T -2 ù .
m 1 ë û
Þ M , 2m < 0 Þ <
M 2 GM
g=
(21) (b) 2 2
g ' = g - w R cos l R2
-2
For weightlessness at equator l = 0 and g ' = 0 g is a vector and has got the dimensions éë M LT ùû .
0
g 1 rad It is not a universal constant.

\ 0 = g - w2R Þ w = =
R 800 s (30) (a) As the rotation of earth takes place about polar axis
therefore body placed at poles will not feel any cen-
(22) (a) k represents gravitational constant which depends only
trifugal force and its weight or acceleration due to grav-
on the system of units.
ity remains unaffected.
EBD_7156
56 DPP/ P 19
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 19
(1) (a) A body projected up with the escape velocity vewill go (4) (a) When S2 is closest to S1, the speed of S2 relative to S1
to infinity. Therefore, the velocity of the body falling is v2 – v1 = p × 104 km/hr. The angular speed of S2 as
on the earth from infinity will be ve. Now, the escape observed from S1 (when closest distance between them
velocity on the earth is is r2 – r1 = 3 × 104 km)
ve = gR e = 2 ´ (9.8m/s 2 ) ´ (6400 ´ 10 3 m) v2 - v1 p ´ 10 4 p
w= =– 4 = – 3 rad/hr ,
r2 - r1 3 ´ 10
= 1.2 × 10 104 m/s = 11.2 km/s.
The kinetic energy acquired by the body is p
| w|= rad/hr
1 1 3
K= m ve2 = × 100 kg × (11.2 × 103 m/s)2 (5) (c) Period of revolution of earth around sun
2 2
9
= 6.27 × 10 J. 4p 2 R e2
Te2 =
GMm GM GMs
(2) (d) We know that 2 = m w2r or = w2 r..
r r2 Period of revolutions of moon around earth
GM 4p2 R m
2
Tn2 =
\ r3 = GM e
w2
where w is the angular velocity of the satellite 2 3
æ Te ö æ Me ö æ R e ö
In the present case, w = 2w0, \ ç = çM ÷ ç
÷
è Tm ø è s ø è R m ÷ø
where w0 is the angular velocity of the earth.
\ w = 2 × 7.3 × 10–5 rad/ sec. 2 3
G = 6.673 × 10–11 n-m2/kg2 Ms æ Tm ö æ R e ö (393)3
and M = 6.00 × 1024kg. \ M =ç ÷ ç ÷ = = 3.56 × 105
e è Te ø è R m ø 132
Substituting these values in equation (A), we get
(6) (a) According to law of conservation of angular momen-
(6.673 ´ 10 -11
) (6.00 ´ 10 ) 24 tum, mvr = constant
r3 = Þ vr = constant
(2 ´ 7.3 ´ 10 -5 ) 2 vmax .rmin = vmin. rmax
Solving we get r = 2.66 × 107m. VB vmax rmax
(3) (a) Þ = = =x
VA v min rmin
v2 (7) (a) Angular momentum of satellite, J = mvr. But,
v1 GMm mv2 GM
S2 2 = Þv=
r
r r
R 1 S1
\ J= m GMr
¬ R2 ®
GM
(8) (a) The orbital velocity of space ship, v0 =
r
From Kepler's Law, T2 µ r3
If space, ship is very near to earth's surface,
2 3 2 æ 104 ö
æ T1 ö æ r1 ö æ 1ö GM
\ ç ÷ =ç ÷ Þç ÷ =ç r ÷ r = Radius of earth = R \ v0 =
è T2 ø è r2 ø è 8ø è 2 ø R
Þ r2 = 4x 104 km = Rg = 6.4 ´ 106 ´ 9.8
2 pr = 7.9195 × 103 m/sec = 7.195 km/sec
v = wr = The escape velocity of space-ship
T
ve = 2Rg = 7.9195 2 = 11.2 km/sec
æ r1 r2 ö
\ | v2 – v1| = 2p ç T - T ÷ = p × 104 km/hr Additional velocity required = 11.2– 7.9195=3.2805 km/
è 1 2ø sec.
DPP/ P 19 57
(15) (c) Total energy of the particle at P
(9) (b) The escape velocity ve = 2gR
1 GM1m GM 2 m
Now, (Ve)moon = 2gR E = EkP + U = mv 2e – -
2 d/2 d/2
(Ve)earth = 2 ´ 6g ´ 10R , 1 2Gm
= mv 2e – (M1 + M2)
(Ve )earth 2 d
So (V ) =8 At infinite distance from M1 and M2, the total energy
e moon
of the particle is zero.
2GM 1 2Gm
(10) (b) Escape velocity = = 2gR \ mv 2e = (M1 + M2),
R 2 d
Vp gp Re 4G
´ \ ve = (M1 + M 2 )
\ = ge R p = 10 ´ 1 = 10 d
Ve
Vp = 10 Ve GM gR 2 9.8 ´ 6.42 ´ 1012

(11) (a) We know that T2 µ a3 (16) (d) v = = =
r r 8 ´ 106
Given that (12 T)2 µ a13 and T2 µ a23
= 7.08 km/sec.
a13 (12T)2 (17) (b) From conservation of energy,
\ = = 144 The energy at height h = Total energy at earth's sur-
a 23 T2
face
a1 GMm 1 GMm
or = (144)1/3 = 5.242 0– = mv2 – ,
a2 R+h 2 R
Hence the jupiter's distance is 5.242 times that of the
1 GMm GMm GMm GMm
earth from the sun. mv2 = – = –
2 R R+h R 2R
(12) (b) We know that T2 µ a3 Þ T µ (a)3/2
3 GM R 2g
T æa ö2 Þ v = = = Rg
\ mars = ç mars ÷ = (1.524)3/2 = 1.88 R R
Tearth è a earth ø
As the earth revolves round the sun in one year and = 6400 ´ 103 ´ 9.8 = 7.919 × 103 m/s
hence, Tearth = 1 year. = 7.919 km/sec
\ Tmars = Tearth × 1.88 = 1 × 1.88 = 1.88 earth-year. (18) (a) If a body is projected from the surface of earth with a
3/ 2 3/2
velocity v and reaches a height h, then using law of
Tmercury æ a mercury ö æ 0.387 ö
(13) (d) =ç ÷ = ç 1 mgh
Tmars è a mars ø è 1.5 24 ÷ø conservation of energy, mv2 = .
2 1+ h / R
3/2
æ 1.524 ö Given v = Kve = K 2gR and h = r – R
\ Tmars = Tmercury × ç
è 0.387 ÷ø
1 mg(r - R) R
= (0.241years) × (7.8) = 1.9 years. Hence, mK2 2gR = or r =
2 r-R 1 - K2
1+
2 R
æ 2 pr ö
T2 çè v ÷ø (2pr) 2 1 4p 2
(19) (a) Orbital speed,
0
(14) (a) = 3 = r =
r3 r r3 GM GM v0 = g R e = 9.8 ´ (6.4 ´ 10 6 )
= 7.2 × 103 m/s = 7.2 km/s.
mv02 GMm 2 GM Period of revolution,
[\ = 2 , v0 = ]
r r r
T = 2p R/g
2 2
T 4p
Slope of T2 – r3 curve = tan q = 3 = = 2 × 3.14 (6.4 ´ 10 6 )/9.8 = 5075 s = 84.6 minutes.
r GM
EBD_7156
58 DPP/ P 19
(20) (d) If the period of revolution of a satellite about the earth
be T, then GM
(24) (a) v0 =
r
4p 2 (R e + h)3
T2 = (25) (d) T 2 µ R3
GMe
where h is the height of the satellite from earth's sur- Te2 = KRe3 ; Tm2 = kRm
3
; T 2 = kR3
face.
Re + Rm
4p 2 (R e + h)3 R=
\ Me = 2
GT2
3
The satellite is revolving just above the earth, hence h 2
éT 2 / 3 T 2 / 3 1 ù
is negligible compared to Re. Þ T = k ê e1/ 3 + m1/ 3 ´ ú
êë k k 2 úû
4p 2 R e3
\ Me = 3/ 2
GT2 é T 2 / 3 + Tm2 / 3 ù
ÞT =ê e ú
4 ëê 2 ûú
But Me = p Re3 r where r is the density of the earth.
3
GM s M e GM s M
4 4p 2 R e3 (26) (a) Ee = - =–
Thus p Re3 r = 2 Re 2R
3 GT2
2 Re Ee M
= ´
3p Me æ Re + Rm ö
\ r T2 = . 2ç ÷ø
G è 2
which is universal constant. To determine its value,
2M æ Re ö
3p 3 ´ 3.14 = Ee
r T2 = = M e çè Re + Rm ÷ø
G 6.67 ´ 10 –11 m3 / kg-s2
(27) (c) Areal velocity of the artificial planet around the sun
E KQ 2
vQ will be more than that of earth.
(21) (a) = .
E KP v2P g
(28) (a) v0 = R e
Linear velocity of earth, Re + h
2pR e 6.28 ´ 6.4 ´ 10 6 For satellite revolving very near to earth R e + h = R e

Ve= = = 463 m/s
Te 24 ´ 3600
As ( h << R )
Orbital velocity, V0 = R e g = 7.9 × 103 m/s
v 0 = R e g ; 64 ´ 105 ´ 10 = 8 ´ 103 m / s = 8 kms -1
According to question,
VP = V0 + Ve = 7900 – 463 = 7437 m/s Which is independent of height of a satellite.
VQ = V0 + Ve = 7900 + 463 = 8363 m/s (29) (d) Due to resistance force of atmosphere, the satellite
2 revolving around the earth losses kinetic energy.
E KQ æ 8363 ö
\ =ç Therefore in a particular orbit the gravitational
E KP è 7437 ÷ø attraction of earth on satellite becomes greater than
that required for circular orbit there. Therefore satellite
2GM
(22) (b) ve = i.e. escape velocity depends upon the moves down to a lower orbit. In the lower orbit as the
R
potential energy ( U = -GMm / r ) becomes more
mass and radius of the planet.
negative, Hence kinetic energy ( Ek = GMm / 2r )
2GM 8
(23) (a) ve = = R pGr
R 3 increases, and hence speed of satellite increases.
(30) (a) Because gravitational force is always attractive in nature
If mean density is constant then ve µ R
and every body is bound by this gravitational force of
ve R e 1 vp attraction of earth.
= = Þ ve =
vp R p 2 2
DPP/ P 20 59
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 20
8. (a). Limiting stress = 4.0 × 108 N/m2
MgL
1. (a). Y = F 400
pr 2 Dl = = 4.0 × 108
but Mg/pr2 = 20 × 108 & Dl = L then A A
Y = 20 × 108 N/m2 or A = 10–6 m2
2. (b). F = Y a DtA 1/2
A = 2 × 10–6 m2, Y = 2 × 11 N/m2 æ 4Aö
1/2 æ 4 ´ 10-6 ö
\ D = çè ÷ =ç ÷
a = 1.1 × 10–5, t = 50 – 30 = 20°C p ø è p ø
F = 2 × 1011 × 1.1 × 10–5 × 20 × 2 × 10–6 = 88N.
3. (d). Work done on the wire = 1.13 × 10–3 m = 1.13 mm
1 1 F 4.8 ´ 103 N
W= F × l = × stress x volume x strain 9. (c). Stress = = = 4.0 × 107 N/m2
2 2 A 1.2 ´ 10-4 m 2
1
W= × Y × strain2 × volume Dl 1 ´10-3
2 10. (c). Strain = = = 5 × 10–4, longitudinal
l 2
1 Dl 2 YADL2 11. (c). F = Y A a Dt
W = × Y × 2 × AL =
2 L 2L = 2 × 1011 × 3 × 10–6 × 10-5 × 20
F = 120 N.
2 ´ 1011 ´ 10-6 ´ 10-6 12. (c). Compressibility
W= = 0.1 J
2 ´1 1 DV
c= =- = 5 × 10–10
1 K VDp
4. (d). W = × load × elongation
2 \ Fractional decrease in volume
1 DV
W= × 5.4 × 106 × 3 =– = c D p = 5 × 10–10 × 15 × 106
2 V
W = 8.1 × 106 ergs = 7.5 × 10–3
5. (d). By Hook's law 13. (c). Increase in length on heating Dl = a L DT
F / A FL To annul this increase if pressure applied is p then
Y= =
l / L Al Dl
p=Y = Ya DT
L
16 ´ 1
Y= = 2 × 1011 N/m2 = 2 × 1011 × 1.1 × 10–5 × 100 = 2.2 × 108 N/m2
(4 ´ 10 ) (0.2 ´10 -2 )
-8
14. (c). y = 2h (1 + s)
DPV y = 2.4 × h
6. (a). B = – 2.4 h = 2h (1 + s)
DV
(1 + s) = 1.2
Given, DP = hdg = 200 x 103 x 10
DP = 2 × 105 N/m2 s = 0.2
15. (c). Stress = F/A = 10/(2 × 10-6) = 5 × 106 N/m2
DV 0.1
= = 10–3
V 100 Stress 5 ´ 106
Strain = = = 2.5 × 10–5
Y 2 ´ 1011
2 ´ 106
\B= = 2 × 109 N/m2 l = L × strain = 1 × 2.5 × 10–5
10-3 l = 2.5 × 10–5 m
stress F / A F L Dl Mg 1000 ´ 980 ´ 100
7. (b). Y = = =
strain l / L Al 16. (b). L = AY =
1012 ´ 0.01
FL 20 ´ 9.8 ´ 4 Dl = 0.0098 cm.
\l= =
A Y p ´ (10 -3 )2 ´ 1.96 ´ 1011 17. (a). Volume = Mass/density
= 1.27 × 10–3 m = 1.27 mm Area of cross-section = volume/length
EBD_7156
60 DPP/ P 20
21. (c) F = YAaDq \ F µ A
mass 15.6 ´ 10-3
= = = 8 × 10–7 m2 1
density ´ length 7800 ´ 2.5 22. (a) For twisting, angle of shear f µ
L
Fl 8 ´ 9.8 ´ 2.5 i.e. if L is more then f will be small.
Y= =
ADL (8 ´ 10 -7 ) ´ 1.25 ´ 10-3 23. (a) Y = 2h (1 + s )
Y = 1.96 × 1011 N/m2
0.5Y - h
18. (c). Potential energy per unit volume = u 24. (a) Y = 2h (1 + s ) Þ s =
h
1
= × stress × strain
2 Fcos q Fcos2 q
25. (a) Tensile stress = =
stress a / cos q a
But Y =
strain 26. (a) Tensile stress is maximum when cos 2 q is maximum,
\ stress = Y x strain = Y x S
i.e., q = 0°
\ Potential energy per unit volume = u
Fsin q Fsin q cos q
1 1 27. (b) Shearing stress = =
= × (YS)S = YS2 a / cos q a
2 2
Fsin 2q
l1 L1 r22 =
2a
19. (d). l =
2 L 2 r12 28. (a) Elasticity is a measure of tendency of the body to regain
L1 = L, L2 = 2L, r1 = 2R., r2 = R its original configuration. As steel is deformed less than
rubber therefore steel is more elastic than rubber.
l1 L R2 1 29. (a) Bulk modulus of elasticity measures how good the body
\ = . 2 =
l 2 2L 4R 8 is to regain its original volume on being compressed.
Therefore, it represents incompressibility of the material.
Force F - PV
20. (c). stress = = 2 K=
Area pr where P is increase in pressure, DV is change
DV
1 in volume.
\ stress S µ 2 30. (a) A bridge during its use undergoes alternating strains
r for a large number of times each day, depending upon the
2 movement of vehicles on it when a bridge is used for long
æ S1 ö æ r2 ö time, it losses its elastic strength. Due to which the amount
\ ç ÷ =ç ÷
è S2 ø è r1 ø of strain in the bridge for a given stress will become large
and ultimately, the bridge may collapse. This may not
r1 2 S1 1 happen, if the bridges are declared unsafe after long use.
Given r = 1 \ =
S2 4
2
DPP/ P 21 61
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 21
1. (a) Force required to separate the plates Let the width of each plate is b and due to surface
tension liquid will rise upto height h then upward force
2TA 2 ´ 70 ´ 10-3 ´ 10 -2
F= = = 28 N due to Surface tension
t 0.05 ´ 10 -3 .......(i)
= 2Tb cos q
2. (c) T T Weight of the liquid rises in between the plates
q q = Vdg = (bxh)dg ........(ii)
Equating (i) and (ii) we get, 2T cos q = bxhdg
2T cos q
\h =
xdg
10. (b) Mass of liquid in capillary tube
æ 1ö
Weight of metal disc = total upward force M = pR 2 H ´ r\ M µ R 2 ´ ç ÷ (As H µ1/ R)
è Rø
= upthrust force + force due to surface tension
= weight of displaced water + T cos q (2pr ) \ M µ R . If radius becomes double then mass will
becomes twice.
= W + 2prT cos q
11. (d) In the satellite, the weight of the liquid column is zero.
æ D2 d 2 ö So the liquid will rise up to the top of the tube.
3. (d) W = T ´ 8p(r22 - r12 ) = T ´ 8p ç - ÷
ç 4 4 ÷ø 12. (b) Tc = T0 (1- µ t )
è
i.e. surface tension decreases with increase in
= 2p( D 2 - d 2 )T temperature.
4. (b) Increment in area of soap film = A2 - A1 13. (a)
14. (d) Tension in spring T = upthrust - weight of sphere
= 2 ´ [(10 ´ 0.6) - (10 ´ 0.5)] ´10 -4 = 2 ´10 -4 m 2 = V sg - V rg = V hrg - V rg (As s = hr)
Work done = T ´ DA
= (h - 1)V rg = (h - 1) mg.
= 7.2 ´ 10-2 ´ 2 ´ 10-4 = 1.44 ´10 -5 J 15. (b)
5. (a) 16. (c)
6. (c) Excess pressure inside soap bubble is inversely proportional 17. (c) A stream lined body has less resistance due to air.
1 18. (a) Weight of cylinder = upthrust due to both liquids
to the radius of bubble i.e. DP µ
r æA 3 ö æ A Lö
This means that bubbles A and C posses greater V ´ D ´ g = ç ´ L÷ ´ d ´ g + ç ´ ÷ ´ 2d ´ g
è5 4 ø è 5 4ø
pressure inside it than B. So the air will move from A
and C towards B. æA ö A´ L´d ´ g
Þ ç ´ L÷ ´ D ´ g =
rr 5´ 4 è5 ø 4
7. (b) r = 1 2 = = 20 cm
r1 - r2 5 - 4
D d 5
Þ = \D = d
8. (c) The radius of resultant bubble is given by R 2 = r12 + r2 2 . 5 4 4
9. (b) x 19. (b) Velocity of efflux when the hole is at depth h, v = 2 gh

b
Rate of flow of water from square hole
Q1 = a1v1 = L2 2 gy
Rate of flow of water from circular hole
h
Q2 = a2 v2 = pR 2 2 g (4 y )
According to problem Q1 = Q2
L
Þ L2 2 gy = pR 2 2 g (4 y) Þ R =
2p
EBD_7156
62 DPP/ P 21
( )
20. (a) Let A = cross-section of tank o
23. (d) At critical temperature Tc = 370 C = 643 K , the
A surface tension of water is zero.
24. (d)
25. (b)
PBottom > PSurface . So bubble rises upward.
3m B
v At constant temperature V µ 1 ( Boyle 's law )
52.5 cm
P
Since as the bubble rises upward, pressure decreases, then
from above law volume of bubble will increase i.e. its size
increases.
26. (a)
a = cross-section hole
27. (d).
V = velocity with which level decreases
F = Patm × Area = 105 × 1 × 10–6 = 0.1 N
v = velocity of efflux
av æ 2T ö
F = ç Patm + ´ A = 0.10023 N
From equation of continuity av = AV Þ V =
A è r ÷ø
By using Bernoulli’s theorem for energy per unit volume 28. (a) Since the excess pressure due to surface tension is
Energy per unit volume at point A inversely proportional to its radius, it follows that
= Energy per unit volume at point B smaller the bubble, greater is the excess pressure. Thus
when the larger and the smaller bubbles are put in
1 1
P + rgh + rV 2 = P + 0 + rv 2 communication, air starts passing from the smaller into
2 2 the large bubble because excess pressure inside the
former is greater than inside the latter. As a result, the
2 gh 2 ´ 10 ´ (3 - 0.525)
Þ v2 = = = 50( m / sec) 2 smaller bubble shrinks and the larger one swells.
2 2
æaö 1 - (0.1) 29. (b) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2
1- ç ÷
è Aø is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1.
30. (a) In a stream line flow of a liquid, according to equation
21. (c) If the liquid is incompressible then mass of liquid
of continuity,
entering through left end, should be equal to mass of liquid
av = constant
coming out from the right end.
Where a is the area of cross-section and v is the velocity
\ M = m1 + m 2 Þ Av1 = Av2 + 1.5A.v of liquid flow. When water flowing in a broader pipe
Þ A ´ 3 = A ´ 1.5 + 1.5A.v Þ v = 1 m / s enters a narrow pipe, the area of cross-section of water
decreases therefore the velocity of water increases.
F 6.28 ´ 10 -4
22. (b) T= = = 5 ´ 10 -2 N / m
2 pr 2 ´ 3.14 ´ 2 ´ 10 -3
DPP/ P 22 63
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 22
1. (c) Due to volume expansion of both mercury and flask, é 75 45 ù
-6 -6
the change in volume of mercury relative to flask is = x ê ´ 10 ´ 100 + (20 - x) ´ ´ 10 ´ 100 ú
ë2 2 û
given by DV = V0 [ g L - g g ]Dq = V [ g m - 3a g ]Dq
On solving we get x = 10 cm.
= 50[180 × 10–6 – 3 × 9 × 10–6] (38 – 18) 5. (b) Due to volume expansion of both liquid and vessel,
= 0.153 cc the change in volume of liquid relative to container is
2. (a) greal = gapp. + gvessel given by DV = V0 [ g L - g g ]Dq
So (gapp. + gvessel)glass= (gapp. + gvessel)steel
Given V0 = 1000 cc, ag = 0.1× 10–4/°C
Þ 153 × 10–6 + (gvessel)glass= (144 × 10–6 + gvessel)steel
Further, (gvessel)steel = 3a = 3 × (12 × 10–6) = 36 × 10–6/°C \ g g = 3a g = 3 ´ 0.1 ´ 10-4 / °C = 0.3 ´ 10-4 / °C
Þ 153 × 10–6 + (gvessel)glass = 144 × 10–6 + 36 × 10–6 \ DV = 1000[1.82 ´ 10-4 - 0.3 ´ 10-4 ] ´ 100 = 15.2cc
Þ (gvessel)glass = 3a = 27 × 10–6/°C 6. (b) g r = g a + g v ; where g r = coefficient of real expansion,
Þ a = 9 × 10–6/°C g a = coefficient of apparent expansion and
3. (c) Initial diameter of tyre = (100 – 6) mm = 994 mm, g v = coefficient of expansion of vessel.
994 For copper g r = C + 3a Cu = C + 3A
= 497mm
So, initial radius of tyre R =
2 For silver g r = S + 3a Ag
and chan ge in diameter DD = 6 mm, so
C - S + 3A
6 Þ C + 3A = S + 3a Ag Þ a Ag =
DR = = 3 mm 3
2
After increasing temperature by Dq, tyre will fit onto 7. (d) V = V0 (1 + gDq) Þ Change in volume
wheel V – V0 = DV = A.Dl = V0gDq
Increment in the length (circumference) of the iron tyre
V0 .Dq 10-6 ´ 18 ´ 10-5 ´ (100 - 0)
g g Þ Dl = =
DL = L ´ a ´ Dq = L ´ ´ Dq [As a ´ ] A 0.004 ´ 10-4
3 3
= 45 × 10–3m = 4.5 cm
ægö 8. (b) Loss of weight at 27°C is
2pDR = 2pR ç ÷ Dq = 46 – 30 = 16 = V1 × 1.24 r1 × g ...(i)
è3ø
Loss of weight at 42°C is
3 DR 3´ 3 = 46 – 30.5 = 15.5 = V2 × 1.2 r1 × g ...(ii)
Dq Þ =
g R 3.6 ´ 10-5 ´ 497 Now dividing (i) by (ii), we get
Þ Dq = 500°C 16 V 1.24
= 1´
4. (b) DL = L0 aDq 15.5 V2 1.2
Rod A : 0.075 = 20 × aA × 100 V2 15.5 ´ 1.24
But = 1 + 3a(t2 - t1 ) = = 1.001042
75 V1 16 ´ 1.2
Þ aA = ´ 10-6 / °C
2 Þ 3a (42° – 27°) = 0.001042
Rod B : 0.045 = 20 × aB × 100 Þ a = 2.316 × 10–5/°C
45 mL
Þ aB = ´ 10-6 / °C 9. (b) Heat lost in t sec = mL or heat lost per sec = . This
2 t
For composite rod: x cm of A and (20 – x) cm of B we must be the heat supplied for keeping the substance in
have molten state per sec.
x (20 – x) mL Pt
\ = P or L =
t m
10. (b) Initially ice will absorb heat to raise it's temperature to
aA A B aB 0°C then it's melting takes place
20 cm If m1 = Initial mass of ice, m1' = Mass of ice that melts
0.060 = x aA × 100 + (20 – x) aB × 100 and mW = Initial mass of water
EBD_7156
64 DPP/ P 22
By Law of mixture 17. (b) Suppose m kg of ice melts then by using
Heat gained by ice = Heat lost by water Þ m1 × (20) + W = H
m1' × L = mWcW [20] ( Joules ) ( Joules )
Þ 2 × 0.5 (20) + m1' × 80 = 5 × 1 × 20 Þ Mgh = mL
Þ m1' = 1 kg Þ 3.5 × 10 × 2000 = m × 3.5 × 105
So final mass of water = Initial mass of water + Mass Þ m = 0.2 kg = 200 gm
of ice that melts = 5 + 1 = 6 kg. 18. (d) Coefficient of volume expansion
11. (a) If mass of the bullet is m gm,
Dr (r - r ) (10 - 9.7)
then total heat required for bullet to just melt down g= = 1 2 = = 3 ´ 10-4
Q1 = mcDq + mL = m × 0.03 (327 – 27) + m ×6 r.DT r.( Dq) 10 ´ (100 - 0)
= 15m cal = (15m × 4.2)J Hence, coefficient of linear expansion
Now when bullet is stopped by the obstacle, the loss in
g
1 a= = 10-4 / °C
-3 2 3
its mechanical energy = (m ´ 10 )v J
2 19. (b) As we know
(As m gm = m × 10–3kg) g real = g app. + g vessel
As 25% of this energy is absorbed by the obstacle,
Þ g app. = g glycerine – g glass
75 1 2 3
Q2 = ´ mv ´ 10-3 = mv 2 ´ 10-3 J = 0.000597 – 0.000027
100 2 8
= 0.00057/°C
Now the bullet will melt if Q2 ³ Q1
( Pt - P0 )
3 2 20. (a) t= ´ 100°C
i.e. mv ´ 10-3 ³ 15m ´ 4.2 Þ vmin = 410 m/s ( P100 - P0 )
8
12. (c) Heat gain = heat lost (60 - 50)
= ´ 100 = 25°C
CA 3 (90 - 50)
C A (16 - 12) = CB (19 - 16) Þ = 21. (c) Since specific heat = 0.6 kcal/gm × °C
CB 4
= 0.6 cal/gm × °C
CB 5 From graph it is clear that in a minute, the temperature
and CB (23 - 19) = CC (28 - 23) Þ = is raised from 0°C to 50°C.
CC 4
Þ Heat required for a minute
C A 15 = 50 × 0.6 × 50 = 1500 cal.
Þ = ....(i) Also from graph, boiling point of wax is 200°C.
CC 16
22. (b) The horizontal parts of the curve, where the system
If q is the temperature when A and C are mixed then, absorbs heat at constant temperature must depict
C A 28 - q changes of state. Here the latent heats are proportional
C A (q - 12) = CC (28 - q) Þ = ...(ii) to lengths of the horizontal parts. In the sloping parts,
CC q - 12
specific heat capacity is inversely proportional to the
On solving equation (i) and (ii) q = 20.2°C slopes.
13. (a) Same amount of heat is supplied to copper and water 23. (d) Let L0 be the initial length of each strip before heating.
so mcccDqc = mWcWDqW Length after heating will be
mc cc (Dq)c 50 ´ 10-3 ´ 420 ´ 10
Þ DqW = = = 5°C Brass Strip
mW cW 10 ´ 10 -3 ´ 4200
14. (b) Heat lost by hot water = Heat gained by cold water in
beaker + Heat absorbed by beaker
Þ 440 (92 – q) = 200 × (q – 20) + 20 × (q – 20)
d
Þ q = 68°C Copper Strip
15. (a)
16. (b) Firstly the temperature of bullet rises up to melting
point, then it melts. Hence according to W = JQ.
R q
1 2
Þ mv = J .[m.c.Dq + mL] = J [mS (475 - 25) + mL]
2
mv 2
Þ mS (475 - 25) + mL =
2J
LB = L0 (1 + α BΔT ) = ( R + d ) θ
DPP/ P 22 65
LC = L0 (1 + αC ΔT ) = Rθ r1 1500
r2 = = = 1350 kg/m3
(1 + gDT ) æ -3 1000 ö
R + d 1 + αB ΔT çè1 + 1 ´ 10 ´ ÷
Þ = 9 ø
R 1 + αC ΔT
d r 2 v 2 A2 = r1v1 A1
Þ 1+ = 1 + ( α B - α C ) ΔT
R Þ 1350 × v2 = 1500 × 0.1
v2 = 1/9 m/s
d
Þ R= \ Volume rate of flow at the end of tube
( α B - αC ) ΔT
1
= A2v2 = 4 × 10–4 ´
1 1 9
ÞRµ and R µ
ΔT ( B αC )
α -
4 40
24. (a) A bimetallic strip on being heated bends in the form of = ´ 10-4 m3 = ´ 10-5 m3
9 9
an arc with more expandable metal (A) outside (as
shown) correct. Volume rate of flow at the entrance = A1v1
= 0.1 × 4 × 10–4 = 4 × 10–5m3
Hence, difference of volume rate of flow at the two
ends
aA > aB æ 40 ö -5 4
B = ç - 4÷ ´ 10 = ´ 10-5 m3
B è 9 ø 9
A A aB
28. (d) Celsius scale was the first temperature scale and
Fahrenheit is the smallest unit measuring temperature.
aA aB aA 29. (a) Linear expansion for brass (19 × 10–4) > linear expansion
for steel (11 × 10–4). On cooling the disk shrinks to a
greater extent than the hole and hence it will get loose.
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 30. (b) The latent heat of fusion of ice is amount of heat
r1v1A1 = r2v2A2 required to convert unit mass of ice at 0°C into water
m = 1500 kg/m3 × 0.1 m/s × 4 (cm)2 at 0°C. For fusion of ice
msDT = 10000 L = 80 cal/gm = 80000 cal/gm = 8000 × 4.2 j/kg
1500 × 0.1 × 4 × 10–4 × 1500 × DT = 10000 = 336000 J/kg.
10000 1000
DT = = °C
90 9
EBD_7156
66 DPP/ P 23
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 23
dQ KADq 0.2 ´ 1 ´ (20 - q)t
1. (a) = H=
dt l 0.002
For both rods K, A and Dq are same
(200)2 ´ t 0.2 ´ (20 - q)t
dQ 1 Hence =
Þ µ 20 ´ 4.2 0.002
dt l q = 15.24° C
Þ
( dQ / dt ) semi circular 4. (b) If suppose KNi = K Þ KAl = 3K and KCu = 6K
So, Since all metal bars are connected in series.
( dQ / dt ) straight
æQ ö æQ ö æQ ö æQö
So, ç ÷ =ç ÷ =ç ÷ =ç ÷
l straight è t øCombination è t øCu è t ø Al è t ø Ni
=
l semi circular
3 1 1 1
and = + +
2r 2 K eq KCu K Al K Ni
=
= .
pr p
1 1 1 9
2. (b) Suppose thickness of each wall is x then = + + =
6 K 3K K 6K
æQö æQ ö
çè ÷ø =ç ÷ Þ Keq = 2K
t combination è t ø A
25 cm 10 cm 15 cm
K s A(q1 - q2 ) 2KA(q1 - q) Q Cu Ni Al Q
Þ =
2x x 100° C q1 q2 0° C
2 ´ 2K ´ K 4 æQ ö æQö
Q Ks = = K Hence, if ç ÷ =
(2K + K ) 3 è t øCombination çè t ÷øCu
and (q1 - q2 ) = 36°
K eq A(100 - 0) KCu A(100 - q1 )
Þ =
l Combination l Cu
2 KA(100 - 0) 6KA(100 - q1 )
Þ =
(25 + 10 + 15) 25
A B Þ q1 = 83.33° C
æQö æQ ö
Similar if ç ÷ =
è t ø Combination çè t ÷ø Al
2K K
2 KA(100 - 0) 3KA(q2 - 0)
Þ =
q1 x q x q2 50 15
Þ q2 = 20° C
4 5. (b) Let the temperature of junction be q then according to
KA ´ 36 2KA(q - q) following figure.
Þ 3 = 1
2x x 50°C
Hence temperature difference across wall A is
2K
(q1 - q) = 12° C H1
100°C H
3. (a) Heat developed by the heater
3K q H2
V 2 t (200)2 ´ t
H= . = K
R J 20 ´ 4.2
Heat conducted by the glass 20°C
DPP/ P 23 67
H = H1 + H 2 1
On solving equation (i) and (ii) we get K = and q0
Þ 15
3K ´ A ´ (100 - q) 2 KA(q - 50) KA(q - 20) = 24° C. Putting these values in equation (iii) we get q
= + = 42.7° C.
l l l
Þ 300 – 3q = 3q – 120 Ql
8. (c) t=
Þ q = 70° C KA(q1 - q2 )
6. (d) Wein's displacement law is
mLl V rLl
l mT = b = =
KA(q1 - q 2 ) KA(q1 - q 2 )
b
Þ lm = 5 + 10
T 5 ´ A ´ 0.92 ´ 80 ´
= 2
2.88 ´ 106 0.004 ´ A ´ 10 ´ 3600
= = 1000 nm
2880 = 19.1 hours.
Energy distribution with wavelength will be as follows Q KADq
9. (c) =
t l
El mL K (pr 2 )Dq
Þ =
t l
2
U2 æ m ö Kr
Þ Rate of melting of ice ç ÷ µ
èt ø l
U1
U3 1
Since for second rod K becomes th, r becomes
4
500
499
900
1000
1499
1500
l(nm) double and length becomes half, so rate of melting will
be twice i.e. æç ö÷ = 2 æç ö÷ = 2 ´ 0.1 = 0.2 gm/sec.

m m
From the graph it is clear that è t ø2 è t ø1
U2 > U1
7. (a) According to Newton law of cooling dQ KA
10. (d) = dq
q1 - q2 éq + q ù dt l
= K ê 1 2 - q0 ú
t ë 2 û 0.01 ´ 1
= ´ 30 = 6 J/sec
0.05
5 min Heat transferred in one day (86400 sec)
80° C 64°C
1 Q = 6 × 86400 = 518400 J
10 min Now Q = mL
52°C
2 Q 518400
15 min Þ m= = = 1.552 kg = 1552 g.
L 334 ´ 103
q=?
3 dT sA 4
11. (b) = (T - T04 )
For first process : dt mcJ
(80 - 64) é 80 + 64 ù [In the given problem fall in temperature of body dT =
=Kê - q0 ú ....... (i) (200 – 100) = 100 K, temp. of surrounding T0 = 0 K,
5 ë 2 û
Initial temperature of body T = 200 K].
For second process :
(80 - 52) 100 s 4 pr 2
é 80 + 52 ù = (2004 - 0 4 )
=Kê - q0 ú ....... (ii) dt 4 3
10 ë 2 û pr rcJ
3
For third process :
rrcJ
(80 - q) é 80 + q ù Þ dt = ´ 10-6 s
=Kê - q0 ú ....... (iii) 48s
15 ë 2 û
EBD_7156
68 DPP/ P 23
rrc 4.2 50 - q æ 50 + q ö
= ´ ´ 10-6 =Kç - 25 ÷ .......... (ii)
s 48 10 è 2 ø
7 r rc 7 rrc On dividing, we get
= µs ; µs [As J = 4.2]
80 s 72 s 10 60
=
12. (c) Suppose temperature difference between A and B is 50 - q q
100° C and q A > qB Þ q = 42.85° C
d q sA 4
C
15. (d) = (T - T04 ). If the liquids put in exactly similar
dt mc
calorimeters and identical surrounding then we can
H/2 H/2 consider T0 and A constant then
A B d q (T 4 - T04 )
µ
H H dt mc
If we consider that equal masses of liquid (m) are taken
H/2 H/2 at the same temperature then
dq 1
D
µ
dt c
So for same rate of cooling c should be equal which is
Heat current will flow from A to B via path ACB and
not possible because liquids are of different nature.
ADB. Since all the rod are identical so
Again from equation (i),
(Dq) AC = (Dq) AD
d q (T 4 - T04 )
Dq µ
(Because heat current H = ; here R = same for all) dt mc
R
d q (T 4 - T04 )
Þ q A - qC = q A - q D Þ µ
dt V rc
Þ qC = q D Now if we consider that equal volume of liquid (V) are
i.e. temperature difference between C and D is zero. taken at the same temperature then
dq 1
C µ .
dt rc
So for same rate of cooling multiplication of r × c for
R R two liquids of different nature can be possible. So,
option (d) may be correct.
A B 16. (d) For cooking utensils, low specific heat is preferred for
2T T it's material as it should need less heat to raise it's
temperature and it should have high conductivity,
because, it should transfer heat quickly.
R R
æQö K1 A1 (q1 - q2 )
17. (b) çè ÷ø =
t 1 l
D
K A (q - q )
and æç ö÷ = 2 2 1 2
Q
13. (a) Initially at t = 0 è t ø2 l
Rateof cooling (R) µ Fall in temperature of body (q – q0)
æQö æQö
R1 q1 - q0 Given, ç ÷ = ç ÷
Þ è t ø1 è t ø 2
=
R2 q 2 - q0
Þ K1 A1 = K 2 A2
100 - 40 3 18. (a) Convection may be stopped
= =
80 - 40 2 19. (d) Heated fluid becomes less dense than the cold fluid
above it
60 - 50 æ 60 + 50 ö 20. (c) According to Kirchoff's law, the ratio of emissive power
14. (c) = Kç - 25 ÷ ........... (i)
10 è 2 ø to absorptive power is same for all bodies is equal to
DPP/ P 23 69
the emissive power of a perfectly black body i.e., Initial temperature of calorimeter, T1 = 15°C
æeö Temperature of ball, T2 = 100°C
çè ÷ø = EBlack body for a particular wave length
a body Final temperature of the liquid, T = 23°C
Specific heat of solid, c2 = 0.092 cal/g°C
æ el ö
çè a ÷ø = ( El ) Black body Heat gained by turpentine and calorimeter is
l body
mc (T – T1) + W (T – T1) = 200c (23 – 15) + 4 (23 – 15)
Þ el = al El = (200c + 4) 8
21. (a) As for a black body rate of absorption of heat is more.
Heat lost by the ball is
Hence thermometer A shows faster rise in temperature
but finally both will acquire the atmospheric Mc2 (T2 – T) = 100 (0.092) (100 – 23)
temperature. = 708.4 cal.
22. (b) According to the principle of calorimetry
According to Stefan's law Heat gained = Heat lost
\ (200c + 4) 8 = 708.4
E = eAσT 4 Þ E1 = e1AσT14 and E 2 = e 2 AσT24
1600c + 32 = 708.4
Q E1 = E 2 \ e1T14 = e 2 T2 4
708.4 - 32
or c = = 0.42 cal/g°C
1600
1 1
æe ö4 æ 1 4 ö4 28. (d) Equivalent thermal conductivity of two equally thick
Þ T2 = ç 1 T14 ÷ = ç ´ ( 5802 ) ÷ plates in series combination is given by
è e2 ø è 81 ø
Þ TB = 1934 K
And, from Wein's law λ A ´ TA = λ B ´ TB

K1 K2
λ T λ - λ A TA - TB
Þ A = B Þ B =
λ B TA λB TA
1 5802 - 1934 3968 2 1 1

Þ = = Þ λ B = 1.5 μm = +
λB 5802 5802 K K1 K 2
23. (a) According to Newton's law of cooling. If K1 < K2
24. (a) In forced convection rate of loss of heat then K1 < K < K 2
29. (b) Both statement-1 and statement-2 are true but
Q statement-2 is not correctly explaining the statement-2.
µ A(T , T0 )
T 30. (d) According to Wein's displacement law the
25(a), 26(c), 27(c) 1
lm µ
T
Let c be the specific heat of turpentine
Hence statement-1 is true but statement-2 is false.
Mass of the solid, M = 100g
Mass of turpentine m = 200g
Water equivalent of calorimeter, W = 4g
EBD_7156
70 DPP/ P 24
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 24
1. (b) Differentiate PV = constant w.r.t. V
R (Ti - T f ) R(T - T f )
DP DV 10. (d) W= Þ 6R = Þ T f = (T - 4) K
Þ P DV + V DP = 0 Þ = g -1 æ5 ö
P V çè - 1÷ø
3
2. (a) In isothermal compression, there is always an increase
of heat which must flow out the gas. 11. (c) PV g constant : Differentiating both sides
DQ = DU + DW Þ DQ = DW (\DU = 0)
dP dV
P gV g -1dV + V g dP = 0 Þ = -g
1.5 ´ 104 P V
Þ DQ = -1.5 ´ 104 J = cal = -3.6 ´ 103 cal
4.18 12. (c) V µ T at constant pressure
3. (c) DQ = DU + DW V1 T1 VT 300 ´ 280
Þ = Þ V2 = 1 2 = = 280 ml
Þ DU = DQ - DW = 2240 - 168 = 2072 J . V2 T2 T1 300
V 20 13. (b) In thermodynamic process, work done is equal to the
4. (b) Wiso = mRT loge 2 = 1´ 8.31´ 300log e = 1728 J
V1 10 area covered by the PV curve with volume axis.
Hence, according to graph shown
Tg Wadiabatic < Wisothermal < Wisobaric
5. (d) For adiabatic process = constant
Pg - 1
1-g (1-1.4) P
T æPö g T
Þ 2 = æç ö÷
4 1.4
Þ 2 =ç 1÷ Isobaric
T1 è P2 ø 300 è 1 ø
0.4
Þ T2 = 300(4) 1.4 Isothermal
6. (d) PV g = constant Adiabatic

g
P2 æ V1 ö V1 V2 V
Þ = Þ P2 = (8)5 / 3 P1 = 32 P1
P1 çè V2 ÷ø
g -1 14. (d) W = PDV = 2.4 × 104 × 1 × 105 = 24J

T2 æ V1 ö
7. (b) =
T1 çè V2 ÷ø V2 T2 274
15. (c) For isobaric process V = T Þ V2 = V ´ 273
1 1
5 2
-1
æ 27 ö 3 æ 27 ö 3 274V V
Þ T2 = 300 ç ÷ = 300 ç ÷ Increase = -V =
è 8 ø è 8 ø 273 273
2 16. (c) W = PDV = nRDT = 0.1 × 2 × 300 = 60 cal
ìïæ 27 ö1/ 3 üï æ3ö
2
17. (d) Fraction of supplied energy which increases the
= 300 íç ÷ ý = 800 ç ÷ = 675 K
internal energy is given by
îïè 8 ø þï è2ø
Þ DT = 675 - 300 = 375 K DU (DQ)V mCV DT 1

f = = = =
(DQ ) P (DQ) P mC P DT g
8. (b) In adiabatic change Q = constant Þ DQ = 0
So DW = -DU (\ DQ = DU + DW ) 7 5
For diatomic gas, g = Þ f =
5 7
9. (d) TV g -1 = constant
18. (a) In isothermal change, temperature remains constant,
g -1
æV ö Hence DU = 0.
Þ T2 = T1 ç 1 ÷ = 927o C
èV ø 2 Also from DQ = DU + DW Þ DQ = DW
DPP/ P 24 71
19. (c) From graph it is clear that P3 > P1 .

C
P3
P1
C A
P3 P2 B
P1
A V
E(V1) D(V2)
B
P2 24. (d) Work done = Area of ABC with V-axis
= P0(2V0 –V0) + 0 = P0V0 = nRT0 = RT0
Change in internal energy = nCVDT
E (V1 ) D (V2 ) V 3 9
= 1× R × (4T0 – T0) = RT
T0
2 2
Since area under adiabatic process (BCED) is greater
than that of isothermal process (ABDE).Therefore net 9 11
Heat absorbed = RT
T0 + RT0 = RT
T0
work done 2 2
W = Wi + (-WA ) \WA > Wi Þ W < 0
25. (b) AB is an isothermal process then
20. (b) PV 2 = constant represents adiabatic equation. So P
during the expansion of ideal gas internal energy of P × 2V = PB × 6V Þ PB =
3
gas decreases and temperature falls.
21. (a) For adiabatic process P
T1Vbg-1 = Constant A C
For bc curve P
T1Vbg-1 = T2Vcg-1
g-1
T2 æ Vb ö
or =ç ÷ ....(i)
T1 è Vc ø
B
For ad curve
V
g -1 2V 6V
T1Vag -1 = T2Vd
Now BC is an isochoric process then
g -1
T2 æ Va ö PB PC P P
or = .....(ii) = ; =
T1 çè Vd ÷ø TB TC 3T0 TC ; TC = 3T0
From equation (i) and (ii) 26. (a) Heat absorbed during BC is given by
Vb Va 3R
= Q = nCv DT = n ´ (TC - TB )
Vc Vd 2
22. (d) There is a decrease in volume during melting on an ice 3R
= n´ (2T0 ) = 3nRT0.
slab at 273K. Therefore, negative work is done by 2
ice-water system on the atmosphere or positive work 27. (b) Heat capacity is given by
is done on the ice-water system by the atmosphere. 1 dQ 1 Q
Hence option (b) is correct. Secondly heat is absorbed C= ; C=
n dT n 2T0
during melting (i.e. DQ is positive) and as we have
seen, work done by ice-water system is negative (DW 28. (c) As isothermal processes are very slow and so the
is negative). Therefore, from first law of different isothermal curves have different slopes so
they cannot intersect each other.
thermodynamics ΔU = ΔQ - ΔW 29. (d) Adiabatic compression is a rapid action and both the
Change in internal energy of ice-water system, DU will internal energy and the temperature increases.
be positive or internal energy will increase.
Q
23. (a) From graph it is clear that P3 > P1. 30. (a) c= ; a gas may be heated by putting pressure,
m.Dq
Since area under adiabatic process (BCED) is greater so it can have values for 0 to ¥ .
than that of isothermal process (ABDE). Therefore net CP and CV are it’s two principle specific heats, out of
work done infinite possible values.
W = Wi + ( - WA ) Q WA > Wi Þ W < 0 In adiabatic process C = 0 and in isothermal process
C= ¥.
EBD_7156
72 DPP/ P 25
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 25
1. (c) Processes A to B and C to D are parts of straight line 4. (d) In all given cases, process is cyclic and in cyclic process
graphs of the form y = mx DU = 0 .
5 2
P g-1
æ L A ö3
-1
æ L ö3
TC = 2200 K T æV ö
P2 TB = 800 K 5. (d) T1V1g-1 = T2V2g-1 Þ 1 =ç 2 ÷ =ç 2 ÷ =ç 2 ÷
P2 B C T2 è V1 ø è L1 A ø è L1 ø
VB VC 6. (d) Oxygen is diatomic gas, hence its energy of two moles
TA = 600K 5
P1
A VA D TD = 1200 K = 2 ´ RT = 5RT
2
VD
Argon is a monoatomic gas, hence its internal energy
3
of 4 moles = 4 ´ RT = 6 RT
2
T
Total internal energy = (6 + 5) RT = 11RT
mR T1 - T2 WA T -T W
Also P = T (m = 6) 7. (c) hA = = Þ hB = 2 3 = B
V T1 Q1 T2 Q2
Þ P µ T . So volume remains constant for the graphs
AB and CD. Q1 T1 T2 - T3 T1
\ = ´ = \W A = WB
So no work is done during processes for A to B and C Q2 T2 T1 - T2 T2
to D i.e., WAB = WCD = 0 and
T1 + T3 800 + 300
WBC = P2 (VC - VB ) = mR (TC - TB ) \ T2 = = = 550 K
2 2
= 6 R (2200 - 800) = 6 R ´1400 J T1 - T2 T - (273 + 7)
8. (d) Initially h = Þ 0.5 = 1
Also WDA = P1 (V A - VD ) = mR(TA - TB ) T1 T1
= 6 R (600 - 1200) = -6 R ´ 600 J 1 T1 - 280
Hence work done in complete cycle Þ = Þ T1 = 560 K
2 T1
W = WAB + WBC + WCD + WDA
= 0 + 6 R ´1400 + 0 - 6 R ´ 600 , T1¢ - T2
Finally h1 =
= 6 R ´ 900 = 6 ´ 8.3 ´ 800 = 40 kJ T1¢
2. (d) W = Area bonded by the indicator diagram with V-axis)
T ¢ - (273 + 7)
1 Þ 0.7 = 1 Þ T1¢ = 933K
= ( PA + PB )(VB - VA ) T1¢
2
3. (d) For path ab : (DU ) ab = 7000 J \ increase in temperature = 933 - 560 = 373K » 380 K
9. (d) In both cylinders A and B the gases are diatomic
By using DU = mCV DT
( g = 1.4) . Piston A is free to move i.e. it is isobaric
5
7000 = m ´ R ´ 700 Þ m = 0.48 process. Piston B is fixed i.e. it is isochoric process. If
2
same amount of heat DQ is given to both then
For path ca :
(DQ )ca = (DU )ca + (DW )ca .......(i) (DQ)isobaric = (DQ)isochoric
\ (DU ) ab + (DU )bc + (DU )ca = 0 Þ m CP (DT ) A = m Cu (DT ) B
\ 7000 + 0 + (DU )ca = 0 Þ (DU )ca = -7000 J .... (ii) CP

Þ ( DT ) B = (DT ) A = g (DT ) A = 1.4 ´ 30 = 42 K
Cu
Also (DW )ca = P1 (V1 - V2 ) = mR (T1 - T2 ) T1 - T2
10. (b) In first case, h1 =
= 0.48 ´ 8.31´ (300 - 1000) = -2792.16 J ......(iii) T1
on solving equations (i), (ii) and (iii) 2T1 - 2T2 T1 - T2
(DQ )ca = -7000 - 2792.16 = -9792.16 J = -9800 J In second case, h2 = = =h
2T1 T1
DPP/ P 25 P
73
T2 1 500 500 1 C
11. (b) h = 1- Þ = 1- Þ = ...(i)
T1 2 T1 T1 2
2T0
60 T2' T2' 2 B
= 1- Þ = ...(ii) D
100 T1 T1 5
T0
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), A
500 5
= Þ T2, = 400 K V0 2V0
V
T2, 4
æ V0 ö
T2 300 1 Here W < 0 Þ Q < 0 and | W | = RT0 ln ç 2V ÷ + 2RT
T0
è 0ø
12. (a) hmax = 1 - =1- = = 25%
T1 400 4
æ 2V0 ö
So 26% efficiency is impossible.
ln ç V ÷ = RT
T0 ln 2
T2 (273 + 123) 150 1 è 0 ø
13. (a) h =1- =1- =1- = = 50% (25) (c) (26) (b) (27) (b)
T1 (273 + 27) 300 2
T2 25 300 1 300 P
14. (c) h =1- Þ =1- Þ = 1-
T1 100 T1 4 T1
c
o
T1 = 400 K = 127 C
15. (b) DQ = DU + DW
b
Þ DU = DQ - DW = Q - W (using proper sign) d
16. (b) (i)
17. (a) J DQ = DU + DW , DU = J DQ - DW a
DU = 4.18 ´ 300 - 600 = 654 Joule
V
18. (b) DQ = DU + DW
Þ DW = DQ - DU = 110 - 40 = 70 J Anticlockwise cycle Þ W < 0
19. (a) (ii) Process ab : Wab = 0, DUab > 0 Þ Qab > 0
20. (a) From FLOT Process bc : Wbc < 0, DUbc = 0 Þ Qbc < 0
Process cd : Wcd = 0, DUcd < 0 Þ Qcd < 0
Þ dU = dQ - dW Þ dU = dQ(< 0) (\ dW = 0) Process da : Wda > 0, DUda = 0 Þ Qda > 0
Þ dU < 0 So, temperature will decrease. (iii) da and bc are isothermal process.
21. (b) From FLOT DQ = DU + DW 28. (a) Second law of thermodynamics can be explained with
Work done at constant pressure the help of example of refrigerator, as we know that
refrigerator, the working substance extracts heat from
(DW ) P = (DQ) P - DU
colder body and rejcts a large amount of heat to a hotter
(DQ ) P - (DQ)V (As we know (DQ )V = DU ) body with the help of an external agency i.e., the electric
Also (DQ ) P =
mcP DT and (DQ )V =
mcV DT supply of the refrigerator. No refrigerator can ever work
without external supply of electric energy to it.
Þ ( DW ) p =
m(cP - cV )DT 29. (d) When the door of refrigerator is kept open, heat rejected
by the refrigerator to the room will be more than the
Þ (DW )P = 1´ (3.4 ´103 - 2.4 ´103)10 =
104 Cal. heat taken by the refrigerator from the room (by an
22. (a) Slow isothermal expansion or compression of an ideal amount equal to work done by the compressor).
gas is reversible process, while the other given pro- Therefore, temperature of room will increase and so it
cess are irreversible in nature. will be warmed gradually. As according to second law
dQ of thermodynamics, heat cannot be transferred on its
23. (a) For a reversible process ò T
=0 own, from a body at lower temperature to another at
24. (d) higher temperature.
30. (c) As there is no change in internal energy of the system
during an isothermal change. Hence, the energy taken
by the gas is utilised by doing work against external
pressure. According to FLOT
DQ = DU + pDV
Hence, DQ = DU = pDV
Therefore, statement-2 is true and statement-1 is false.
EBD_7156
74 DPP/ P 26
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 26
1. (a) Closed vessel i.e., volume is constant Þ< CH >
P T P T = 2 < CHe >
Þ 1 = 1Þ = Þ T = 250 K
P2 T2 æ 0.4 ö T +1
P+ç ÷ P 12. (b) vrms > vau > vmp
è 100 ø
V1 T1 V (273 + 27) 300 5 7

2. (c) V µT Þ = Þ = = 1´ 1´
V2 T2 2V T2 T2 3 + 5
m1g1 m2 g 2 æ 5 ö æ7 ö
+ -1 -1
Þ T2 = 600 K = 327o C g1 - 1 g 2 - 1 çè 3 ÷ø çè 5 ÷ø 3
13. (a) g mix = = = = 1.5
3. (c) At low pressure and high temperature real gases m1 m 1 1 2
+ 2 +
behaves like ideal gases. g1 - 1 g 2 - 1 æ 5 ö æ 7 ö
ç - 1÷ ç - 1 ÷
N A PAVA TB è3 ø è5 ø
4. (d) PV = NkT Þ = ´
N B PBVB TA 14. (c) We know that
N A P ´ V ´ (2T ) 4 R R
Þ = = CP - CV = ÞJ=
NB V 1 J C P - CV
2P ´ ´ T
4
cal
5. (d) PV = mrT CP - CV = 1.98 ,
gm - mol - K
Since P, V , r ® remains same
Hence J
R = 8.32
1 m T 13 (273 + 52) 325 gm - mol - K
m¥ Þ 1 = 2 Þ = =
T m2 T1 m2 (273 + 27) 300 8.32
\J = = 4.20 J / cal
Þ m2 = 12 gm 1.98
i.e., mass released =13gm - 12gm = 1gm 3P 3PV P
15. (b) vrms = = Þ vrms µ
PV PV r m m
6. (c) m1 = , m2 =
RT RT
v1 P1 m2
(m + m 2 ) RT 2 PV RT Þ = ´
P' = 1 = ´ = 2P v2 P2 m1
V RT V
3kT 1 v P0 m / 2
7. (d) vrms = = vrms µ Þ = ´ Þ P2 = 2 P0
m m 2v P2 m
8. (a) 2
16. (d) P= E
3RT 3RT 3 ´ 8.3 ´ 300 3
9. (a) vrms = Þ M = 2 \M =
M vrms (1920)2 3
17. (a) For one gm mole; average kinetic energy = RT
2
= 2 ´ 10-3 kg = 2 gm Þ Gas is hydrogen.
18. (c) Average kinetic energy µ Temperature
10. (d) r.m.s velocity does not depend upon pressure.
11. (c) Average velocity of gas molecule is E1 T1 E T
Þ = Þ = 1 Þ T2 = 2T1
E2 T2 2 E T2
8 RT 1
v au = Þ va u µ
pM M T2 = 2(273 + 20) = 586 K = 313o C
< CH > M He 4 f
Þ = = =2 19. (d) Kinetic energy per gm mole E = RT
< CHe > MH 1 2
If nothing is said about gas then we should calculate
DPP/ P 26 75
the translational kinetic energy i.e.,
VA μ A
= ¹ 1 i.e. VA ¹ VB
3 3 VB μ B
ETrans = RT = ´ 8.31´ (273 + 0) = 3.4 ´103 J
2 2
PA μ A
20. (b) ( D Q ) P = m CP D T Similarly if VA = VB then = ¹ 1 i.e. PA ¹ PB .
PB μ B
cal 25. (b) n1Cv (T – T0) + n2 Cv (T – 2T0) = 0
Þ 2 ´ CP ´ (35 - 30) Þ C P = 7
mole - K
3
Q CP - CV = R T = T0
2
cal PT 3
Þ CV = C P - R = 7 - 2 = 5 Pf =
i f
= P0
mole - kelvin Ti 2
\ (DQ)V = mCV DT
26. (c) DQ = n1Cv (T f – T0 )
= 2 ´ 5 ´ (35 - 30) = 50 cal
21. (a) Average kinetic energy per molecule per degree of P0V0 3 æ3 ö 3
= ´ R ´ ç T0 – T0 ÷ = P0V0
2 RT0 2 è 2 ø 8
freedom = 1 kT . Since both the gases are diatomic
2 27. (c) Let DV is change in volume in any compartment then
and at same temperature (300 K), both will have the
æV ö
same number of rotational degree of freedom i.e. two. Pf ç 0 – DV ÷
Therefore, both the gases will have the same average P0V0 è 2 ø and
n1 = =
rotational kinetic energy per molecule 2 RT0 RT f
æ 1 ö
ç = 2 ´ kT = kT ÷ . æV ö
Pf ç 0 + DV ÷
è 2 ø
2 P0V0 è 2 ø
n2 = = Þ DV = 0
E1 1 2 RT0 RT f
Thus =
E2 1
28. (b) Internal energy of an ideal gas does not depend upon
22. (a) volume of the gas, because there are no forces of
Coefficient of volume expansion at constant pressure is attration/repulsion amongest the molecular of an ideal
1 gas.
for all gases. The average transnational K.E. is same Also internal energy of an ideal gas depends on
273
temperature.
3 29. (b) Helium is a monoatomic gas, while oxygen is diatomic.
for molecule of all gases and for each molecules it is kT
2 Therefore, the heat given to helium will be totally used
up in increasing the translational kinetic energy of its
kT molecules; whereas the heat given to oxygen will be
Mean free path λ = (as P decreases, l increases)
2πd 2 P used up in increasing the translational kinetic energy
of the molecule and also in increasing the kinetic energy
3RT 2RT of rotation and vibration. Hence there will be a greater
23. (b) v rms = , vP = = 0.816 vrms
M M rise in the temperature of helium.
30. (d) Maxwell speed distribution graph is asymmetric graph,
8RT because it has a long “tail” that extends to infinity.
v= = 0.92 v rms Þ v P < v < v rms
πM Also vrms depends upon nature of the gas and it’s
temperature.
1 1 3 3
mv 2rms = m v 2P = mv2P
Further E av =
2 2 2 4 dN
24. (d) According to problem mass of gases are equal so dv
number of moles will not be equal i.e. μ A ¹ μ B
PA VA PB VB
From ideal gas equation PV = μRT Þ =
μA μB
[As temperature of the container are equal]
From this relation it is clear that if PA = PB then vmp vav vrms v
EBD_7156
76 DPP/ P 27
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 27
1. (c) a = 10 2
1 æaö
mw2 y 2
2. (d) y = A sin wt =
A sin 2p A
t Þ = A sin
2pt
Þt =
T U 2 y 2 çè 2 ÷ø 1
T 2 T 12 13. (b) = = = =
E 1 2 a 4
mw2 a 2 a
2p a 2 pt 1 2 pt 2
3. (c) y = a sin t Þ = a sin Þ = sin
T 2 3 2 3 14. (c) In S.H.M., frequency of K.E. and P.E.
= 2 × (Frequency of oscillating particle)
2pt p 2p t p 1
Þ sin = sin Þ = Þ t = sec 1 2 1 2 2
3 6 3 6 4 15. (c) Kinetic energy K = mv = ma w cos 2 wt
2 2
æ pö æ pö
4. (a) x = a sin ç wt + ÷ and x ' = a cos wt = a sin ç wt + ÷ 1
è 6ø è 2ø = mw2 a 2 (1 + cos 2wt )
2
æ pö æ pö p hence kinetic energy varies periodically with double
\Df = ç wt + ÷ - ç wt + ÷ = the frequency of S.H.M. i.e. 2 w .
è 6ø è 6ø 3
16. (a) At mean position, the kinetic energy is maximum.
5. (c) v = w a 2 - y 2 Þ 10 = w a 2 - (4)2 and 1 2 2
ma w = 16
Hence
2
8 = w a2 - (5)2 On putting the values we get
2p 2p p
w = 10 Þ T = = sec
On solving, w = 2 Þ w = = 2 Þ T = p sec w 5
T
17. (d) From the given equation, w = 2pn = 4p Þ n = 2 Hz
2p 2p
6. (b) vmax = aw = a ´ = (50 ´ 10 -3 ) ´ = 0.15 m / s 18. (a) Using x = A sin wt
T 2
p
7. (d) vmax = aw and Amax = aw 2 For x = A / 2, sin wT1 = 1/ 2 Þ T1 =
6w
A 4 p
Þ w = max = = 2 rad/sec For x = A, sin w (T1 + T2 ) = 1 Þ T1 + T2 =
vmax 2 2w
8. (d) At mean position velocity is maximum p p p p
Þ T2 = - T1 = - = i.e., T1 < T2
vmax 16 2w 2w 6w 3w
i.e., vmax = wa Þ w = = =4 19. (a) Let the piston be displaced through distance x towards
a 4
left, then volume decreases, pressure increases. If DP is
\ u = w a 2 - y 2 Þ 8 3 = 4 42 - y 2 increased in pressure and DV is decreased in volume,
then considering the process to take place gradually
Þ 192 = 16(16 - y 2 ) Þ 12 = 16 - y 2 Þ y = 2cm (i.e isothermal)
h
9. (a) Maximum acceleration = aw2 = a ´ 4p 2 n 2
= 0.01´ 4 ´ (p) 2 ´ (60) 2 = 144 p2 m / sec
M
2 Amax 7.5 Gas
10. (d) Amax = a w Þ a = = = 0.61 m
w2 (3.5) 2
11. (b) Comparing given equation with standard equation, P A
p
y = a sin(wt + f), we get, a = 2cm, w = x
2
1 1 = P2V2 Þ PV = ( P + DP )(V - DV )
PV
2
æpö p2 Þ PV = PV + DPV - PDV - DPDV
\ Amax = w2 A = ç ÷ ´ 2 = cm / s 2
è2ø 2 Þ DP.V - P.DV = 0 (neglecting DP.DV )
1 P.x
12. (d) E= mw2 a 2 Þ E µ a 2 DP ( Ah ) = P ( Ax ) Þ DP =
2 h
DPP/ P 27 77
This excess pressure is responsible for providing the
æ pö
restoring force (F) to the piston of mass M. and y3 = a sin ç wt + ÷
è 4ø
PAx
Hence F = DP. A = On superimposing, resultant SHM will be
h
é æ pö æ pöù
PA y = a êsin ç wt - ÷ + sin wt + sin ç wt +
Comparing it with F = kx Þ k = M w = 2
ë è 4 ø è 4 ÷ø úû
h
é p ù
Þw=
PA
Þ T = 2p
Mh = a ê2 sin wt cos + sin wt ú = a [ 2 sin wt + sin wt]
ë 4 û
Mh PA
20. (b) Time taken by particle to move from x = 0 (mean = a (1 + 2) sin wt
position) to x = 4 (extreme position) Resultant amplitude = (1 + 2)a
T 1.2 Energy in SHM µ (Amplitude)2
= = = 0.3 s
4 4 E Resultant æ A ö
2
Let t be the time taken by the particle to move from \ E = ç ÷ = ( 2 + 1)2 = (3 + 2 2)
Single è aø
x = 0 to x = 2 cm
2p 1 2p Þ Eresultant = (3 + 2 2) Esingle
y = a sin wt Þ 2 = 4sin t Þ = sin t
T 2 1.2
a
p 2p
Þ = t Þ t = 0.1s . 45°
6 1.2 OR a a+a 2
º ¾¾¾¾
®
Hence time to move from x = 2 to x = 4 will be equal 45°
a
to 0.3 - 0.1 = 0.2 s
Hence total time to move from x = 2 to x = 4 and
25. (a) Acceleration µ - displacement, and direction of
back again = 2 ´ 0.2 = 0.4sec
21. (b) acceleration is always directed towards the equilibrium
position.
26. (d) 27. (b)
d2 x b
Compare given equation with 2
+ w2 x = 0 ; w2 =
dt a
a max w 2 A b
= =w =
vmax wA a
At t = 0, f = p/2
1
Force constant (k) µ b
Length of spring
x = A sin (wt + f) = A cos t
a
2 28. (b)
l
K l1 3 3
Þ = = Þ K1 = K . dx
K1 l l 2 29. (b) x = a sin ωt and v = = aω cos ωt
dt
d2 y p
22. (c) y = Kt 2 Þ 2
= a y = 2K = 2 ´ 1 = 2 m/s 2 (Q K = 1m/s 2 ) It is clear that phase difference between ‘x’ and ‘a’ is
.
dt 2
30. (a) The total energy of S.H.M. = Kinetic energy of particle
l l + potential energy of particle.
Now, T1 = 2p and T2 = 2p
g ( ay )
g + The variation of total energy of the particle in SHM
with time is shown in a graph.
T1 g + ay 6 T2 6 Energy Zero slope
Dividing, = Þ Þ 12 =
T2 g 5 T2 5 Total energy
A
23. (a) At x = 0, v = 0 and potential energy is minimum so Kinetic energy
particle will remain at rest.
24. (d) Let simple harmonic motions be represented by
Potential energy
æ pö
y1 = a sin ç wt - ÷ , y2 = a sin wt
è 4ø
T/4 2T/4 3T/4
EBD_7156
78 DPP/ P 28
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 28
1. (b) When the particle of mass m at O is pushed by y in 2 p 2p
the direction of A . The spring A will compressed by Putting v = 2 gh and w = = =p
T 2
y while spring B and C will be stretched by
we get T = m( g + p 2 gh)
y ' = y cos 45o . So that the total restoring force on the
mass m along OA.
FC FB k
C B 5. (b)
O m
1
Force constant (k ) µ
FA Length of spring
2
l
k l1 3 3
Þ = = Þ k1 = k
A k1 l l 2
6. (b) Initially time period was
Fnet = FA + FB cos 45o + FC cos 45o
l
T = 2p
= ky + 2ky ' 45o = ky + 2k ( y cos 45o ) cos 45o = 2ky g
Also
When train accelerates, the effective value of g becomes
Fnet = k ' y Þ k ' y = 2ky Þ k ' = 2k
( g 2 + a 2 ) which is greater than g.
m m
T = 2p = 2p Hence, new time period, becomes less than the initial time
k' 2k period.
2. (b) When mass 700 gm is removed, the left out mass (500
+ 400) gm oscillates with a period of 3 sec
(500 + 400
\ 3 = t = 2p
k
......(i)
When 500 gm mass is also removed, the left out mass
is 400 gm.
400
\ t ' = 2p ...(ii)
k
a
3 900
Þ = Þ t ' = 2sec
t' 400
3. (a) Slope is irrelevant hence
geff g
1/ 2
æM ö
T = 2p ç ÷
è 2k ø
7. (b) In accelerated frame of reference, a fictitious force
4. (a) Tension in the string when bob passes through lowest
(pseudo force) ma acts on the bob of pendulum as
mv 2 shown in figure.
point T = mg + = mg + mvw (\ v = r w)
r
DPP/ P 28 79
13. (a) No momentum will be transferred because, at extreme
position the velocity of bob is zero.
14. (c) The effective acceleration in a lift descending with
g
acceleration is
3
g 2g
g eff = g - =
3 3
æ L ö æ L ö æ 3L ö
\ T = 2p ç ÷ = 2p ç ÷ = 2p ç ÷
ma a ç geff ÷ è 2g / 3 ø è 2g ø
Hence tan q = = è ø
mg g
k1k2
-1 æ
aö 15. (c) In series keq = k + k so time period
Þ q = tan ç ÷ in the backward direction. 1 2
ègø
m(k1 + k2 )
l T = 2p
8. (c) T = 2p (Independent of mass) k1k2
g
1
DT 1 Dl 1 16. (c) Spring constant (k ) µ
9. (b) T µ l Þ = = ´ 1% = 0.5% Length of the spring (l )
T 2 l 2
10. (c) If suppose bob rises up to a height h as shown then as length becomes half, k becomes twice i.e. 2k
after releasing potential energy at extreme position 17. (b) Standard equation for given condition
becomes kinetic energy of mean position 2p
x = a cos t Þ x = -0.16 cos(pt )
T
[As a = -0.16 meter, T = 2sec]
q h = l (1 – cos q )
m m
18. (d) t1 = 2p k and t2 = 2p k
l l 1 2
Equivalent spring constant for shown combination is
k1 + k 2 . So time period t is given by
m
t = 2p
k1 + k 2
1 2 By solving these equations we get
Þ mgh = mvmax Þ vmax = 2 gh
2 t -2 = t1-2 + t2-2
l -h
Also, from figure cos q = 19. (a) With mass m2 alone, the extension of the spring l is
l given as
Þ h = l (1 - cos q) m2 g = kl ........(i)
So, vmax = 2 gl (1 - cos q) With mass (m1 + m2 ) , the extension l ' is given by
11. (a) If initial length l1 = 100 then l2 = 121 (m1 + m2 ) g = k (l + Dl ) .......(ii)
l T l The increase in extension is Dl which is the amplitude

By using T = 2p Þ 1 = 1 of vibration. Subtracting (i) from (ii), we get
g T2 l2
m1 g = k Dl
T1 100 m1 g
Hence, = Þ T2 = 1.1T1 Dl =
T2 121 or
k
T2 - T1 20. (a) If y1 = a1 sin wt and a2 sin(wt + p)
% increase = ´100 = 10%
T1 y1 y1 a
12. (d) After standing centre of mass of the oscillating body Þ + Þ y2 = 2 y1
a1 a2 a1
will shift upward therefore effective length will
This is the equation of straight line.
decrease and by T µ l , time period will decrease.
EBD_7156
80 DPP/ P 28
21. (c) Energy of particle is maximum at resonant frequency T - Mg cos θ = Centripetal force
i.e., w2 = w0 . For amplitude resonance (amplitude
maximum) frequency of driver force Mv 2
Þ T - Mg cosθ =
L
w = w02 - b 2 2 m2 Þ w1 ¹ w0
Also tangential acceleration a T = g sin θ.
c 25. (a) Except (4) all statements are wrong.
22. (b) A = ; when b = 0, a = c, amplitude
a+b-c 26. (b) 27. (b).
A ® ¥. This corresponds to resonance. For minimum time period w2A = mg
23. (b) Let the velocity acquired by A and B be V, then
4p 2
v A = mg , T = 0.2 sec,
mv = mV + mV Þ V = T2
2 At t = 0.05 sec.
1 1 1 1 2p
Also mv 2 = mV 2 + mV 2 + kx 2 y = A sin wt = 1 sn × 0.05cm. = 1cm.
2 2 2 2 0.2
Where x is the maximum compression of the spring.
1
1/ 2 PE = mgy = 1 × 10 × = 0.1 Joule
æ mö 100
On solving the above equations, we get x = v ç ÷
è 2k ø 28. (c) Statement -1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
At maximum compression, kinetic energy of the 29. (a) The time period of a oscillating spring is given by,
1 1 mv2 m 1
A – B system = mV 2 + mV 2 = mV 2 = T = 2p
ÞT µ
2 2 4 k k
24. (d) Since the spring constant is large for hard spring,
therefore hard spring has a less periodic time as
compared to soft spring.
30. (d) Time period of simple pendulum of length l is,
L –f +f L
l
q T = 2p ÞT µ l
g
DT 1 Dl
mg sinq Þ =
T 2 l
mg mg cosq
DT 1
\ = ´ 3 = 1.5%
From following figure it is clear that T 2
DPP/ P 29 81
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 29
v 330 w 2pf
1. (d) v = nl Þ l = = = 1.29 m (v ) wave = = = fl
n 256 k 2p / l
2. (a) Time required for a point to move from maximum pY0
displacement to zero displacement is \ (vmax ) particle = 4vwave = Y0 ´ 2pf = 4 f l Þ l =
2
T 1
t= = 9. (d) y = f ( x 2 - vt 2 ) doesn’t follows the standard wave
4 4n
equation.
1 1
Þn= = = 1.47 Hz æ 2px ö
4t 4 ´ 0.170 10. (a) y1 = a1 sin ç wt - ÷ and
è l ø
3. (b)
æ 2px ö æ 2px pö
y2 = a2 cos ç wt - + f ÷ = a2 sin ç wt - +f+ ÷
è l ø è l 2ø
p l æ pö
and D =
So phase difference = f + çf+ ÷
2 2 p è 2ø
11. (d) On comparing the given equation with standard
2p
2d1 + 2d 2 = v ´ t1 + v ´ t2 Þ 2(d1 + d2 ) = v (t1 + t2 ) equation y = a sin (vt - x ) . It is clear that wave
l
v (t1 + t2 ) 340 ´ (1.5 + 3.5) speed (v )wave = v and maximum particle velocity
d1 + d2 = = = 850 m
2 2
(vmax ) particle = aw = y0 ´ co-efficient of t = y0 ´ 2pv
4. (c) At given temperature and pressure l
1 v1 r2 4 a ´ 2 pv
vµ Þ = = = 2 :1 \ (vmax ) particle = 2(w ) wave Þ = 2v Þ l = py0
r v2 r1 1 l
5. (b) The distance between two points i.e. path difference 12. (a) Compare the given equation with y = a sin(wt + kx)
between them
50
l l p l v We get w = 2 pn = 100 Þ n = Hz
D= ´f= ´ = = (\ v = nl ) p
2p 2p 3 6 6n 13. (c) A wave travelling in positive x-direction may be
360 2p
ÞD= = 0.12m = 12cm represented as y = A sin (vt - x) . On putting values
6 ´ 500 l
6. (d) y1 = a sin(wt - kx ) and 2p æ x ö
y = 0.2 sin (360t - x) Þ y = 0.2 sin 2p ç 6t - ÷
æ pö 60 è 60 ø
y2 = a cos( wt - kx ) = a sin ç wt - kx + ÷
è 2ø 14. (a) Comparing the given equation with y = a sin(wt - kx)
p w
Hence phase difference between these two is . We get w = 3000p Þ n = = 1500 Hz
2 2p
I1 a12 æ 0.06 ö 4
2 2p 1
7. (c) = 2 =ç ÷ = and k = = 12p Þ l = m
I 2 a2 è 0.03 ø 1 l 6
1
8. (d) Comparing the given equation with y = a sin(wt - kx) , So, v = nl Þ v = 1500 ´ = 250 m / s
6
2p 15. (b) Given, y = 0.5sin(20 x - 400t )
We get a = Y0, w = 2pf , k = . Hence maximum
l
Comparing with y = a sin(wt - kx)
particle velocity (vmax ) particle = aw = Y0 ´ 2p f and
w 400
wave velocity Gives velocity of wave v = = = 20 m / s.
k 20
EBD_7156
82 DPP/ P 29
l 2π
16. (b) With path difference , waves are out of phase at the For the given wave ω = 2πn = 15π, k = = 10π
2 λ
point of observation. Coefficient of t ω 15π
Now v = = = = 1.5m / sec
2 2 2 2 1 2 2p Coefficient of x k 10π
17. (b) A = a = a + a + 2a cos q Þ cos q = - Þ q =
2 3
2π 2π
18. (c) For interference, two waves must have a constant phase and λ = = = 0.2 m.
relationship. Equation ‘1’ and ‘3’ and ‘2’ and ‘4’ have k 10π
p wBA 1 p2 v
a constant phase relationship of out of two choices. 24. (a) pm = , I = wp m A Þ I = m
2 v 2 2B
Only one S2 emitting ‘2’ and S4 emitting ‘4’ is given 25. (d), 26. (c), 27. (a).
so only (c) option is correct. 1
(i) I µ , dinitial = R, dfinal = 3R,
19. (a) The resultant amplitude is given by d2
Iinitial 9 I
AR = A2 + A2 + 2 AA cos q = 2 A2 (1 + cos q ) = Þ Ifinal = initial
Ifinal 1 9
= 2 A cos q / 2 (\1 + cos q = 2 cos 2 q / 2) (ii) During the first half time, wavelength first increases as
the component of velocity of source increases till it be-
1 1 æ pö comes equal to the velocity of source itself, then it de-
20. (d) y= sin wt ± sin ç wt + ÷
a b è 2ø creases till it becomes zeros.
p / 3 2p + p / 3 5p / 3 2p + 5p / 3
p (iii) t1 = , ....... , t 2 = ,
Here phase difference = w w w w
2
\ The resultant amplitude t2
2 2
æ 1 ö æ 1 ö 1 1 a+b
= ç ÷ +ç ÷ = + =
è aø è bø a b ab
30° t=0 60°
21. (a) In a wave equation, x and t must be related in the form
30° 60°
( x - vt )
1
We rewrite the given equations y = t1
1 + ( x - vt ) 2
1
For t = 0 , this becomes y = , as given
(1 + x 2 ) p
when w = rad / s , t1 = 1, 7, 13, ....... t2 = 5, 11, 17,
For t = 2 , this becomes 3
28. (c) The velocity of every oscillating particle of the medium
1 1 is different of its different positions in one oscillation
y= =
[1 + ( x - 2v ) 2 ] [1 + ( x - 1) 2 ] but the velocity of wave motion is always constant i.e.,
particle velocity vary with respect to time, while the
2v = 1or v = 0 m/s
wave velocity is independent of time.
22. (c)
Also for wave propagation medium must have the
y properties of elasticity and inertia.
l Distance travelled by wave (l)
29. (b) Velocity of wave =
P R Time period (T )
x Wavelength is also defined as the distance between two
Q nearest points in phase.
l/2 30. (b) Transverse waves travel in the form of crests and
through involving change in shape of the medium. As
liquids and gases do not possess the elasticity of shape,
23. (b) therefore, transverse waves cannot be produced in
Standard wave equation which travel in negative x-direc- liquid and gases. Also light wave is one example of
tion is y = A sin ( ωt + kx + f0 ) transverse wave.
DPP/ P 30 83
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 30
1. (b) n1 = Frequency of the police car horn observer heard v n1 æ V ö
by motorcyclist 9. (d) By using n ' = n v - v Þ n = çè V - S ÷ø
s
n1 = Frequency of the siren heard by motorcyclist.
v - v0 æ 330 - 33 ö
n' = n =ç ´ 100 = 90 Hz
v2= Speed of motor cyclist 10. (a)
v è 330 ÷ø
330 - v 330 + v 11. (d) The apparent frequency heard by the observer is given
n1 = ´ 176; n2 = ´ 165
330 - 22 330 by
\ n1 - n2 = 0 Þ v = 22 m / s v 330 330
n' = x= ´ 450 = ´ 450 = 500 Hz
2. (c) Frequency of first over tone of closed pipe = Frequency v - vs 330 - 33 297
of first over tone of open pipe 12. (b) Observer is moving ayay form siren 1 and towards the
siren 2.
3v v 3 gP 1 gP é gP ù
Þ = Þ = ê\ v = ú v
4 L1 L2 4 L1 r1 L2 r2 ë r û
4L1 r1 4 L r1
Þ L2 = =
3 r2 3 r2
3. (b) For observer note of B will not change due to zero
relative motion.
Observed frequency of sound produced by A Stationay Moving Stationay
siren 1 observer siren 2
(330 - 30) Hearing frequency of sound emitted by siren 1
= 660 = 600 Hz
330
æ v - v0 ö æ 330 - 2 ö
\ No of beats = 600 - 596 = 4 n1 = n ç = 330 ç = 328Hz
è v ÷ø è 330 ÷ø
2v
4. (c) Open pipe resonanace frequency f1 = Hearing frequency of sound emitted by siren 2
2L
æ v - v0 ö æ 330 + 2 ö
n2 = n ç = 330 ç = 332 Hz
Closed pipe resonance frequency f 2 =
nv è v ø ÷ è 330 ÷ø
4L
Hence, beat frequency = n2 - n1 = 332 - 328 = 4
n
f 2 = f1 (where n is odd and f 2 > f1 ) \ n = 5 13. (b) At point A , source is moving away from observer so
4
apparent frequency n1 < n (actual frequency). At point
n(v - v0 )
5. (b) B source is coming towards observer so apparent
v - vs frequency n2 > n and point C source is moving
1 1 1æ v ö perpendicular to observer so n3 = n
6. (a) Wave number = but = l ' == l ç v - v ÷ and
l è sø Hence n2 > n3 > n1
14. (c) According the concept of sound image
v
vs = v + v person 345 + 5
3 n' = .272 = ´ 272 = 280 Hz
v - v person 345 - 5
, æ v ö v
\ (W .N .) = (W .N .) çè v - v / 3÷ø = 256 ´ 2u / 3 Dn = Number of beats = 280 – 272 = 8 Hz
15. (a) The observer will hear two sound, one directly from
3 source and other from reflected image of sound
= ´ 256 = 384
2
7. (d) Since there is no relative motion between observer and
source, therefore there is no apparent change in
frequency.
æ v ö æ 350 ö
n' = nç = 1200 ´ ç = 1400 cps
8. (c)
è v - vs ÷ø è 350 - 50 ÷ø
EBD_7156
84 DPP/ P 30
Hence number of beats heard per second OA i.e y = 0, 0 £ x £ L
æ v ö æ v ö AB i.e. y = L, 0 £ y £ L
=ç n-ç n
è v - vs ÷ø è v + vs ÷ø BC i.e. y = L, 0 £ x £ L
2nuus 2 ´ 256 ´ 330 ´ 5 OC i.e. x = 0, 0 £ y £ L

= = = 7.8 Hz The above conditions are satisfied only in alternatives
u2 - u2s 335 ´ 325
(b) and (c).
16. (a) In closed pipe only odd harmonics are present. Note that u ( x, y) = 0 for all four values e.g. in
17. (a) Maximum pressure at closed end will be atmospheric
pressure adding with acoustic wave pressure alternative (d ), u ( x, y) = 0 for y = 0, y = L But it is not
So Pmax = PA + P0 and Pmin = PA - P0 zero for x = 0 or x = L . Similarly in option (a)
u ( x, y) = 0 at x = L, y = L but it is not zero for
Pmax PA + P0
Thus P =
min PA - P0 x = 0 or y = 0 , while in options (b) and (c),
u ( x, y) = 0 for x = 0, y = 0, x = L and y = L
1 1
18. (b) nclosed = (nopen ) = ´ 320 = 160 Hz 26. (b), 27. (d).
2 2
l
19. (a) l = 1.21Å For fundamental force, = s Þ l = 2s
2
A A Y
N N Velocity of waves is, v =
N r where Y is Young's modu-
1.21 Å lus of quartz and r is its density.
1 l n æn ö 270 v 2.87 ´ 104 Y 1 2.87 ´ 10 4

20. (a) n µ Þ 2 = 1 Þ l2 = l1 ç 1 ÷ = 50 ´ = 13.5cm From f0 = = Þ ´ =
l l1 n2 è n2 ø 1000 l s r 2s s
21. (c) Loudness depends upon intensity while pitch depends Þ Y = 8.76 × 1012 N/m2
upon frequency.
3 ´ 2.87 ´ 104
22. (d) Using l = 2 ( l2 - l1 ) Þ v = 2n ( l2 - l1 ) For 3rd harmonic, f = 3f0 = 1.2 × 106 Hz Þ
s
Þ 2 ´ 215(63.2 - 30.7) = 33280cm / s = 1.2 × 106 Þ s = 0.07175 cm.
Actual speed of sound v0 = 332m / s = 33200cm / s
Hence error = 33280 – 33200 = 80cm / s 28. (d) As emission of light from atom is a random and rapid
23. (c) phenomenon. The phase at a point due to two
3 7 7 3 independent light source will change rapidly and
1 2 5 5 2 1 randomly. Therefore, instead of beats, we shall get
300 301 308 300 305 308 uniform intensity. However, if light sources are LASER
303 307
beams of nearly equal frequencies, it may possible to
8 8 observe the phenomenon of beats in light.
24. (a) Doppler shift doesn't depend upon the distance of listner 29. (d) The person will hear the loud sound at nodes than at
from the source. antinodes. We know that at anti-nodes the displacement
25. (b) Since the edges are clamped, displacement of the edges is maximum and pressure change is minimum while at
nodes the displacement is zero and pressure change is
u ( x, y) = 0 for line -
maximum. The sound is heared due to variation of
pressure.
y
Also in stationary waves particles in two different
C B segment vibrates in opposite phase.
(0,L) (L,L)
30. (a) Stationary wave
A
N N
N
O A A
x A node is a place of zero amplitude and an antinode is
(0, 0) a place of maximum amplitude.
DPP/ P 31 85
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 31
1. (b)
20 division of vernier scale = 8 div. of main scale
A
æ 8ö æ 2ö
Þ 1 V.S.D. = çè ÷ø M.S.D. = çè ÷ø M.S.D.
c=
a+ b+ c b d
20 5 3
Least count B a C
æ 2ö If h is the depression or elevation then the radius of
= 1 M.S.D – 1 V.S.D. = 1 M.S.D. – çè ÷ø M.S.D
5 c2 h
curvature is given by r = +
6h 2
æ 2ö æ 3ö 3
= çè1 - ÷ø M.S.D. = çè ÷ø M.S.D. = ´ 0.1 cm. = 0.06 cm. Pitch
5 5 5 8. (b) L.C. =
No. of circular divisions
1 9. (b) The specific heat of a solid is determined by the method
(Q 1 M.S.D. = cm. = 0.1 cm.)
10 of mixture.
10. (a)
Directly we can use
0.5
æ b -aö 11. (d) Least count of screw gauge = mm = 0.01mm
L.C. = M - V = ç M 50
è b ÷ø
\ Reading = [Main scale reading + circular scale
æ 20 - 8 ö æ 1 ö 3 reading × L.C] – (zero error)
= çè ÷ø çè ÷ø cm. = cm. = 0.06 cm.
20 10 50 = [3 + 35 × 0.01] – (–0.03) = 3.38 mm
2. (c) Within elastic limit it obeys Hooke's Law i.e., stress µ 12. (d) 30 Divisions of vernier scale coincide with 29 divisions
strain. of main scales
29
Therefore 1 V.S.D = MSD
3. (c) Least count = 1 ´ 1 cm = 1 30
N 10 10N Least count = 1 MSD – 1VSD
4. (b) 5th division of vernier scale coincides with a main scale 29
= 1 MSD - MSD
1 30
division. L.C. = = 0.1mm
10 1
= MSD
\ Zero error = – 5 × 0.1 = – 0.5 mm 30
This error is to be subtracted from the reading taken for 1
= ´ 0.5° = 1 minute.
measurement. Also, zero correction = + 0.5 mm. 30
5. (b) If Y = Young's modulus of wire, M = mass of wire,
0.5
g = acceleration due to gravity, x = extension in the wire, 13. (c) Least count = = 0.01mm
50
A= Area of cross-section of the wire,
l = length of the wire. Zero error = 5 × L.C
= 5 × 0.01 mm
Mgx DY DM Dx DA Dl = 0.05 mm
Y= Þ = + + +
Al Y M x A l Diameter of ball = [Reading on main scale] + [Reading
on circular scale × L . C] – Zero error
DY 0.01 0.01 2 ´ 0.001 0.001
Þ = + + + = 0.065 = 0.5 × 2 + 25 × 0.01 – 0.05
Y 3.00 0.87 0.041 2.820
= 1.20 mm
DY Dg Dl DT
or ´ 100 = ± 6.5% 14. (d) = +2
Y g l T
6. (b) The instrument has negative zero error.
7. (c) If A, B and C be the points corresponding to the Dl and DT are least and number of readings are
maximum in option (d), therefore the measurement of
impressions made by the legs of a spherometer then
g is most accurate with data used in this option.
EBD_7156
86 DPP/ P 31
mg L 2 2
15. (b) We know that Y = ´ d y æ dy ö dy
Þ xy + xç ÷ - y =0
D 2 l dx 2 è dx ø dx
p
4 18. (a) The condition for terminal speed (vt) is
Weight = Buoyant force + Viscous force
4mgL 4 ´ 1 ´ 9.8 ´ 2
Þ Y= =
( ) ´ (0.8 ´ 10 )
2 2
pD l p 0.4 ´ 10 -3 -3
Fv B=Vr2 g
= 2.0 ´ 1011 N/m 2
Now DY = 2DD + Dl
Y D l
[Q the value of m, g and L are exact]
0.01 0.05 W=V r 1g
= 2´ + = 2 × 0.025 + 0.0625
0.4 0.8
= 0.05 + 0.0625 = 0.1125
Þ DY = 2 × 1011 × 0.1125 = 0.225 × 1011 Vg (r1 - r1 )
\ V r1 g = V r2 g + kvt2 \ vt =
k
= 0.2 ´ 1011 N/m 2
16. (b) The time period of a simple pendulum is given by 19. (d) From the figure it is clear that liquid 1 floats on liquid
2. The lighter liquid floats over heavier liquid.
l l l Therefore we can conclude that r1 < r2
T = 2p \ T 2 = 4p 2 Þ g = 4p 2 2
g g T Also r3 < r2 otherwise the ball would have sink to the
bottom of the jar.
Dg Dl DT Also r3 > r1 otherwise the ball would have floated in
Þ ´ 100 = ´ 100 + 2 ´ 100
g l T liquid 1. From the above discussion we conclude that
Case (i) r1 < r3 < r2.
Dl = 0.1 cm, l = 64cm, DT = 0.1s, T = 128s 20. (c) In case of water, the meniscus shape is concave
upwards. Also according to ascent formula
Dg
\ ´ 100 = 0.3125 2T cos q
g h=
rrg
Case (ii)
Dl = 0.1 cm, l = 64cm, DT = 0.1s, T = 64s The surface tension (T) of soap solution is less than
water. Therefore rise of soap solution in the capillary
Dg tube is less as compared to water. As in the case of
\ ´ 100 = 0.46875
g water, the meniscus shape of soap solution is also
Case (iii) concave upwards.
Dl = 0.1 cm, l = 20cm, DT = 0.1s, T = 36s
l
Dg 21. (c)
\ ´ 100 = 1.055 A
g Y
Dg Wire (1)
Clearly, the value of ´ 100 will be least in case (i)
g
2
2r ( d1 - d 2 ) g 3A
17. (c) Terminal velocity, vT = Y
9h
vT
2 (10.5 - 1.5) 9 l/3
= Þ vT = 0.2 ´ Wire (2)
0.2 (19.5 - 1.5) 2 18
\ vT = 0.1 m / s As shown in the figure, the wires will have the same
2
Young’s modulus (same material) and the length of the
ìï d2y æ dy ö üï
2
dy wire of area of cross-section 3A will be l/3 (same
x í - By 2 - B ç ÷ ý + By =0
ïî dx è ø
dx ïþ dx volume as wire 1).
DPP/ P 31 87
For wire 1, 25. (a) Screw gauge is used to measure the diameter (d) of the
F/A
wire so that the area of cross-section is calculated by the
Y= ...(i) formula
D x/l
For wire 2 , pd 2
A=
F '/ 3 A 4
Y= ...(ii) 26. (b) Both the statements (1) & (2)are precautions to be taken
Dx /( l / 3)
during the experiment.
F l F' l 27. (a) The liquid cools faster first and slowly later on when its
From (i) and (ii) , ´ = ´ Þ F ' = 9F
A Dx 3 A 3Dx temperature gets close to surrounding temperature.
22. (b) Lower the vernier constant, more accurate measurement 28. (a) Maximum percentage error in measurement of e, as given
is possible by it. by Reyleigh’s formula.
(Given error is measurement of radius is 0.1 cm)
d
23. (b) Effective length = MC = MN + NC = l + De = 0.6 DR = 0.6 × 0.1 = 0.06 cm.
2 Percentage error is
M De
´ 100 =
0.06
´ 100 = 3.33%
e 0.6 ´ 3
29. (b) Speed of sound at the room temperature.
l l1 = 4.6 cm, l2 = 14.0 cm.,
N l = 2 (l2 – l1) = 2 (14.0 – 4.6) = 18.8 cm.
d/2 18.8
C v = f l = 2000 ´
100
= 376 m / s
30. (c) End correction obtained in the experiment.

l 2 - 3l1 14.0 - 3 ´ 4.6
e= = = 0.1 cm.
24. (c) Here, original length (L) = y, 2 2
Extension (l) = x, Force applied (F) = p
Area of cross-section (A) = q
FL
Now, Young's modulus (Y) =
AL
yp
ÞY=
xq
EBD_7156
88 DPP/ P 32
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 32
r
ur e2 $ e2 r æ\ r$ = r ö
1. (d) Q1 + Q2 = Q .....(i) 4. (c) F = - k 2 r = - k . 3 r çç ÷
r ÷ø
r r è
Q1Q2 5. (c) After following the guidelines mentioned above
and F =k ..... (ii)
r2
From (i) and (ii)
FC FD
kQ1 (Q - Q1 )
F=
r2 +Q +Q FAC
For F to be maximum A FA
B
dF Q
= 0 Þ Q1 = Q2 =
dQ1 2
2. (a) The position of the balls in the satellite will become as
shown below
180°
L L
+Q +Q C
D
+Q
Thus angle q = 180o
1 Q2
and force = . Fnet = FAC + FD = FA2 + FC2 + FD
4p Î0 (2 L )2
3. (b) FA = Force on C due to charge placed at A kq 2 kq 2

Since FA = FC = and FD =
a2 ( a 2)2
FA
2kq2 kq 2 kq 2 æ 1ö q2 æ1+ 2 2 ö
+2µC Fnet = + = 2 + =
2 èç ÷ø ç ÷
a2 2a 2
a 2 2
4p Î0 a è 2 ø
C 120°
6. (a)
FB
1 (+7 ´10-6 (-5 ´10-6 ) 1 35 ´10 -12
F= =- N
4pe 0 r 2 4pe0 r2
+ 1µC 1 (+5 ´ 10-6 ( -7 ´ 10 -6 ) 1 35 ´ 10 -12

- 1µC F¢ = = - N
4 pe 0 r2 4pe0 r2
A 10 cm B kQ
7. (c) Electric field outside of the sphere E out = ...(i)
r2
10-6 ´ 2 ´10-6 kQx
= 9 ´109 ´ = 1.8 N Electric field inside the dielectric shphere Ein = ...(ii)
(10 ´10-2 )2 R3
r2 x
FB = force on C due to charge placed at B From (i) and (ii), Ein = Eout ´
R
10-6 ´ 2 ´10-6 3 ( 20 )
2
= 9 ´109 ´ = 1.8 N Þ At 3 cm, E = 100 ´ = 120 V/m
(0.1) 2 103
Net force on C
Fnet = ( FA ) 2 + ( FB ) 2 + 2 FA FB cos120o = 1.8 N

DPP/ P 32 89
8. (c) Electric lines force due to negative charge are radially
inward. 2q 2q
2E
2E
E
q q Þ Enet = 0
2E E
2E
2q 2q
–
2q q
E
2E
q 2E E E
2q Þ
9. (a) In non-uniform electric field, intensity is more, where E 2E 2E
the lines are more denser. E
2E
10. (b) According to the question,
2q q
mg Enet = 0
eE = mg Þ E =
e
11. (b) Because E points along the tangent to the lines of force. 15. (b) D C
If initial velocity is zero, then due to the force, it always EA
moves in the direction of E. Hence will always move
on some lines of force. EB ED
O
12. (b) The field produced by charge - 3Q at A , this is E as EC
mentioned in the example.
A B
3Q
\ E = 2 (along AB directed towards negative
x
Þ D C
A B
charge) Q –3Q
x
Now field at location of -3Q i.e. field at B due to 2E 2E
Q E Enet
charge Q will be E ' = 2 = (along AB directed B
x 3 A
away from positive charge)
13. (c) The electric field is due to all charges present whether E A = E, E B = 2 E , EC = 3E, ED = 4 E
inside or outside the given surface.
14. (b) ur s $ 2s $ s $ 2s $
q 16. (b) E =- k- k- k =- k
q 2e 0 2e 0 2e0 e0
E 17. (b)
E
E
q q Þ Enet = 0
E E
E q1
q q
18. (c) According to Gauss law Ñò E.ds =
e0
q –q Ñò ds = 2prl; (E is constant)
E 2E q1 q 1
E 120° \ E. 2prl = ÞE= i.e. E µ
q q Þ e0 2pe0 r r
E E E 2E
E 2E
q –q æ 3Q ö
Enet = 2 E 19. (c) Let sphere has uniform chare density r ç ÷ and E
è 4pR 3 ø
is the electric field at distance x from the centre of the
sphere.
EBD_7156
90 DPP/ P 32
Applying Gauss law, 26. (a) According to Gauss law
uur uur
E.4p x2 =
q
e0
=
rV¢
e0
=
r 4 3
´ px
e0 3
Ñò s
E.dS = 4pr 2 E (r )
x
r
(V = Volume of dotted sphere)
ò 4pr r (r) dr
2
R
r = 0
\ E = 3e x Þ E = µ x Î0
0
r
20. (b) T sin q = qE
ò0 r
2
4pA ( R - r )dr
and T cos q = mg + Þ 2
4 p r E (r ) =
+ Î0
qE + q
Þ tan q = +
mg + T T cos q
+ 4pA æ r 3 R r 4 ö
= ç - ÷
q æ s ö +
T sin q
qE Î0 çè 3 4 ÷ø
= ç ÷
mg è 2e0 ø mg
Þ s µ tan q. A æ rR r 2 ö
Hence, E (r ) = ç - ÷ , for 0 < r < R
Î0 çè 3 4 ÷ø
Q
21. (d) Next flux through the cube fnet = ; so flux through
e0 3Q
But A =
q pR 4
one face fface =
6e 0
3Q é 1 æ r ö 1 æ r ö ù
2
22. (d). For A : Power consumed P = I2R \ We get, E (r ) = ê ç ÷ - ç ÷ ú
Î0 R 2 êë 3 è R ø 4 è R ø úû
q
But e = f , 27. (b) The electric field outside the sphere is given by :
0
dq kQ
q = a e0 t 2 Þ I = = 2a e 0 t Þ P = 4a 2 e 02 Rt 2 E (r ) = , for r ³ R
so r2
dt
For B : Assuming initial charge in reservoir be q0 then 28. (c) If electric lines of forces cross each other, then the
electric flux through a closed electric field at the point of intersection will have two
direction simultaneously which is not possible
q 0 - ae 0 t 2
Spherical surface around S2 will be fS2 = physically.
e0 29. (c) Electric field at the nearby point will be resultant of
dfS2 existing field and field due to the charge brought. It
For C : = -2at may increase or decrease if the charge is positive or
dt
negative depending on the position of the point with
23. (c). The time period will change only when the additional
respect to the charge brought.
electrostatic force has a component along the direction
of the displacement, which is always perpendicular 30. ()
to the string.
24. ()
25. (b) Net charge inside the sphere = òsphere r dV

Due to spherical symmetry, we get
R R
ò0 4pr r(r )dr ò0 r
2 2
Q= = 4pA ( R - r ) dr
æ R4 R4 ö
= 4pA ç - ÷
ç 3 4 ÷ø
è
3Q
\ A=
pR 4
DPP/ P 33 91
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 33
1. (c) ABCDE is an equipotential surface, on equipotential 9. (b) Potential at A= Potential due to (+q) charge
surface no work is done in shifting a charge from one + Potential due to (– q) charge
place to another.
1 q 1 (-q)
2. (c) Potential at centre O of the square = . + =0
4pe0 a2 + b 2 4pe0 a 2 + b2
Q Q
10. (c) Point P will lie near the charge which is smaller in
a magnitude i.e. -6mC . Hence potential at P
a 2
O
P -6mC 12mC
Q Q
x 20 cm
æ Q ö 1 (-6 ´ 10-6 ) 1 (12 ´ 10-6 )

V0 = ç
ç 4pe (a / 2) ÷÷ V= + = 0 Þ x = 0.2 m
è 0 ø 4pe0 x 4pe0 (0.2 + x)
Work done in shifting (– Q ) charge from centre to
infinity
11. (a) Work done W = q -6 (V A - VB ); where
W = -Q(V¥ - V0 ) = QV0
q = 3 ´10-6 coulomb where
4 2Q 2Q 2
= Q. =
4pe0a pe 0a é (-5 ´10-6 ) 2 ´10-6 ù 1
3. (b) Using VA = 1010 ê + 6
ú = ´10 volt
-2 -2
êë 15 ´ 10 5 ´ 10 úû 15
2QV v QA q 1
v= Þvµ Q Þ A = = = -6 -6
é ù
M vB QB 4q 2 and V B = 1 0 1 0 ê ( 2 ´ 1 0 ) - 5 ´ 1 0 ú
-2
4. (a) Work done in moving a charge from P to L , P to M êë 1 5 ´ 1 0 5 ´ 10 -2 úû
and P to N is zero while it is q (VP – Vk) > 0 for motion
13
from P to k. =– ´ 106 volt
15
5. (a) KE = q(V1 - V2 ) = 2 ´ (70 - 50) W = 40 eV
é1 æ 13 öù
6. (a) The electric potential V ( x, y , z ) = 4 x 2 volt \ W = 3 ´ 10-6 ê ´ 106 - ç ´ 106 ÷ ú
ë15 è 15 øû
ur æ ¶V $ ¶V $ ¶V ö
Now E = - ç $i +j +k ÷ = 2.8 J
è ¶x ¶y ¶z ø
12. (c)
¶V ¶V A p
¶V
Now ¶x = 8 x, ¶y = 0 and =0 +q
¶z
ur
Hence E = -8$i, so at point (1m, 0, 2m) l l
p net
ur
E = -8 xi$ volt/meter or 8 along negative X - axis.
7. (b) Electric fields due to electrons on same line passing 60°
B C
through centre cancel each other while electric potential +q l – 2q
due to each electron is negative at centre C. Therefore, p
ur
at centre E = 0,V ± 0
ur r Pnet = p 2 + p 2 + 2 pp cos 60o = 3 p = 3 ql (\ p = ql )
8. (a) By using W = Q( E.Dr )
Þ W = Q[(e1$i + e2 $j + e3 k$ ).(ai$ + b $j )] = Q( e1a + e2b )

EBD_7156
92 DPP/ P 33
13. (d) According to figure, potential at A and C are both 18. (b) W = q(V02 - V01 )
equal to kQ. Hence work done in moving -q charge
Q1 Q2
from A to C = - q (VA - VC ) = 0 where V01 = +
4pe 0 R 4pe0 R 2
A Q2 Q1
and V02 = +
–q 4pe 0 R 4pe0 R 2
l l q(Q2 - Q1 ) ( 2 - 1)
Þ W = q(V02 - V01 ) =
4pe0 R 2
B C 19. (d) V = q é 1 1 ù q é1 1 1 ù
+Q l 4pe0 x0 ê1 + 3 + 5 + ...ú - 4pe x ê 2 + 4 + 6 + ...ú
ë û 0 0 ë û
q é 1 1 1 ù q
(+1.6 ´ 10-19 ) = 1 - + - + ...ú = loge 2
14. (c) Q
V = k ´ = 9 ´ 109 ´ = 27.2V 4pe0 x0 êë 2 3 4 û 4pe 0 x0
r 0.53 ´ 10-10
20. (b) Potential decreases in the direction of electric field.
15. (c) Potential will be zero at two points Dotted lines are equipotential surfaces
\V A = VC and VA > VB
q1 = 2mC q 2 = -1mC
M N y
O C
x=0 x=4 x=6 x = 12
l l' A B
6
At internal point (M) :
E
1 é 2 ´ 10-6 (-1´10-6 ) ù
´ê + ú =0
4pe 0 êë (6 - l ) l úû kp -3
21. (d) Eequatorial =
3
i.e.E µ p and E µ r
r
Þl =2
22. (a) Suppose neutral point N lies at a distance x from dipole
So distance of M from origin;
of moment p or at a distance x2 from dipole of 64 p.
x =6-2 = 4
At exterior point (N): ® ®
p 64 p
N
é 2 ´10-6 (-1´10-6 ) ù 1 2
1
´ê + ú =0 x1
4pe0 ëê (6 - l ') l¢ ûú p
25 cm
Þl'=6 At N |E.F. due to dipole 1 | = |E.F. due to dipole 2 |
So distance of N from origin, x = 6 + 6 = 12
1 2p 1 2 ( 64 p )
16. (a) V = VAB + VBC + VCD . .
Þ = 4 pe0 ( 25 - x )3
4pe0 x 3
k .5Q0 k .(-2Q0 ) k .(3Q0 )
= + +
R R R 1 64
Þ = Þ x = 5 cm.
=
6 kQ0 x 3 ( 25 - x )3
R
æ 120 ö
(a). BC = 2R sin ç = 3R
è 2 ÷ø
3Q0 23.
=
2p Î0 R
1 æ 2q / 3 ö q
Electric field at O = ç ÷ =
9 p 4pe 0 R è R ø 6pe 0 R 2
2
17. (a) V = 9 ´10 . 2
r along negative X-axis.
(1.6 ´10-19 ) ´1.28 ´ 10 -10
= 9 ´109 ´ = 0.13V
(12 ´ 10-10 )2
DPP/ P 33 93
B
q/3 F–
30° F
Net force F :
C 120° 60° x
–2q/3 O F+
60° 60°
60° 30°
Net torque immediately after it is released Þ clockwise
A A body cannot exert force on itself.
q/3 28. (d) When the bird perches on a single high power line, no
current passes through its body because its body is at
equipotential surface i.e., there is no potential
The potential energy of the system is non zero
difference. While when man touches the same line,
Force between B & C
standing bare foot on ground the electrical circuit is
1 (q / 3) ( -2q / 3) q2 completed through the ground. The hands of man are
= =
4 pe0 ( 3R) 2 54pe 0 R 2 at high potential and his feet’s are at low potential.
Hence large amount of current flows through the body
1 æ q q 2q ö of the man and person therefore gets a fatal shock.
+ - =0
4pe 0 çè 3 3 3 ÷ø
Potential at O = 29. (a) Electron has negative charge, in electric field negative
charge moves from lower potential to higher potential.
24. (d) The given graph is of charged conducting sphere of 30. (b) Potential is constant on the surface of a sphere so it
radius R0. The whole charge q distributes on the sur- behaves as an equipotential surface. Free charges
face of sphere (electrons) are available in conductor. The two
25 (b), 26 (b), 27 c statements are independent.
F+
+
–
F–
(F+ > F– as E+ > E–)

EBD_7156
94 DPP/ P 34
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 34
1. (b) Net electrostatic energy
10 ´10-6 ´10 ´10-6 10 ´10-6 ´10 ´10-6 ù
kQq kq 2
kQq + + ú
U= + + =0 10/100 10/100 úû
a a a 2
100 ´10-12 ´100
kq æ Q ö 2q = 3 ´ 9 ´109 ´ = 27 J
Þ çQ + q + ÷=0ÞQ=- 10
a è 2ø 2+ 2
1 ( q )( -2q ) 1 (-2q )( q ) 1 ( q )( q )
2. (c) Electric field is perpendicular to the equipotential 7. (c) U System = 4 pe a
+
4pe0 a
+
4 pe0 2a
surface and is zero every where inside the metal. 0
kq q 7q2
3. (c) Þ ( Q + q + Q ) = 0 Þ Q = - net potential energy U System = -
8pe0a
l 2
ur ur
1 q2 8. (c) In the given condition angle between p and E is zero.
U net = 3´ .
4pe0 l Hence potential energy U = - pE cos 0 = - pE = min.
4. (d) Length of the diagonal of a cube having each side b is Also in uniform electric field Fnet = 0
3b. So distance of centre of cube from each vertex is 1 (-e)(-e)
9. (b) U = As r decreases then U
4p Î0 r2
3b
. increases and sign of U is '+ve' so, U increases.
2
é 1 1 1 1 ù
Hence potential energy of the given system of charge is 10. (c) U = 2kq 2 ê - + - + + .....ú
ë a 2a 3a 4a û
ì 1 ( -q )( q ) ü -4q2
U = 8´ í . ý= 2q 2 é 1 1 1 .....ù
î 4pe0 3b / 2 þ 3pe0b =- 1- + - + ú
4pe0a êë 2 3 4 û
5. (a) Change in potential energy ( D U ) = U f - U i
2q 2 loge 2
q3 =-
4pe0 a
11. (b) The initial energy of the system
q
40 cm
50 cm
q2
q1
D
q q
30 cm 10 cm a
40 cm 1 q2
Ui= =U
1 éæ q1q3 q2 q3 ö æ q1q3 q2 q3 ö ù 4pe 0 a
ÞVU = ê + - + ú The final energy of the system
4 pe0 ëçè 0.4 0.1 ÷ø çè 0.4 0.5 ÷ø û
1 é q2 q2 q2 ù
1 q Uf = ê + + ú = 3U
ÞVU = [8q2 q3 ] = 3 (8q2 ) 4pe0 êë a a a úû
4pe 0 4pe0 Thus work done, W = Uf– Ui = 3U – U = 2U
\ k = 8q2 kq1q2
12. (d) U =
1 q1q2 r
6. (c) For pair of charge U = . kQ
4pe0 r 13. (c) As potential at A and B is same, VA = VB = . So,
d
1 é 10 ´ 10-610 ´ 10-6 work done in both cases will be same.
U System = ê
4 pe0 êë 10 /100 kq q
14. (b) U = e 1 2 . There will be 6 pairs, 4 on a side of square
r
and 2 as diagonal.
DPP/ P 34 95
15. (c) Apply conservation of mechanical energy between 23. (b) Force = eE
point a and b : (K.E. + P.E.)a = (K.E. + P.E.)a Work done = force × distance
Force and distance are in opposite direction, so work
k (3 ´ 10 -9 )q0 k (3 ´ 10 -9 ) q0 is negative.
Þ 0+ -
0.01 0.02 W = – eE × d
Here, distance increases so, potential energy increases.
1 2 k (3 ´ 10-9 )q0 k (3 ´ 10-9 )q0 24. (d) Under electrostatic condition, all points lying on the
= mv + -
2 0.02 0.01 conductor are in same potential. Therefore, potential
at A = potential at B.
Put the values we get : v = 12 15 = 46 m/s
From Gauss's theorem, total flux through the surface
kqQ kqQ kq 2 of the cavity will be q / ε 0 .
16. (b) U = - - + = 0 Þ Q / q = 1/ 4
r r 2r Note : Instead of an elliptical cavity, if it would and
17. (b) Find potential at A and C due to charge at B, then been a spherical cavity then options (a) and (b) were
required work done is W = q (VA – VC)
also correct.
18. (d) It depends whether both charges are of same or opposite
25. (b) q1 + q2 = 0
sign. q2
19. (a) Because work is to be done by an external agent in
moving a positive charge from low potential to high Q
C
potential and this work gets stored in the form of q1
potential energy of the system. Hence, it increases. B
æ 3 3 1 ö A
20. (a) U = kq 2 ç - + - ÷
è d 2d 3d ø
æ 2 3 1 ö æ 2 2 1 ö
+ kq 2 ç - + - ÷ + kq 2 ç - + - ÷
è d 2d 3d ø è d 2d 3d ø
æ 1 2 1 ö æ 2 1 ö kq1 kQ kq2
+ kq 2 ç - + - + kq 2 ç - + VA = + +
÷ ÷ R 2 R 4R
è d 2d 3d ø è d 2d ø
kq kQ kq2
æ 1 2 ö 2æ 1 ö VC = 1 + +
+ kq 2 ç - + ÷ + kq ç - d ÷ 4 R 4 R 4R
è d 2 d ø è ø VA = VC
æ 12 12 4 ö \ q1 = – Q/3 and q2 = Q/3
U = kq 2 ç - + - ÷
26. (b) VA = k éê
d –Q Q Q ù Q
è 2 d 3d ø + + ú =
ë 3R 2R 12R û 16 pe0 R
12kq 2 æ 1 1 ö
=- ç 1- + ÷ é –Q Q Q ù 5Q
d è 2 3 3ø 27. (c) VB = k ê + + ú =
ë 6 R 2 R 12 R û 48pe0 R
kQ 1 1 e0 k 2Q 2 28. (a) Inside electric field is zero but not outside.
21. (c) V = Þ u = e0 E 2 = 29. (c) Earth also has some surface charge density due to which
r 2 2 r4
it produces electric field in the surrounding space.
V4 µu 30. (d) Net potential at centre
22. q 4 B kq kq kq kq
+ - + - =0
A a/ 2 a/ 2 a/ 2 a/ 2
and field is zero due to symmetry.
C +q –q
a
kq 9 ´ 109 ´ 1 ´ 10 -6
AC = 5m, V = = a a
AC 5
= 1.8 × 103 = 1.8 kV
VB = (VB)due to q + (VB)i, where (VB)i = Potential at B a
due to induced charge –q +q
If electric potential at a point is zero then the magnitude
kq of electric field at that point is not necessarily to be
\ 1.8 × 103 = + (VB )i
AB zero.
Þ 1.8 × 103 = 2.25 × 103 + (VB)i
Þ (VB)i = – 0.45 kV
EBD_7156
96 DPP/ P 35
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 35
1. (a) By using
V
across A is V and potential difference across B is
V = V0 e -t / CR Þ 40 = 50e -1/ CR Þ e -1/ CR = 4 / 5 3
Potential difference after 2 sec hence energy of the system now is
2 2
æ4ö 1 1 æV ö 10
V ' = V0 e-2 / CR = 50(e-1/ CR )2 = 50 ç ÷ = 32V U 2 = (3C )V 2 + (3C ) ç ÷ = CV 2 ......(ii)
è5ø 2 2 è3ø 6
Fraction of energy after 1 sec
U1 3
So, =
1 U2 5
C (V f ) 2 2
æ 40 ö 16
= 2 =ç ÷ = 4. (c) Plane conducting surfaces facing each other must have
1 è 50 ø 25
C (Vi ) 2 equal and opposite charge densities. Here as the plate
2
areas are equal, Q2 = -Q3 .
2. (c) The given circuit can be redrawn as follows. All
The charge on a capacitor means the charge on the
capacitors are identical and each having capacitance
inner surface of the positive plate (here it is Q2 )
e A
C= 0 Potential difference between the plates
d
charge Q 2Q
= = 2 = 2
1 2 capacitance C 2C
3 2 Q - ( -Q2 ) Q2 - Q3
= 2 =
2C 2C
4
5. (b) While drawing the dielectric plate outside, the
5 4 capacitance decreases till the entire plate comes out
and then becomes constant. So, V increases and then
becomes constant.
6. (b) Given circuit can be reduced as follows
+ – 3C 3C
V
A B
| Charge on each capacitor | = | Charge on each plate | ( C = capacitance of each capacitor)
e A The capacitor 3C ,3C shown in figure can with stand
= 0 V
d maximum 200 V .
Plate 1 is connected with positive terminal of battery \ So maximum voltage that can be applied across
e0 A A and B equally shared. Hence maximum voltage applied
so charge on it will be + .V cross A and B be equally shared. Hence Maz. voltage
d
applied across A and B will be (200 + 200) = 400 volt.
Plate 4 comes twice and it is connected with negative 7. (c) Common potential
terminal of battery, so charge on plate 4 will be
C V + C2 ´ 0 C1
2e 0 A V'= 1 = .V
- V C1 + C2 C1 + C2
d
3. (c) Initially potential difference across both the capacitor C1V1 - C2V2 6 ´ 12 - 3 ´ 12
is same hence energy of the system is 8. (b) V = = = 4 volt
C1 + C2 3+ 6
1 1
U1 = CV 2 + CV 2 = CV 2 .....(i) A
2 2 K1e0
2 = K1e0 A
In the second case when key K is opened and dielectric 9. (d) C1 =
medium is filled between the plates, capacitance of both æd ö d
ç ÷
the capacitors becomes 3C, while potential difference è2ø
DPP/ P 35 97
13. (d) In the given system, no current will flow through the
A
K 2 e0 branch CD so it can be removed
C2 = 2 = K 2e0 A
æd ö d C
ç ÷ 5µF
è2ø
10µF 10µF
K 3e 0 A K 3 e 0 A
and C3 = =
2d 2d
A B
C1C2 æK KK ö e A
Now, Ceq = C3 + = ç 3 + 1 2 ÷. 0
C1 + C2 è 2 K1 + K 2 ø d 10µF 10µF
5µF
10. (b) Given circuit is a balanced Wheatstone bridge.
D
11. (a) P
Effective capacitance of the system = 5 + 5 = 10mF
2C 2C 14. (c) Volume of 8 small drops = Volume of big drop
4 4
2C 8 ´ pr 3 = pR 3 Þ R = 2r
3 3
C
C C As capacity is proportional to r , hence capacity
becomes 2 times.
Q 15. (c) Potential difference between the plates
C + C = 2C
V = Vair + Vmedium
P s s
= ´ (d - t ) + ´t
e0 K e0 + –
2C 2C + –
s t + –
ÞV = (d - t + ) + –
2C e0 K A K
Þ + –
C + –
2C Q t + –
= (d - t + )
Ae 0 K
Q
Hence capacitance t
2C/ 2 = C
Q Q
C= =
P V Q t
(d - t + )
Ae0 K
2C 2C
e0 A e0 A
Þ = =
t æ 1ö
C C (d - t + ) d - t ç1 - ÷
K è Kø
Q e0 A K e0 A
16. (b) C = = 1 pF and C ' = = 2 pF \ K = 4
C + C = 2C d 2d
17. (a) Potential difference across the condenser
P
s s
V = V1 + V2 = E1t1 + E2 t2 = t1 + t2
2C
K1e0 K 2e0
2C s æ t1 t ö Q æ t1 t ö
Þ Þ CPQ = 3C ÞV = ç + 2 ÷= ç + 2 ÷
2C
e0 è K1 K 2 ø Ae 0 è K1 K 2 ø
18. (d) When the battery is disconnected, the charge will
remain same in any case.
Q
Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is given by
12. (d) The two capacitors formed by the slabs may assumed e0 A
to be in series combination. C=
d
EBD_7156
98 DPP/ P 35
When d is increased, capacitance will decreases and 23. (a) Electric field between the plates of a parallel plate
because the charge remains the same, so according to s Q
capacitor E = = i.e E µ d 0
q = CV , the voltage will increase. Hence the e Ae0
electrostatics energy stored in the capacitor will
increase. e0 A
19. (c) 24. (a) Capacitance of parallel plate condenser =
s –s d
25. (a)
A. .B .C C1 C2+C3
s s V
EA = - =0
2e0 2e0
EC = 0,
s s s V (C2 + C3 )
EB = + = . VC1 =
2e0 2e0 e0 C1 + (C2 + C3 )
V V0 / k V0 Initially C3 = 0
20. (b) E = = =
d d kd VC2
So VC1 = =6 ........... (1)
( 3 + 3) ´ (1 + 1) C1 + C2
6´ 2 ö
21. (c) Ceq = + 1 = æç ÷ +1 =
5
mF
( ) ( )
3 + 3 + 1 + 1 è 6+ 2ø 2 Now, at VC1 = 10, C3 = ¥
5 V (C2 + C3 )
\ Q = C ´ V= ´ 100 = 250 mC Þ 10 =
2 C1 + (C2 + C3 )
æ 6´ 2 ö
Change in 6 mF branch – VC = ç ÷100 = 150 mC Þ 10 =
V
Þ 10 = V .......... (2)
è 6+ 2ø
æ C1 ö
B çè C + C + 1÷ø
2 3
Eq. (1) and (2),

6mF 2mF
10 æC ö
= 6 Þ 5 = 3 ç 1 + 1÷
æ C1 ö è C2 ø
1mF
çè C + 1÷ø
2
C1 5 2
Þ = -1 =
C2 3 3
A C
100 V 10 (C2 + C3 )
26. (b) Now, VC1 = =8
150 (C1 + C2 + C3 )
VAB = = 25 V and VBC = 100 – VAB = 75 V
6
æC C ö
22. (c) Capacitance will be increased when a dielectric is 10 ç 2 + 3 ÷
è C1 C1 ø
introduced in the capacitor but potential difference will Þ = 8 Þ C = 2.5C
remain the same because battery is still connected. So æ C2 C3 ö 3 1
çè1 + C + C ÷ø
according to q = CV, charge will increase i.e. Q > Q0 1 1
and 1 1 1
27. (c) + » (where C3 ® ¥ )
C3 + C2 C1 C1
1 1
U= QV0 , U0 = Q0 V0 Þ Q > Q0 so U > U 0
2 2 \ Total energy = energy in C1
\ Required ratio = 1
DPP/ P 35 99
28. (b) The electric field due to one charged plate at the 30. (b) By the formula capacitance of a capacitor
s KA K
location of the other is E = and the force per unit C1 = e0 ´ µ
2e 0 d d
C1 K1 d 2 K d /2 1
s2 Hence, = ´ = 1´ =
area is F = sE = . C2 d1 K 2 K 2 3K 6
2e0
or C2 = 6C1
29. (d) A charged capacitor, after removing the battery, does
not discharge itself. If this capacitor is touched by Q
Again for capacity of a capacitor C =
someone, he may feel shock due to large charge still V
present on the capacitor. Hence it should be handled Therefore, capacity of a capacitor does not depend
cautiously otherwise this may cause a severe shock. upon the nature of the material of the capacitor.
EBD_7156
100 DPP/ P 36
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 36
6. (a). The circuit is equivalent to Fig. It is a balanced
1. (b). The current in 1W resistance is 3A. The current in 3W wheatstone bridge between abcd, and then in parallel (2R)
resistance is resistances. Thus ignoring resistance between bd arm. The
R2 6 circuit is equivalent to three (2R) resistances in parallel
I1 = I = × 3 = 2A. (abc, adc, aRRc).
R1 + R 2 3+ 6
b
2
Therefore the ratio is .
3 R
a c
(R1 + R 2 ) 1 · ·
2. (d). R = + [(R1 + R2)2 + 4 R3
2 2 R
(R1 + R2)]1/2 .....(a)
R1 = 1W, R2 = 0. R3 = 2W. ......(b) d
From eqs. (a) and (b)
1 1 R R
1
R= + [1 + 4 × 2 × 1]1/2 = [1 + 3] = 2W.
2 2 2
1 1 1 1 3
3. (b). Since Q is connected in parallel the net resistance i.e. = + + =
becomes R/2, so the current I = 2V/R, double the value. R eq 2R 2R 2R 2R
4. (b). Since there is no current in edcb part, the p.d. across
be should be 2V. Let current in 500 W is I, then same current 2
Þ Req = R
flows through X (think). Therefore, for loop abefa, 3
12 = I (500) + IX 7. (c).
or 12 = I (500) + 2 (\ IX = 2 volt) b
Thus I = (1/50) A or from IX = 2,
X = 2 × 50 = 100 W. r r
5. (b). Let l1 be the initial length of the wire. Then the new a c
length will be A · r · B
110 11 r r
l2 = l = l
100 1 10 1
Since, the volume remains constant d
11 Imagine, A being pulled on the left side, then abcd becomes

A1l1 = A2l2 or A1 /A2 = l2/l1 = a balanced wheatstone bridge Fig. The arm bd can be
10
(where A1 and A2 are initial and final area of cross–section ignored. Then resistance between A, B becomes = r.
of the wire). 1 1 1 1
If R1 and R2 are the initial and final resistances, then
i.e. = + = Þ Req = r
R eq 2r 2r r
2
R1 l1 A 2 10 10 æ 10 ö 8. (d) R = 91´ 102 » 9.1 kW.
= = ´ =ç ÷
R 2 l 2 A1 11 11 è 11 ø
9. (d) Spacific resistance doesn't depend upon length and area.
2
R 2 æ 11ö
or =ç ÷ 10. (b). The diagram can be redrawn as shown in fig.
R1 è 10 ø
Now, percentage change in resistance is
DR æ R 2 - R1 ö
R1 × 100 = çè R ÷ø × 100
1
éæ 11 ö 2 ù
= êçè 10 ÷ø - 1ú × 100 = 21%
êë úû
DPP/ P 36 101
3W
2´ R
12. (c). R= 2+2 + Þ 2R + R2 = 8 + 4R + 2R
2+R
2W 4W
X A C B Y 4 ± 16 + 32 2 ± 2 3
Þ R2 – 4R – 8 = 0 Þ R = =
2
4W 8W R cannot be negative, hence R = 2 ± 2 3 = 5.46 W
6W
V2
13. (c). P = . If resistance of heater coil is R, then resistance
+ – R
2V
3W R
The effective resistance RAC between A and C of parallel combination of two halves will be
4
1 1 1 3 3
= + = P1 P2
R AC 2 4 4 \RAC = 4 ohm So = =
R/4 1
=
P2 P1 R 4
The effective resistance RCB between C and B
1 1 3 8 60 ´ 8 ´ 301
RCB = + = \RCB = ohm. 14. (c). Total kWh consumed = = 14.4
4 8 8 3 1000
Hence cost = 14.4 ´ 1.25 = ` 18
4 8
Now, RACB = RAC + RCB = + = 4ohm.
3 3 15. (d). Since all bulbs are identical they have the same
Corresponding to points X and Y, the resistances 3 ohm, 4 resistances. The current I flowing through 1 branches at
ohm and 6 ohm are in parallel, hence effective resistance A. So current in 2 and 3, as well as in 4 will be less than I.
RXY is The current through 5 is also I. Thus 1 and 5 glow equally
brightly and more than 2, 3 or 4.
1 1 1 1 4+3+ 2 9
= + + = = 16. (b). Let R1 and R2 be the resistances of the coils, V the
R XY 3 4 6 12 12 supply voltage, Q the heat required to boil the water.
12 4 Heat produced by first coil of resistance R1 in time t1
\ RXY = = ohm.
9 3 V 2 t1 V 2 ´ 6 ´ 60
(= 6 min) = Q = = cal ......(a)
4 2 JR1 4.2R1
Total resistance R of the circuit = + = 2W.
3 3 Heat produced in second coil of resistance R2 in time
t2 (= 8 min)
2
Current in the circuit = =1A
2 V 2 t1 V 2 ´ 6 ´ 60
=Q= = .....(b)
Power dissipated in the circuit = i2 R = 1 × 2 = 2 watts JR 2 4.2R 2
Potential difference between X and
Equating (a) and (b), we get
4 4
Y = i × RXY = 1 × = V.. 6 8 R
3 3 = i.e. 2 = 8 = 4
R2 R2 R1 6 3
4
\ Potential difference across 3 ohm resistor = V.. 4
3 or R2 = R .....(c)
3 1
4/3 4 (i) When the two heating coils are in series, the effective
Current in 3 ohm resistor = = = 0.44 amp.
3 9 resistance is
( 30 + 30 ) 30 60 ´ 30 4 7
11. (c). Requivalent = 30 + 30 + 30 = = 20 W R' = R1 + R2 = R1 + .R = R .
( ) 90 3 1 3 1
with two coils in series, let the kettle take t' time to boil.
V 2 1
\ i= = = ampere V2 t ' V2 t '
R 20 10 Q= = .....(d)
JR ' æ7 ö
4.2 ´ ç R1 ÷
è3 ø
EBD_7156
102 DPP/ P 36
t'
Comparing (a) and (d), we get = 6 × 60
(7 / 3)
24V
7 21V
or t' = × 6 × 60 sec = 14 min.
3
(ii) When the two heating coils are in parallel, the effective
resistance is,
3V
æ4 ö
R1 ç R1 ÷
R1 R 2 è3 ø 4
R ¢¢ = = = R1
R1 + R 2 æ4 ö 7
R1 + ç R1 ÷
è3 ø 22
P1 v2 R L æv ö æ 9ö
= 1 Þç 1÷ =ç ÷ =9
In parallel arrangement of heating coils, let t" be the time P2 R L v 22 è v2 ø è 3ø
taken by kettle to boil, so
Sol. (18-20).
V2t " V 2 t '' 12V
Q= = .....(5) I= = 2A
JR " æ4 ö (1 + 5) W
4.2 ´ ç R1 ÷
è7 ø
1W 12 V
Comparing (a) and (5), we get
t" 4
= 6 × 60 or t" = × 6 × 60 sec = 3.43 min.
(4 / 7) 7
17. (c).
7.5amp
24V 5W
v 15V 2kW é 1.5 ´ 6 ù
I= R ê R p = 7.5 ú Þ Rate of chemical energy conversion = EI = 12 × 2 = 24 W
eq ë û and P (in battery) = I 2 r = 4 W
Also, P (in resistor) = I 2 r = 20 W
18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
9V 1.2kW
21. (d) Resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with the
temperature. The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate with
larger amplitudes at higher temperatures thereby
increasing it's conductivity not resistivity.
240 60 22. (d) It is quite clear that in a battery circuit, the point of
I= Þ = 7.5mA lowest potential is the negative terminal of the battery
32 8
and the current flows from higher potential to lower
(1) Currrent I is 7.5mA potential.
(2) Voltage drop across RL is 9 volt 23. (b) The temperature co-efficient of resistance for metal is
positive and that for semiconductor is negative.
P1 v12 R 2 225 ´ 6 In metals free electrons (negative charge) are charge
(3) P = R 2
Þ
2 ´ 81
= 16.66
carriers while in p-type semiconductors, holes (positive
2 1 v2
charge) are majority charge carriers.
(4) After intercharging the two resistor R1 and R2
v 24
I= = ´ 7 = 3.5mA
R eq (48)
DPP/ P 37 105
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 37
(1) (d). Let R is resistance of the voltmeter. The effective
V 25
resistance across points A, B is (7) (a). \ i = = A
R 1000
60 ´ R Let R' be the required resistance to be connected in
r= ..............(1)
60 + R series with voltmeter.
The current in the circuit is I = 12/(50 + r)
V'
The p.d. across AB points is V = Ir So i =
R+R'
12
or 6 = ×r or 50 + r = 2r 25
50 + r Here V' = 250, R = 1000 W and i = A
or r = 50 W ..............(2) 1000
using it in (1), 25 250
\ = Þ R' = 9000 W.
60 1000 1000 + R '
we get 50 =
60 + R (8) (d). The potential difference between A and B in the absence
300 + 5R = 6R of voltmeter = 2 volt.
K
or R = 300 W + – ()
VAB
G G G 4V
R1 R2
(2) (c). S = = = W B
n - 1 100 - 1 99 A 4kW
4kW
ig 10
(3) (b). S = G= × 99 = 111W
i - ig 100 - 10
4kW
80 ´ 80 V
(4) (c). R = 20 + = 60W RV
80 + 80
V 2 1
i= = = amp. Current flowing in the circuit
R 60 30
E E
1 I= =
\ V = iR' = × 40 = 1.33 volt. RR R2 + R '
30 R2 + 1 V
R1 + R V
(5) (a). According to Kirchhoff's first law
At junection A, iAB = 2 + 2 = 4A
At junection B, iAB = iBC – 1 = 3A 4 2
I= = ampere
4´4 3
2A 4+
1A 4+4
1.3 A Potential difference measured by voltmeter
A B
C 2 4
2A V'AB = IR' = ×2=
i 3 3
At junection C, i = iBC – 1.3 = 3 – 1.3 = 17 amp Error in the reading of voltmeter
(6) (b). The current required for a full-scale deflection of the
4 2
galvanometer is = VAB – V'AB = 2 – = volt
i = 4.0 x 10-4 x 25 = 10-2 A 3 3
Let a resistance R W is to be connected in series 2
The error in voltmeter reading for 2 volt p.d. = volt
V 3
Then by the ohm's law, we have i =
G+R The error in voltmeter reading for 1 volt p.d.
Here G = 50 W, V = 2.5 V and i = 10-2 A 2 1 1
´ = volt
=
V 2.5 3 2 3
\ G+R= = -2 = 250
i 10 the error in voltmeter reading for 100 volt p.d.
Þ R = 250 – G = 250 – 50 = 200W. 100
= = 33.3% volt
3
EBD_7156
106 DPP/ P 37
(9) (d). E = V + I r = I R + I r 13. (b) Cells area joined in parallel when internal resistance is
Þ E = 0.25 x 10 + 0.25 × r higher then a external resistance. (R << r)
In second stage
E
Þ E = 0.5 × 4 + 0.5 r i=
r
Subtracting eq. (b) from eq. (a) R+
n
2.5 + 0.25 r – 2.0 – 0.5 r = 0
0.5 = 0.25 r E
14. (b). Current in the ammeter I =
0.5 é R 'ù
R '+ r ê1 + ú
r= = 2W. ë Rû
0.25
(10) (d) Suppose current through different paths of the circuit On increasing the value of R, the denominator will
is as follows. decrease and consequently the value of I will increase.
15. (a)
28 W 54 W I/6
I/3
I I/6
1 6V 2 I/3
I3 I/6 I/3
I/3 I/3
I/3
8V 12 V
I/6 I/3
After applying KVL for loop (1) and loop (2) I
I/6
1
We get 28i1 = – 6 – 8 Þ i1 = - A E
2
Let ABCDEFGH be skeleton cube formed of twelve
1 equal wires each of resistance R. Let a battery of e.m.f.
and 54i2 = – 6 – 12 Þ i2 = - A
3 E be connected across A and G. Let the total current
entering at the corner A and leaving the diagonally
5
Hence i3 = i1 + i2 = - A opposite corner G be I. By symmetry the distribution
6 of currents in wires of cube, according to Kirchoff's I st
law is shown in fig. ApplyingKirchoff's IInd law to mesh
5X + 2 × 10
(11) (d) VAB = 4 = Þ = 20 W ADCGEA, we get
X + 10
1 1 1
12. (b) The circuit can be simplified as follows – R– R– R+E=0
3 6 3
B C
30 W 5
i1 or E = IR ......(a)
i3 i3 6
A D If RAB is equivalent resistance between comers A and B,
40 W 40 V then from Ohm’s law comparing (a) and (b), we get
i2
F E 5
IRAB = IR
40 W 80 V 6
16. (d).
Applying KCL at junction A (y – z)
H
i3 = i1 + i2 ...(i) G
Applying Kirchoff's voltage law for the loop ABCDA y
I = x + 2y z (y – z)
– 30i1 – 40i3 + 40 = 0 A 2 (y–z)
Þ – 30i1 – 40(i1 + i2) + 40 = 0 y D
Þ 7i + 4i2 = 0 ...(ii) x z
Applying Kirchoff's voltage law for the loop ADEFA. E
(y – z)
– 40i2 – 40i3 + 80 + 4 = 0 y E F
Þ – 40i2 – 40(i1 + i2) = – 120
Þ i2 + 2i2 = 3 ...(iii) (y – z)
On solving equation (ii) and (iii) i1 = – 0.4 A. x + 2y B y C
DPP/ P 37 107
Let I = x + 2y current enter at point A, when a battery of The distribution of currents, keeping in mind symmetry
e.m.f. E and no internal resistance is connected across edge condition, is shown in fig.
AB. The edges AD and AH are symmetrically connected Let R (= 2W) be the resistance of each wire.
to A, therefore they will carry equal currents. The Applying Kirchoff's II law to mesh DGFC, we get
distribution of currents according to Kirchoff's Ist law is æ1 ö
shown in fig. çè - I1÷ø R + (I – 2I1)
2
If RAB is equivalent resistance, then from Ohm's law,
E = RAB I = RAB (x + 2y) ....(a) æ1 ö
and from Kirchoff's law applied to mesh containing AB R + çè - I1÷ø R – I1 R = 0
2
and cell E is
Rx=E .....(b) æ1 ö
(since R is resistance of each wire) or 2 çè - I1÷ø + (I – 2I1) – I1 = 0
2
Applying Kirchoff's II law to mesh AHEB
yR + zR + yR – xR = 0 or x – 2y – z = 0 .....(c) 2
or 2I – 5I1 = 0 or I1 = I ...... (b)
Applying Kirchoff's II law to mesh DGFC 5
nd
Applying Kirchoff's II law to external circuit AHEBE',
(y – z) R + 2 (y – z) R – zR = 0
or 4(y – z) –z = 0 or 4y = 5 z .....(d) we get
i.e. z = (4/5) y 1 1
.....(E) R + I1 R + R = E
2 2
Substituting this value in (c), we get
2
4 IR + IR = E' [Using (b)]
x – 2y – y = 0 5
5
7
14 5 or IR = E ......(c)
or y = x i.e. y = x 5
5 14 Comparing (a) and (c), wet get
Substituting value of y in (a), we get
7 7 7
æ 10 ö RAB I = IR i.e. RAB = R = × 2 = 2.8 W
E = RAB çè x + x÷ø 5 5 5
14 18. (c). In the first case I = E/(r + R) and in the second case
24 I' = E/(r + R/2) = 2E/(2r + R)
E = RAB x= R. x Using E = I(r + R), we get
14
æ 2r + 2R ö æ R ö
24 7 I' = I çè ÷ø = I çè 1 + ÷
RAB = R \ RAB = R. 2r + R 2r + R ø
14 12
17. (a). Thus the term in bracket is greater than 1 but less than
H (I/2-I1) 2. Thus 2I > I' > I
G 19. (b). Let R be the combined resistance of galvanometer and
I/2 an unknown resistance and r the internal resistance of
I I1 I/2-I1 I-2I1
A
each battery. When the batteries, each of e.m.f. E are
y D connected in series, the net e.m.f. = 2E and net internal
I1
resistance = 2r
E
E
I/2-I1 2E 2 ´ 15
F \ Current i1 = or 1.0 =
R + 2r R + 2r
I/2 I/2-I1 \ R + 2r = 3.0. ...(i)
· When the batteries are connected in parallel, the e.m.f.
I B I/2 C
remains E and net internal resistance becomes r/2. therefore
Let a battery of e.m.f. E is applied between points A and B. E 2E
Current i2 = =
Let a current I, enter through point A. r 2R + r
R+
If RAB is equivalent resistance between points A and B, 2
then from Ohm's law
RAB I = E 2E 2 ´ 15
\ 2R + r = = = 5.0 ...(i)
i2 0.6
Solving (i) and (ii), we get r = 1/3 W.
EBD_7156
108 DPP/ P 37
20. (a). The circuit with current distribution is shown in fig. 21. (a). After full charging, the steady current in the condenser
is zero, hence no current will flow in 4W resistance.
C
E 6 6
I= = = =1.5 A
i R+R' æ 2 ´ 3 ö 28 + 12
28 + ç
F è 2 + 3 ÷ø
G
100W Let current flowing in 2W resistance is I1
H
E i1 300W \ 2W and 3W resistance are connected in parallel
200W \ 2I1 = (1.5 – I1) x 3
D 5I1 = 4.5
i - i1
i I1 = 0.9 amp.
D
A B 24. (d). Ig
i G
110V
Applying Kirchoff's second law to the loop DEFGHID,
R
we have i1 × 100 – (i – i1) × 200 = 0
I–Ig
300 i1 – 200 i = 0 ......(1)
Now applying Kirchoff's second law to loop ADIHGCBA, For Ammeter IgG = (I – Ig) R
50 × 10–6 × 100 = 5 × 10–3 × (R) Þ R » 1W
we have. (i – i1) 200 + i × 300 = 110 For voltmeter Ig (R + G) = V
500i – 200 i1 = 110 .....(2) 50 mA (R + G) = 10V Þ R + G = 200 kW Þ R » 200kW
Solving eqs. (1) and (2), we get 25. (a) Potential at A = 6V
VA – VC = 4
3 1 Þ VC = 2V
i= amp and i1 = amp.
10 5 VAD VAC AD 4 2
26. (d) = = = = ;
VAB VAB AB 6 3
1
Current in 100 ohm resistance i1 = amp.
5 200
AD = cm.
3
1 27. (a) D is balance point, hence no current
Current in 200 ohm resistance i – i1 =
10 28. (a) Voltameter measures current indirectly in terms of mass
of ions deposited and electrochemical equivalent of
3
Current in 300 ohm resistance i = amp. æ mö
10 the substance çè I = ÷ø . Since value of m and Z are
Zt
Potential difference between A and C
measured to 3rd decimal place and 5th decimal place
= Potential difference across 100 ohm respectively. The relative error in the emasurement of
resistance current by voltmeter will be very small as compared to
or potential difference across 200 ohm resistance that when measured by ammeter directly.
29. (c) The e.m.f. of a dry cell is dependent upon the electrode
\ VA – VC = current × resistance
potential of cathode and anode which in turn is
1 dependent upon the reaction involved as well as
= i1 × 100 = × 100 = 20 volt. concentration of the electrolyte. It has nothing to do
5
with size of the cell.
Potential difference between C and B is given by So, statement-1 is false and statement-2 is true.
30. (d) V = E – ir = 4 – 2 × 2 = 0, During charging V > E.
3
VC – VB = i × 300 = × 300 = 90 volt.
10
108 DPP/ P 38
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 38
e R 9 ´ 18
1. (a) Potential gradient x = . RAB = = 6W
( R + Rh + r ) L 27
0.2 ´10-3 ir 0.1 ´ 10-7

(c) Potential gradient ( x) =
2 R = = 10-2 V / m
Þ = ´ Þ R = 4.9W. 10. -6
10-2 ( R + 490 + 0 ) 1 A 10
2. (c) Let S be larger and R be smaller resistance connected æ 100 - l ö
in two gaps of meter bridge. 11. (d) S = ç ÷ .R
è l ø
æ 100 - l ö 100 - 20
\S = ç ÷R = R = 4R ......(i) æ 100 - l ö
è l ø 20 Initially, 30 = ç ÷ ´10 Þ l = 25cm
è l ø
When 15W resistance is added to resistance R, then
æ 100 - l ö
æ 100 - 40 ö 6 Finally, 10 = ç ÷ ´ 30 Þ l = 75cm
S=ç ÷ ( R + 15) = ( R + 15 ) .......(ii) è l ø
è 40 ø 4
So, shift =50cm.
From equations (i) and (ii) R = 9W
E1 l1 + l2 (6 + 2) 2
æ l1 ö æ 240 ö 12. (d) = = =
E2 l1 - l2 (6 - 2) 1
3. (b) r = R ç l - 1÷ = 2 ç 120 - 1÷ = 2W
è 2 ø è ø
E1 l1 + l2 58 + 29 3
4. (a) Potential difference per unit length 13. (c) = = =
E2 l1 - l2 58 - 29 1
V 2
= = = 0.5V / m 14. (d)
L 4
e R 2 10
e R 5 5 E= ´l = ´ ´ 0.4 = 0.16 V
5. (d) E = . ´ l Þ 0.4 = ´ ´l ( R + Rh + r ) L (10 + 40 + 0) 1
( R + Rh + r ) L ( 5 + 45 + 0 ) 10
Þ l = 8m
ïì ( 25 + 5) ïü
6. (d) Current through 2W = 1.4 í 10 + 2 + 25 + 5 ý = 1A
ïî ( ) ( ) ïþ
15. (c)
7. (c) Post office box is based on the principle of
Wheatstone’s bridge.
æl ö æ 150 ö
8. (b) Using r = R ç 1 - 1÷ = 2 ç - 1 ÷ = 1W
è l2 ø è 100 ø
9. (a) Since the given bridge is balanced, hence there will be Resistance of the part AC
no current through 9W resistance. This resistance has
R AC = 0.1´ 40 = 4W and RCB = 0.1´ 60 = 6W
no effect and must be ignored in the calculations.
X 4
9W In balanced condition = Þ X = 4W
6 6
5W 4W Equivalent resistance Req = 5W
1.4 A 5
so current drawn from battery i = = 1A .
5
æ l1 - l2 ö æ 55 - 50 ö
10 W 8W 16. (a) r = ç l ÷ ´ R ¢ Þ r = çè 50 ÷ø ´ 10 = 1W
è 2 ø
14 W
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 38 109
17. (c) Potential gradient If P is slightly icnreased, potential of C will decrease.
V e R Hence current will from A to C.
x= =
L ( R + Rh + r ) L If Q is slightly increased, potential of C will increase.
Hence current will flow from C to A.
2.2
Þ 2.2 ´ 10-3 = ´1 Þ R ' = 990W 25-27
(10 + Rh )
We have
E 2.4 ´ 10-3 V 10.0V

18. (a) E = xl = irl Þ i = = = 4 ´ 10-4 A Rs = - Rc = - 20.0W = 9980W
rl 1.2 ´ 5 Ifs 0.00100A
19. ( b) Give circuit is a balanced Wheaststone bridge circuit, At full-scale deflection, Vab = 10.0V, voltage across the
hence it can be redrawn as follows meter is 0.0200 V, voltage across Rs is 9.98 V, and current
through the voltmeter is 0.00100 A. In this case most of the
voltage appears across the series resistor.
The equivalent meter resistance is Req = 20.0 W + 9980 W
= 10,000W . Such a meter is described as a "1,000 ohms-
per-volt meter" referring to the ratio of resistance to full-
scale deflection. In normal operation the current through
the circuit element being measured is much greater than
0.00100 A, and the resistance between points a and b in
the circuit is much less than 10,000W. So the voltmeter
draws off only a small fraction of the current and disturbs,
only slightly the circuit being measured.
12 ´ 6 25. (d), 26. (c), 27. (b)
RAB = (12 + 6 ) = 4 W.
28. (d) The resistance of the galvanometer is fixed. In meter
20. (a) Balancing length is independent of the cross sectional bridge experiments, to protect the galvanometer from
area of the wire. a high current, high resistance is connected to the
21. (a) In meter bridge experiment, it is assumed that the galvanometer in order to protect it from damage.
resistance of the L shaped plate is negligible, but 1
actually it is not so. The error created due to this is 29. (a) Sensitivity µ µ (Length of wire)
Potential gradiant
called, end error. To remove this the resistance box and
the unknown resisance must be interchanged and then 30. (a) If either the e.m.f. of the driver cell or potential
the mean reading must be taken. difference across the whole potentiometer wire is lesser
22. (a) Ammeter is always connected in series with circuit. than the e.m.f. of the experimental cell, then balance
point will not obtained.
23. (a) In balanced Wheastone bridge, the arms of
galvanometer and cell can be interchanged without
affecting the balance of the bridge.
24. (d)
W W
W W
110 DPP/ P 39
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 39
(1) (a) We know magnetic field due to a long straight current Let T be the period of rotation of the rod. Then
carrying wire
q qw 1 colulomb ´ 104 p / sec
µ0 i 4p ´ 10 ´ 3 -7 i= = =
B= = T 2p 2p
2pr 2p ´ 50 ´ 10-3 3
= 5 × 10 amp.
(Note that m0 = 4p × 10–7 in SI system) Now, a = 0.6 m, x = 0.8 m and m0 = 4p x 10–7 V-s/A-m.
= 1.20 × 10–5 Tesla = 0.12 G. Substituting these values in eq. (i) we get
[As 1 Gauss = 10–4 Tesla]
(2) (c) The magnetic induction produced due to a current (4p ´ 10 -7 V - s / A - m)(5 ´ 103 A)(0.6m) 2
B=
carrying arc at its centre of curvature is 2(0.36 + 0.64)3/2 m3
m 0 ia = 0.36p × 10–3 = 1.13 × 10–3 tesla
B = 4p r .......... (a) In the second case the current remains the same because
the rotating charge and the angular frequency are the
(subtending angle a at the centre of curvature) same. However, the radius of the loop becomes half (a
µ0ip p m0 i = 0.3 m) and the distance x is now 0.4 m.
Þ B= ´ =
4pr 4 16r µ0 ia 2
\ B=
2(a 2 + x 2 )3/2
O Q i P
R y
(3) (a) r (4 p ´ 10-7 V - s / A - m)(5 ´ 103 A)(0.3m) 2
90° x =
2(0.09 + 0.16)3/2 m3
S i T z
ur ur ur 4p ´ 10-7 ´ 5 ´ 103 ´ 0.09
BO = BQRS + BST . = tesla
2 ´ 0.25 ´ 0.5
ur ur 3 µ i ˆ ur µ i = 0.72 × 10–3 p = 2.26 × 10–3 tesla.
BPQ = zero, BQRS = ´ 0 k, BST = 0 kˆ
4 2r 4pr (6) (a) The magnetic field at the centre of a current carrying
coil having n turns is given by
ur µ i 3 3µ0i ˆ µ0i é 3p ù ˆ
Þ BO = 0 kˆ + k= + 1ú k m 0 ni
4 pr 4 2r 4 pr ëê 2 û B= N/A.m
ur ur ur 2r
(4) (a). BO = BPSR + BPQR .... (a) where i, is the current in the coil and r is the radius of
ur the coil.
m i é 2p - 2f ù m 0 i
B PSR = 0 ê = ˆ
[p - f] (-k) .... (b) Here i = 0.1 A, n = 1000 and r = 0.1 m.
4p ë r úû 2p r
(4p ´ 10-7 ) ´ 1000 ´ 0.1
ur m i 2sin f ˆ m i 2sin f m0 i \ B= = 6.28 × 10-4 N/A.m
BPQR = 0 . (-k) = 0 . = tan f (-k)ˆ 2 ´ 0.1
4p OQ 4p r cos f 2pr
(7) (a). The two coils are perpendicular to each other. Coil 1
.... (c) produces field along X axis and coil 2 produces field
From eqs. (a), (b) and (c)
along Y axis. Thus the resultant field will be-
ur m0 i m i
B= ˆ + 0 tan f (-k)
[p - f] (-k) ˆ B= B12 + B22 making an angle
2p r 2p r
æB ö
m0 i
ˆ q = tan -1 ç 2 ÷ with x axis
= [p – f + tan f] (-k) è B1 ø
2p r
(5) (a). The rotating rod is a current-loop whose radius a = 0.6m. µ0 NI
As B1 = B2 =
The magnetic field due to this current-loop at a point 2a
on its axis at a distance x from its centre is given by
æ µ0 NI ö µ0 NI
µ0 ia 2 Þ B= 2 = çè ÷= and q = 45º.
B= ...(i) 2a ø 2a
2(a 2 + x 2 )3/2
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 39 111
(8) (d) Applying ampere's law at P, Q and R respectively, we (12) (a). The magnetic field inside (near centre) a current carrying
find that there is no current enclosed by the circle of P. solenoid having n turns per unit length is given by
So magnetic induction at P is zero while that at Q and B = m0 ni newton/(ampere-meter),
R is non- zero. where i (ampere) is the current in the solenoid and
(9) (a). For a current carrying coil m0 = 4p × 10–7 newton/ampere2.
µ0 i Here n = 500/0.40 = 1250 per meter, i = 1.0 amp.
B= at centre and force on a current carrying \ B = (4 × 3.14 × 10-7) × 1250 × 1.0
2R
= 15.7 × 10-4 newton/(ampere-meter) = 15.7 gauss.
conductor ie
m 0 ni
µ i2 l (13) (b) We know, Bend =
F=ilBÞF= 0 2
2R
500
[µ0 ][A 2 ][L] Here n = = 2500/metre,
0.2
Þ [MLT–2] =
[L]
Þ [m0] = [MLT–2 A–2] 2Bend 2 ´ 8.71 ´ 10-6
\ i= =
(10) (c) By Biat Savart Law, µ0 n 4p ´ 10-7 ´ 2500
m 0 idl sin q
dB = 17.42 ´10-3 0.01742
4p r 2 = = amp amp.
p p
When q = 90º, then sin 90º = 1 = maximum
3/ 2
m 0i dl Bcentre æ x2 ö 1
\ dB = = maximum (14) (b) = ç 1´ 2 ÷ , also Baxis = Bcentre
4pr 2 Baxis ç R ÷ 8
è ø
(11) (a) The magnitude of the magnetic field at the centroid O
of the triangle due to a side PQ (say) is æ x2 ö
3/ 2
æ x2 ö
1/ 2
8
µ0 i Þ = ç 1´ 2 ÷ Þ 2 = çç 1´ 2 ÷÷
(sin f1 + sin f2 ) 1 ç R ÷
è ø è R ø
4p r
Where r is the perpendicular distance of PQ from O, x2 x2
and f1 , f2 th e angles as shown. The field is Þ 4=1+ Þ3= Þ x2 = 3R2 Þ 3R2
perpendicular to the plane of paper and is directed into R2 R2
plane of paper. Since the magnetic field due to each of
Þx= 3R
the three sides is the same in magnitude and direction,
the magnitude of the resultant field at O is Ni
Q
(15) (a) B0 = m0
2 pR
4p ´ 10-7 ´ 500 ´ 0.5

i = = 5 × 10–4 tesla
f2 2p ´ 0.1
(
f1 ( O
(16) (c) At P : Bnet = B12 + B22
P R 2 2
µ0 i æ μ 0 2i1 ö æ μ 0 2i2 ö
B= 3 (sin f1 + sin f2 ) = ç ÷ +ç ÷
4p r è 4π a ø è 4π a ø
Here i = 1 ampere, f1 = f2 = 60º B1
l l 1 P B2
and r = cot 60º = ´
2 2 3
a
and l is the side of the triangle (= 4.5 × 10–2 meter). A
i2
3 ´10 -7 ´ 1.0 æ 3 3ö
çç + ÷ i1
\B= 2 ÷ø C
æ1 -2 ö æ 1 ö è 2 D
ç ´ 4.5 ´10 ÷ ´ ç ÷ B O
è 2 ø è 3ø
3 ´ 10-7 ´ 2 ´ 3
(
μ0 2 2
)
1/ 2
= -2 = 4.0 × 10–5 weber/m2. = i1 + i2
4.5 ´ 10 2πa
112 DPP/ P 39
(17) (d) (22) (b). The arrangement is shown in fig.
(18) (b) Current distribution in the network is as shown.
I1 I2
Now, consider the pair of wires AB and GH. As current
in these wires produce equal but opposite magnetic
fields at centre O of the cube, resultant field due to the X Y
pair is zero. I P A
–
B 6 C
–I R
–I 6
–I F 6 G
–I 6
3
–I
O –I I
3
A 3 D –I
3
I –I –I
–I 6 6 The magnetic field at a point P in between the two
3
E –I H wires is
We can see five such more pairs namely :
6 r r r
B = B1 + B2 . The field B1 (due to current I1) points
(i) AE, CG
(ii) AD, FI down ward while B2 (due to current I2) points upwards.
Thus field at point P is-
(iiii) BC, EH
(iv) EF, DC m 0 é I1 I ù
B= ê - 2 ú in to the plane of paper..
(v) BF, OH 2p ë x R - x û
Magnetic field due to each of these pairs is zero. At x = R/2,
Therefore, resultant magnetic field at centre O is zero.
(19) (a) Magnetic field inside a solid cylinder of current is m 0 (I1 - I2 )
B= into the plane of paper, (if I1 > I2)
pR
µ0ir
Binside = m 0 (I 2 - I1 )
2pR 2 or B= out of the plane of paper (if I2 > I1)
pR
R (23) (d) (i) Fields due to both coils are in the same direction
µ0 i
Þ B0 = 2 (as per given µ0 N1I1 µ0 N 2 I2
2 pR 2 Þ B= +
2R1 2R 2
information)
If I1 = I2 = I, N1 = N2 = N,
4B0 pR
Þ i= µ0 NI(R1 + R 2 )
µ0 B=
2R1R 2
Magnetic field outside a solid cylinder of current is
(ii) Fields due to the two coils are in opposite direction,
µ i
Boutside = 0 µ0 N1I1 µ0 N 2 I2
2 pr Þ B= -
2R1 2R 2
æ 4B pR ö
µ0 ç 0 ÷ If I1 = I2 = I, N1 = N2 = N,
è µ0 ø
Þ Boutside at a distance 2R = = B0 µ0 NI(R 2 - R1 )
2p(2R) B=
(20) (d) As per sense of transversal, 2R1R 2
icrossing = I1 – I2 – I3 m0 I
r r (24) (a). For circular coil B1 =
2r
By Ampere's law, Ñ ò B.de = µ0 icrossing Circumference of the coil = 2pr = L.
r r Thus B1 = pm0 I/L = 3.14 m0 I/L
Þ Ñò B.de = µ0 (I2 – I1 – I3)
For square loop B2 = 2 2 m0 I/L = 3.60 m0 I/L
l Thus B1 < B2.
(21) (a) l = (2pr) n or n= r r uur ur
2p r
25. (d) Since M P B \ Torque = M ´ B is zero.
m 0 ni m 0 il 26. (d) The field must be in + k$ direction.
B= =
2r 4p r 2 27. (a)
28. (b) The statements are independently correct.
4p´10-7 ´ 6.28 ´1 r uur ur r
or B= = 6.28 × 10-5 Tesla. 29. (d) t = m ´ B Þ t = 0 for q = 0°, 180°.
2 ´ 2 ´ p´ (0.10)2 30. (b)
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 40 113
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 40
(1) (b) Ekp = eV, \ Ek = qV, region between PQ and RS. The particle moves in a
\ Ek µ q, \ V = constant circular path of radius r in the magnetic field. It can just
Ekp : Ekd : Eka : : 1 : 1 : 2. enter the region x > b for r ³ (b – a)
q 2 r 2 B2
(2) (c) EK = mv
2m Now r = ³ (b - a )
qB
q 2 qa2 mp
\ Ek µ =
2
´ q (b - a) B q (b - a) B
m mp E kp or v³ Þ vmin =
m m
4 1 (11) (a) From figure it is clear that
= ´ = E Ka = 8eV..
1 4
r b
KVe 10-7 ´ 3 ´1.66 ´10-19 q
(3) (a) B = = = 1.2 Tesla. q
r2 (2 ´10-10 )2
(4) (a) F = qvB sinq
q
æ 1ö
= 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 × 105 × 0.8 × çè ÷ø
2
d
= 1.28 × 10–14 N [Q charge on a particle = 2e]
r r r
(5) (b) The direction of F is along (V ´ B) which is towards
d p
the right. Thus the beam deflects to your right side. sin q = also r = qB
(6) (b) The particle is moving clockwise which shows that r
force on the particle is opposite to given by right hand Bqd
palm rule of fleming left hand rule. These two laws are \ sin q = p
used for positive charge. Here since laws are disobeyed,
we can say that charge is negative. (12) (a) For on wire Q due to wire P is
(7) (b) The point lies at the circumference hence it will come 2 ´ 30 ´ 10
-7
back after a time period T FP = 10 ´ ´ 0.1 = 6 ´ 10– 5 N (Towards left)
0.1
2p m Force on wire Q due to wire R is
T=
qB 2 ´ 20 ´ 10
-7
FR = 10 ´ ´ 0.1 = 20 ´ 10–5 (Towards right)
(8) (a) The magnetic force on a current carrying wire of length 0.02
L, placed in a magnetic field B at an angleq with the Hence Fnet = FR – FP = 14 ´ 10–5N = 14 ´ 10–4 N
field is given by (Towards right)
F = i l Bsinq. r r r
Here B = 5.0 × 10–4 N/A.m. i = 2.0 A, (13) (d) F = q (v ´ B)
l = 50 cm = 0.50 m,
q = 60º î ˆj kˆ
F = 2.0 × 0.50 × (5.0 × 10–4) × sin 60º r r 3 2 0 = k̂ (–10 × 105) = (– k̂ 106)
v´B =
= 4.33 × 10–4 N 5
According to the flemings left - hand rule, this force 5 ´10 0 0
will act perpendicular to both the wire and the magnetic q = 2e = 2 × 1.6 x 10-19 = 3.2 × 10-19 Coulomb
field. r
F = 3.2 × 10–19 (– k̂ × 106)
m r
1 4 16 Þ F = – 3.2 × 10–13 k̂ .
(9) (a, c) rµÞ rH : rHe : ro = : : =1:2:2
q 1 1 2 \ |F| = 3.2 × 10–13 Coulomb.
Radius is smallest for H+, so it is deflected most. (14) (b)
r
(10) (b) In the figure, the z-axis points out of the paper, and the \ F = q ( vr × B ) = 2evB sin 90º
magnetic field is directed into the paper, existing in the or F = 2evB
114 DPP/ P 40
(15) (a) Force on side BC AND AD are equal but opposite so
their net will be zero. 14 ´ 106
\ V= = 7 × 106 Volt.
2
10 cm (18) (a) If electron beam passes undeflected in simultaneous
B C r r
15 cm electric and magnetic fields E and B velocity of beam
2A r
v much be mutually perpendicular and the required
FAB FCD speed v is given by-
A D E 1 ´ 104
2 cm v= = = 5 × 106 m/s.
B 2 ´ 10-3
-7 2 ´ 2 ´1 If electric field is removed, the electron traverses a
But FAB = 10 ´ -2
´ 15 ´10-2 = 3 ´ 10–6 N
2 ´10 mv2 mv
circular path of radius r given by = evB or r = .
2 ´ 2 ´1 r eB
and FCD = 10-7 ´ ´ 15 ´10 -2 = 0.5 ´ 10–6 N
( 2 ´10 )
-2 Here m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg, v = 5 × 106 m/s.
e = 1.6 × 10–19 coul and B = 2 × 10–3 weber/m2
Þ Fnet = FAB – FCD = 2.5 ´ 10–6 N
(9.1 ´ 10 -31 ) (5 ´ 106 )
= 25 ´ 10–7 N, towards the wire. \ r=
(16) (b) In order to make a proton circulate the earth along the (1.6 ´ 10-19 ) (2 ´10 -3 )
r = 1.43 × 10-2 m = 1.43 cm.
equator, the minimum magnetic field induction B
should be horizontal nad perpendicular to equator. (19) (a) For L length or wire, to balance,
The magnetic force provides the necessary centripetal Fmagnetic = mg Þ ILB = mg,
force. Therefore B = mg/IL = (m/L)g/I
mv2 mv 45 ´10-3 ´ 9.8

i.e. qv B = or B = = = 1.47 × 10-2 tesla.
r qr 30
Here m = 1.7 × 10 kg, v = 1.0 × 107 m/s
–27 = 147 Gauss.
q = e = 1.6 × 10-19 coulomb, r = 6.37 × 106 m (20) (b) According to Fleming's left hand rule, magnetic force
on electrons will be downward.
1.7 ´ 10-27 ´ 1.0 ´ 107
B= = 1.67 × 10–8 weber/m2. e– e – e – e – e– e – e – ×
1.6 ´ 10-19 ´ 6.37 ´ 106
e – e – e – e – e– e– e – ×
mv2 qBr
(21) (b) \ F = mg = Bil
(17) (c) We have F = qvB = or v =
r m or 1 × 9.8 = 0.98 × i × 1, Þ i = 10A.
(22) (b) When currents flow in two long, parallel wires in the
3.2 ´ 10-19 ´ 1.2 ´ 0.45
= = 2.6 × 107 m/s. same direction, the wires exert a force of attraction on
6.8 ´ 10-27 each other. The magnitude of this force acting per meter
length of the wires is given by
v
The frequency of rotation n = µ0 i1i 2 i1i 2
2 pr
F= = 2 × 10–7 N/m.
2p R R
2.6 ´ 107 Here i1 = 10 A, i2 = 15 A, R = 30 cm = 0.3 m
= = 9.2 × 106 sec–1.
2 ´ 3.14 ´ 0.45
10 ´ 15
Kinetic energy of a-particle, \ F = 2 × 10–7 = 1 × 10–4 N/m.
0.3
1
EK = × 6.8 × 10–27 × (2.6 × 107)2 \ Force on 5m length of the wire
2 = 5 × (1 × 10–4) = (5 × 10-4) = 5 × 10-4 N (attraction).
= 2.3 × 10–12 joule. (23) (d) The electron will pass undeviated if the electric force
and magnetic force are equal and opposite. Thus
2.3 ´ 10-12
= eVolt = 14 × 106 eV = 14 MeVolt. E.e. = Bev or B = E/v but E = V/d
1.6 ´ 10-19
If V is accelerating potential of a-particle, then Kinetic Therefore, B = V = 600
energy = qV v.d. 3 ´ 10-3 ´ 2 ´ 106
14 × 106 eVolt = 2eV (since charge on a-particle = 2e) \ B = 0.1 Wb/m2.
The direction of field is perpendicular to the plane of
paper vertically downward.
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 40 115
(24) (b) The component of velocity of the beam of protons, (25) (a), (26) (a), (27) (c).
parallel to the field direction r r r
F = q (v ´ B) = q (x 2 - y2 ) kˆ
= v cosq = 4 × 105 × cos 60º = 2 × 105 m/sec.
and the component of velocity of the proton beam at (28) (c) When two long parallel wires, are connected to a bat-
right angle to the direction of field tery in series. They carry currents in opposite direc-
tions, hence they repel each other.
= v sinq = 4 × 105 × sin 60º = 2 3 × 105 m/sec.
(29) (c) No net force will act on charged particle if
therefore,the radius of circular path = (mv sinq /Be) r r r r
F = q [ E + v ´ B] = 0
1.7 ´ 10-27 ´ 2 3 ´ 105 r r r
or r = = 12.26 × 10–3 metre Þ E = -v ´ B Þ v need not to be perpendicular to B
0.3 ´ 1.6 ´ 10-19
(30) (c) In this case we can not be sure about the absence of the
or r = 1.226 × 10–2 metre. magnetic field because if the electron moving parallel
Pitch of the Helix = v cosq x (2pm/Be) to the direction of magnetic field, the angle between
2 ´ 105 ´ 2 ´ 3.14 ´ 1.7 ´ 10-27 velocity and applied magnetic field is zero
\ Pitch = (F = 0). Then also electron passes without deflection.
0.3 ´ 1.6 ´ 10-19
Also F = evBsin q Þ F µ B .
= 44.5 × 10–3 m = 4.45 × 10–2 m.
DPP/ P 41 115
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 41
22 t = BiNA = (4p × 10-7) × (500/0.4) × 3 × 0.4 × 10
1. (b) M = NiA = 20 ´ (4 ´ 10-2 ) 2 ´ 3 = 0.3 A - m2 × p (0.01)2
7
= 6p2 × 10-7 = 5.92 × 10-6 N.m.
2. (a) The magnetic moment of current carrying loop
14. (d) The equivalent magnetic moment is
M = niA = ni (pr2)
M = iA = ef (pr2)
Hence the work done in rotating it through 180°
W = MB(1 – cosq) = 2MB = 2(nipr2)B v
As f =
= 2 × (50 × 2 × 3.14 ×16 × 10–4) × 0.1 = 0.1J 2 pr
3. (b) NiAB ev 2 evr

q= Þ q µ N (Number of turns) \ M= pr =
C 2 pr 2
4. (d) t = MB sin q Þ t max = NiAB , (q = 90°) Cq
uur ur 15. (b) i = Þi µq
5. (c) In equilibrium angle between M and B is zero. It NAB
ur 16. (d) Initially for circular coil L = 2pr and M = i × pr2
happens, when plane of the coil is perpendicular to B
2
æ Lö iL2
B = i ´ pç ÷ = ...(i)
è 2p ø 4p
Finally for square coil
2
æ Lö iL2 ...(ii)
M '=i´ç ÷ =
è4ø 16
i L/4
6. (a) t = NBiA = 100 × 0.2 × 2 × (0.08 × 0.1) = 0.32 N × m pM

7. (c) t = NBiA = 100 × 0.5 × 1 × 400 × 10–4 = 2 N–m Solving equation (i) and (ii) M ¢ =
4
8. (a) t = NiAB sinq = 0 (Q q = 0°) 17. (b) M = iA = i ´ pR 2
9. (c) M = NiA Þ M µ A Þ M µ r2 (As l = 2pr Þ lµ r)
Þ M µ l2 Qw 1
also i = Þ M = QwR 2
10. (a) 2p 2
18. (a) t = NBiA sinq so the graph between t and q is a
11. (c) t max = NiAB = 1 ´ i ´ (pr 2 ) ´ B sinusoidal graph.
æ Lö 19. (d) Initial magnetic moment = m1 = iL2
çè 2pr = L, Þ r = ÷
2p ø I
i L M
2
æ L ö L2iB m2 = M 2
t max = pi ç ÷ B=
è 2p ø 4p
L/2
12. (b) L
13. (b) The magnetic field at the centre of the solenoid is M
m1 L L/2 L
B = m0 ni = (4p × 10-7) × (500/0.4) × 3 N/A.m. m1 = iL2
The torque acting on a current-carrying coil having N
After folding the loop, M = magnetic moment due to
turns (say), placed perpendicular to the axis at the centre
of the solenoid is- æLö iL2 μ1
each part = i i ç ÷ ´ L = =
è 2ø 2 2
EBD_7156
116 DPP/ P 41
μ μ1 r æ1 ö
Þ m2 = M 2 = 1 ´ 2 = A3 = ç ´ 10 ´ 10 ´ 10-4 ÷ iˆ m 2
2 2 è2 ø
20. (a) Magnetic moment vector,
21. (d) r r
m = iA = 10(0.01iˆ + 0.005jˆ + 0.005k)Am
ˆ 2
22. (a) Couple of force on loop S will be maximum because
for same perimeter the area of loop will be maximum = (0.1iˆ + 0.05ˆj + 0.05k)Am
ˆ 2
and magnetic moment of loop = i ×A. So, it will also
be maximum for loop S. c. Torque,
r
q nBA t = (0.1iˆ + 0.05jˆ + 0.05k)
ˆ ´ (2iˆ - 3jˆ + k)
ˆ
23. (b) Sensitivity S = =
i C î ˆj kˆ
24. (b) t = mBsin q is zero for q = 0°, 180°.
= 0.1 0.05 0.05 = -0.1iˆ - 0.4kˆ Nm
25-27 =
2 -3 1
28. (a) Due to metallic frame the deflection is only due to

current in a coil and magnetic field, not due to vibration
in the strings. If string start oscillating, presence of
metallic frame in the field make these oscillations
damped.
29. (b) The torque on the coil in a magnetic field is given by t
= nIBA cos q
For radial field, the coil is set with its plane parallel to
the direction of the magnetic field B, then q = 0° and
cos q = 1 Þ Torque = nIBA (1) = nIBA (maximum).
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (b) 30. (c) Loop will not oscillate if in unstable equilibrium
(a) The net force on a current carrying loop of any position.
arbitrary shape in a uniform magnetic field is zero.
r
Fnet = 0
(b) The given loop can be con sidered to be a
superposition of three loops as shown in figure. The
area vector of the three loops (1), (2) and (3) are
r æ1 ö
A1 = ç ´ 10 ´ 10 ´ 10-4 ÷ ˆjm 2
è2 ø
r æ1 ö
A 2 = ç ´ 10 ´ 10 ´ 10-4 ÷ kˆ m 2
è2 ø
DPP/ P 42 117
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 42
1. (a). Force between magnetic poles in air is given by 8. (c)
m 0 m1 m 2 9. (d) Here, d = 10 cm = 0.1 m ,
F= ´ H = 0.4 gauss = 0.4 x 10-4 T, M = ?
4p r2
Neutral points in this case, lie on axial line of magnet,
Given that m1 = 50 Am, m2 = 100Am, such that
r = 10 cm = 0.1 m and
µ0 = permeability of air = 4 p × 10–7 Hm–1. m 0 2M
=H
4p d3
4 p ´ 10-7 50 ´ 100
\F= . = 50 × 10–3 N
4p 0.1 ´ 0.1 2M
\ 10-7 × = 0.4 × 10-4
2. (a) Strength of a magnetic field due to a pole of strength m (0.1)3
is given by
M = 0.2 A m2
1 m 10. (d). t = F × r = MB sin 30
H= .
4 p r2
l ´ mBsin 30
Given that m = 40 Am, r = 20 cm = 20 × 10–2 m. F=
r
1 40
\ H= ´ = 79.57 Am–1 25 ´ 10-2 ´ 24 ´ 0.25 1
4 p (20 ´ 10 -2 ) 2 = ´ = 6.25 N
-2 2
Now, magnetic induction at the same point : 12 ´ 10
B = µ0 H = 4p × 10–7 × 79.57 = 10–4 wb/m2 m 0 2M
3. (c) Couple acting on a bar magnet of dipole moment M 11. (b). B = ´ = constant
4p x3
when placed in a magnetic field, is given by
t = MB sin q 1/3 1/3
where q is the angle made by the axis of magnet with æ M2 ö æ 1 ö
\ x2 = x1 ç = 20 × ç = 10 cm
the direction of field. è M ÷ø 1 è 2 ´ 4 ÷ø
Given that m = 5 Am, 2l = 0.2 m, q = 30°
and B = 15 Wbm–2 m0 2M m 2M
12. (d). B = = = 0
\ t = MB sin q = (m × 2l) B sin q 4 p ( l2 + x 2 )3/2 4p x 3
1
= 5 × 0.2 × 15 × = 7.5 Nm. 3
2 B1 æ x 2 ö
\ = = 8 : 1 approximately..
m 0 2m ' l B2 çè x1 ÷ø
4. (a) F = mB = m
4p x 3 13. (c). According to tangent law
BA = BB tan q
10 -7 ´ 2 ´ 200 ´ 0.05 ´ 100
= m 0 2M m0 M
8 ´ 10 -3 or = tanq
4p d13 4p d13
= 2.5 × 10-2 N
5. (d). W = MB (cosq1 - cosq2)
d1
MB \ d = (2 cot q)1/3
\ W1 = MB (cos 0º – cos 60º) = 2
2
3 MB I m l2
W2 = MB (cos 30º – cos 90º) = 14. (a). T = 2p = 2p 12 ´ m p lB
= 4 sec
2 MB
\ W2 = 3 W1.
m 2
6. (b). Loss in P.E. = gain in K.E. l
\ Ek = Ui – Uj = – MB cos 90º – (– MB cos 0º) 2
T' = 2p = 4 sec
= 4 × 25 × 10-6 = 10-4 J mp
12 ´ lB
7. (a). t = MB sin q = ml B sin q 2
= 10-3 × 0.1 × 4p × 10-3 × 0.5
= 2p × 10-7 N-m
EBD_7156
118 DPP/ P 42
Given that µ0 = 4p × 10–1 T mA–1,
I 1
15. (c). T = 2p or T µ M = 13.4 Am2,
MB M r = 15 cm = 0.15 m and l = 5.0 cm = 0.05 m
T1 3M - 2M 1.34
= \ BH = 10–7 ×
or T2 = 5 5 s [(0.15) + (0.5) 2 ]3/2
2
T2 3M + 2M
1.34
I = 10–7 × = 0.34 × 10–4 T
16. (b). T = 2p 0.025 0.025
MB
20. (a). As the magnet is placed with its north pole pointing
2
m l / 12 south, the neutral points are obtained on the axial line.
= 2p m p lB
or T µ ml At the neutral points the magnetic field B due to the
magnet becomes equal and opposite to the horizontal
component of earth’s magnetic field i.e., BH.
1/2
æ m lö Hence, if M be the magnetic dipole moment of the
T' ç ÷ T magnet of length 2l and r the distance of neutral point
= n n or T' =
T ç ml ÷ n from the centre of the magnet, then we have
ç ÷
è ø µ0 2Mr
B= . = BH
17. (a). The volume of the bar magnet is 4p (r 2 - l 2 ) 2
mass Given that µ0 = 4p × 10–7 TmA–1 ,

V = r = 40 cm = 0.40 m, l = 15 cm = 0.15 m and
density
HH = 0.34 Gauss = 0.34 × 10–4 T
6.6 ´ 10 -3 kg 4p BH (r 2 - l 2 ) 2
= = 8.3 × 10-7 m3. \M= .
7.9 ´ 103 kg / m3 µ0 2r
The intensity of magnetization is
(0.34 ´ 10-4 ) - [(0.40)2 - (0.15)2 ]2
2 = 10–7×
M 2.5 A - m 2 ´ 0.40
I= =
V 8.3 ´ 10-7 m 2 = 8.0 Am2
The pole strength of the magnet is,
= 3.0 × 106 A/m
18. (d). The compass box will be on the axial line of the magnet, M 8.0
m= = = 26.7 Am
1 2M 1 2 ´ 2lm 2l 0.30
Hence, . = . = H tan q 21. (a). The situation is shown in figure. The horizontal
4p r 3 4p r3 component of earth’s magnetic field at the location of
Given that H = horizontal component of the earth’s the cable (angle of dip q = 0 is)
magnetic field = 30 Am–1, q = 45°,
r = 20 cm = 0.02 m,
M = 2 l m = 4 × 10–2 m Magnetic North
North
10° Geographic
-2
2 ´ 4 ´ 10 m
Hence, 3
= 30 × tan 45°=30 × 1; Magnetic Meridian
4 p (0.2)
Meridian I Cable
3 Geographic 10° Geographic
30 ´ 4p ´ (0.2) West
\m= = 37.7 Am East
2 ´ 4 ´ 10-2 Current
19. (c). As the magnet is placed with its south pole pointing
south, hence the neutral point lies on the equatorial
line. At the neutral point, the magnetic field B due to South Magnetic
the magnet becomes equal and opposite to horizontal South
component of earth’s magnetic field i.e., BH.
Hence, if M be magnetic dipole moment of the magnet
of length 2l and r the distance of the neutral point from BH = B cos q = B cos 0 = B = 0.33 Gauss
its centre, then = 0.33 × 10–4 Tesla
BH is directed horizontally in the magnetic meridian.
µ0 M The magnetic field produced by the cable at a distance
B= = BH
4p (r 2 + l 2 )3/2 of R meter is given by
DPP/ P 42 119
µ0 I Figure shows a point Q on the axis of a short bar magnet

B= lying at a distance r from the centre of the magnet. It is
2 pR given that resultant magnetic field at Q is inclined at
2.5 5.0 ´ 10 -7 an angle of 45° w.r.t. earth’s field B.
= 2 × 10–7 × = T From the figure, it is clear that
R R
Ba = B tan 45° = B
According to right-hand-palm rule no, 1, the field B is
Now for a short bar magnet in this position,
directed horizontally along BH at a point below the
cable, and opposite to BH at a point above the cable. m 0 2M
Therefore, neutral points will be obtained above the Ba = B = .
4p r 3
cable. At these points, will be equal and opposite to
BH. Thus m 0 2M
or r3 = . = 2 × 125 × 10–6
4p B
5.0 ´ 10-7
= BH = 0.33 × 10–4 . \ r = (2 × 125 × 10–6)1/3 = 6.3 cm
R 25-27
5.0 ´ 10-7 Given that earth’s magnetic field, B = 0.39 G and angle
or R = = 15 × 10–3 m = 1.5 cm of dip, q = 35°
0.33 ´ 10-4 Horizontal and vertical components of earth’s magnetic
Thus, the line of neutral points lies above and parallel field B at the location of the cable are
to the cable at a distance of 1.5 cm from it. BH = B cos q = 0.39 cos 35°
22. (a) The magnetic lines of force are in the form of closed = 0.39 × 0.82 = 0.32 Gauss and
curves whereas electric lines of force are open curves. BV = B sin q = 0.39 sin 35°
23. (a) Inside a magnet, magnetic lines of force move from
= 0.39 × 0.57 = 0.22 Gauss
south pole to north pole.
The magnetic field produced by four current carrying
24. (b) Given that pole strength, m = 5.25 × 10–2 JT–1, q =
straight cable wires at a distance R is
45°
and B = 0.42 G = 0.42 × 10–4 T. µ0 I 1.0
B¢ = × 4 = 2× 10–7 × ×4
B 2pR 0.04
45° = 0.2 × 10–4 T = 0.2 Gauss
Beq. P Resultant magnetic field below the cable
According to right - hand, palm rule no. 1, the direction
r of B¢ below the cable will be opposite to that of
BH.Therefore, at a point 4 cm below the cable, resultant
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
N S
RH = BH – B¢ = 0.32 – 0.2 = 0.12 Gauss.
Figure shows a point P on the normal bisector of a Resultant vertical component of earth’s magnetic field
short bar magnet lying at a distance r from the RV = BV = 0.22 Gauss (unchanged)
centre O of the magnet. It is given that resultant \ Resultant magnetic field below the cable is
magnetic field at P makes an angle of 45° w.r.t. earth’s
field B. R= [R 2 H + R 2 V ]
From the figure, it is clear that
Beq = B tan 45° = B. = [(0.12)2 + (0.22)2 ]
Now, for a short bar magnet in this position
= 0.25 Gauss
µ0 M The angle that R makes with the horizontal is given by
Beq = B = .
4p r3
RV
q = tan–1
µ0 M RH
or r3 = .
4p B
0.22
5.25 ´ 10-2 = tan–1 = tan–1(1.8) @ 62°
0.12
= 10–7 × = 125 × 10–7.
0.42 ´ 10-4 Resultant magnetic field above the cable
–2
\ r = 5 × 10 m = 5 cm. Again, according to right - hand - palm no. 1, the
direction of B¢ at a point above the cable is the same as
B
that of BH.
Therefore, at a point 4 cm below the cable, the
45°
horizontal component of resultant magnetic field will
O S Q be
N
r Ba RH = BH + B¢ = 0.32 + 0.20 = 0.52 Gauss
EBD_7156
120 DPP/ P 42
Vertical component of resultant magnetic field will be 28. (a)
RV = BV – 0.22 Gauss ( unchanged) 29. (d) The earth has only vertical component of its magnetic
Hence, magnitude of resultant magnetic field below field at the magnetic poles. Since compass needle is
the cable only free to rotate in horizontal plane. At north pole
the vertical component of earth's field will exert torque
R = [R 2 H + R 2 V ] on the magnetic needle so as to aligh it along its direc-
tion. As the compass needle can not rotate in vertical
= [(0.52)2 + (0.52)2 ] plane, it will rest horizontally, when placed ont he mag-
= 0.56 Gauss netic pole of the earth.
The angle that R makes with the horizontal is given by 30. (c) It is quite clear that magnetic poles always exists in
pairs. Since, one can imagine magnetic field configu-
æ RV ö æ 0.22 ö ration with three poles. When north poles or south poles
q = tan–1 ç R ÷ = tan–1 çè ÷
è Hø 0.52 ø of two magnets are glued together. They provide a three
pole field configuration. It is also known that a bar
= tan–1 (0.43) @ 23°
magnet does not exert a torque on itself due to own its
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (b)
field.
DPP/ P 43 121
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 43
1. (a) Susceptibility of ferromagnetic substance is greater 24. (c)
than 1. 25. (b) Given that : H = 1600 Am–1 , f =2.4 ×10–5 Wb,
2. (c) Susceptibility of diamagnetic substance is negative and A = 0.2 cm2 = 0.2 × 10–4 m2.
it does not change with temperature. B = magnetic flux per unit cross - sectional are
3. (c) m d = 0 and m p ¹ 0
f 2.4 ´ 10 -5
= = = 1.2 Wbm–2
B A 0.2 ´ 10 -4
4. (d) m r = =4
B0 Magnetic permeability :
5. (b) Dimagnetic B 1.2 Wbm -2 or T
6. (b) Paramagnetic m= = = 7.5 × 10–4 T A–1 m
H 1600 Am -1
7. (d) A super conductor exhibits perfect diamagnetism.
8. (a) Soft iron is highly ferromagnetic. As µ = µ0 (1 + xm)
9. (a) Diamagnetism is the universal property of all
µ 7.5 ´ 10-4
substances. \ xm = -1 =
10. (c) Diamagnetic substances are repelled by magnetic field. µ0 4 ´ 3.14 ´ 10 -7
11. (b) Coercive force = 597.1 – 1 = 596.1.
12. (b) Because, diamagnetic substance, moves from stronger 26. (a) The energy lost per unit volume of a substance in a
magnetic field to weaker field. complete cycle of magnetisation is equal to the area of
13. (d) m r > 1, c > 0 the hysteresis loop.
14. (b) Hysteresis curve for a given material estimates 27. (a) Statement (4) is the only true statement among the given
hysteresis loss. choices.
15. (a) Neon atom is diamagnetic, hence it’s net magnetic 28. (b) The susceptibility of ferromagnetic substance decreases
moment is zero. with the rise of temperature in a complicated manner.
16. (b) On heating, different domains have net magnetisation After Curie's point the susceptibility of ferromagnetic
in them which are randomly distributes. Thus the net substance varies inversely with its absolute
magnetisation of the substance due to various domains temperature. Ferromagnetic substance obey’s Curies
decreases to minimum. law only above its Curie point.
17. (b) Repelled due to induction of similar poles. 29. (d) A paramagnetic sample display greater magnetisation
when cooled, this is because at lower temperature, the
18. (d) From the characteristic of B - H curve.
tendency to disrupt the alignment of dipoles (due to
19. (c) Diamagnetic substances are feebly repelled by magnets. magnetising field) decreases on account of reduced
20. (d) Net magnetic induction B = B0 + Bm = µ0H + µ0M random thermal motion.
21. (d) c m = (mr - 1) Þ c m = (5500 - 1) = 5499 30. (d) The permeability of a ferromagnetic material dependent
ur ur
m B on magnetic field, B = K m B0 , where B0 is applied
22. (c) Q mr = =
m 0 Hm 0 ur
field. The total magnetic field B inside a ferromagnet
8p may be 103 or 104 times the applied field B0 The
or mr = = 104
2 ´ 10 ´ 4 p ´ 10-7
3 permeability Km of a ferromagnetic material is not
ur uur
m constant, neither the field B nor the magnetization M
23. (a) WH = VAft =
d
Aft ur
increases linearly with B even at small value of B0.
0.6 From the hysteresis curve, magnetic permeability is
or WH = × 0.722 × 50
7.8 ´ 103 greater for lower field.
= 277.7 × 10-5 Joule
EBD_7156
122 DPP/ P 4 4
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 44
r r e = 4 × 10–5 × 3.14 × (.5)2 × 2 = 6.28 × 10–5 volt
(1) (a) f = B.A
(9) (d) Rate of decrease of area of the semicircular ring
= ( 0.02iˆ ) . ( 30iˆ + 16ˆj + 23kˆ ) × 10–4 dA
– = (2R) V
= 0.6 × 10-4 Wb = 60m Wb dt
(2) (c) The induced emf According to Faraday’s law of induction, induced emf
d df dA
E = – df/dt = – (3t2 + 2t + 3) × 10-3 e= - = –B = – B(2RV)
V)
dt dt dt
(because given flux is in mWb).
Thus E = ( – 6t – 2) × 10–3 × × × × ×
N ×
At t = 2 sec, × × ×
E = ( – 6 × 2 – 2) × 10–3 = –14 mV. × × × × ×
(3) (a) The direction of current in the solenoid is clockwise. × × × × ×
On displacing it towards the loop a current in the loop M Q vt
will be induced in opposite sense so as to oppose its 2R
approach. Therefore the direction of induced current The induced current in the ring must generate magnetic
as observed by the observer will be anticlockwise. field in the upward direction. Thus Q is at higher
(4) (b) When north pole of the magnet is moved away, then potential.
south pole is induced on the face of the loop in front of (10) (b) E = Blv
the magnet i.e. as seen from the magnet side, a clockwise
induced current flows in the loop. This makes free 360 ´ 1000
= 4 × 10–4 × 50 × =2V
electrons to move in opposite direction, to plate a. Thus 60 ´ 60
excess positive charge appear on plate b. (11) (c) The flux through the area is
(5) (d) If electron is moving from left to right, the flux linked f = BA cos 57º = 42 × 10-6 × 2.5 × 0.545
with the loop (which is into the page) will first increase = 57 × 10-6 Wb.
and then decrease as the eletron passes by. So the (12) (a) The magnetic flux linked with the loop at any instant of
induced current in the loop will be first anticlockwise time t is given by
and will change direction as the electron passes by.
f = BAN cos wt
df or f = 10Ba2 cos wt
(6) (c) E = – Here N = 10, A = a2
dt
or df = – Edt = (0 - f) (13) (b) According to Lenz’s Law
or f = 4 × 10–3 × 0.1 300 ´ 103
= 4 × 10–4 weber (14) (c) e = Bvl = 0.4 × 10–4 × ´ 3 = 10–2 V
60 ´ 60
df d (15) (b) Magnetic flux passing through the disc is f = BA
(7) (d) e = =– [10t2 + 5t + 1] × 10–3
dt dt weber
= – [10 × 10–3 (2t) + 5 × 10–3] = 0.01 × 3.14 × (15 × 10–2 meter)2
meter 2
at t = 5 second = 7.065 × 10–4 weber.
e = –[10 × 10–2 + 5 × 10–3] = [0.1 + 0.005] The line joining the centre and the circumference of the
|e| = 0.105V disc cuts 7.065 x 10-4 weber flux in one round. So, the
(8) (a) For each spoke, the induced emf between the centre O rate of cutting flux (i.e. induced emf)
and the rim will be the same = flux × number of revolutions per second
1 100
e= BwL2 = BpL2 f (Q w = 2pf) = 7.065 × 10–4 × = 3.9 × 10–4 volt.
2 60 ´ 3
Further for all spokes, centre O will be positive while (16) (c) The magnetic flux passing through each turn of a coil of area
rim will be negative. Thus all emf's are in parallel giving A, perpendicular to a magnetic field B is given by
total emf e = BpL2 f f1 = BA.
independent of the number of the spokes. The magnetic flux through it on rotating it through 180º
Substituting the values will be
f2 = – BA.(- sign is put because now the flux lines
enters the coils through the outer face)
DPP/ P 4 4 123
\ change in magnetic flux
d ( Nf )
D f = f1 – f2 = – BA – (BA) = – 2BA. Qe=–
Suppose this change takes in time Dt. According to dt
Faraday's law, the emf induced in the coil is given by d
= –N (BA cos wt)
Df 2NBA dt
e=–N = , = NBAw sin wt
Dt Dt
where N is number of turns in the coil. The current in \ emax = NABw
the coil will be = 60 × 2 × 10–2 × 0.5 × 2p × 1800/60 = 113 volt.
Hence, induced emf can be 111 V, 112 V and 113.04 V
e 1 2NBA (23) (b) The change is flux linked with the coil on rotating it
i= =
R R Dt through 180º is
where R is the resistance of the circuit. The current = nAB – (–nAB) = 2nAB
persists only during the change of flux i.e. for the time
df
interval Dt second. So, the charge passed through the \ induced e.m.f. = –
circuit is dt
2NBA 2 ´ 1 ´ 0.1
q = i × Dt = . = 2nAB/dt (numerically) = = 20 V
R 0.01
Here N = 500, B = 0.2 weber/meter2, The coil is closed and has a resistance of 2.0 W.
A = 4.0 cm2 = 4.0 × 10–4 meter2 and R = 50 ohm. Therefore i = 20/2 = 10A.
(24) (d) Initial magnetic flux f1 = 5.5 × 10–4 weber.
2 ´ 500 ´ 0.2 ´ 4.0 ´ 10-4 Final magnetic flux f2 = 5 × 10–5 weber.
\ q=
50 \ change in flux
= 1.6 × 10–3 coulomb. Df = f2 - f1 = (5 × 10-5) – (5.5 × 10-4) = – 50 × 10–5
(17) (a) T weber.
(18) (c) The induced emf between centre and rim of the rotating Time interval for this change, Dt = 0.1 sec.
disc is \ induced emf in the coil
1 1 Df (-50 ´ 10-5 )
E= BwR2 = × 0.1 × 2p × 10 × (0.1)2 e=–N = – 1000 × = 5 volt.
2 2 Dt 0.1
= 10p × 10–3 volt, Resistance of the coil, R = 10 ohm. Hence induced
(19) (a) The induced emf current in the coil is
E = Blv = 0.2 × 10–4 × 1 × 180 × 1000/3600
= 0.2 × 18/3600 = 1 × 10–3. V = 1mV e 5 volt
i= = = 0.5 ampere.
(20) (d) The induced emf is obtained by considering a strip on R 10ohm
the disc fig. Then, the linear speed of a small element dr (25) (a), (26) (c), (27) (b)
at a distance r from the centre is = wr. The induced emf (a) The current of the battery at any instant, I = E/R.
across the ends of the small element is- The magnetic force due to this current
de = B(dr)v = B wr dr
Thus the induced emf across the inner and outer sides EBl
FB = IBL =
of the disc is R
This magnetic force will accelerate the rod from its
b 1
e= ò a Bwr dr 2
= Bw (b2 – a2) position of rest. The motional e.m.f. developed in the
rod id B/v.
r r r The induced current,
(21) (c) The induced emf e = – (v ´ B).l
r r r r Blv
For the part PX, v ^ B , and the angle between (v ´ B) Iinduced =
R
r
direction (the dotted line in figure and l is (90 – q). The magnetic force due to the induced current,
Thus
B2l 2 v
eP –ex = vBl cos (90 – q/2) = vBl sin (q/2) Finduced = Iinduced =
Similarly ey – ep = vBl sin (q/2) R
Therefore induced emf From Fleming’s left hand rule, foce FB is to the right
between X and Y is eyx = 2 B v l sin (q/2) and Finduced is to the left.
(22) (a) Given, area = 10 × 20 cm2 = 200 × 10-4 m2 Net force on the rod = FB – Finduced.
B = 0.5 T, N = 60, w = 2p × 1800/60
EBD_7156
124 DPP/ P 4 4
From Newton’s law, (b) The rod will attain a terminal velocity at t ® ¥, i.e.,
dv when e–t/t = 0, the velocity is independent of time.
FB - Finduced = m
dt E
vT =
Bl
EBl B2l 2 v dv
- =m (d) The induced current Iinduced = Blv/R. When the rod
R R dt has attained terminal speed.
On separating variables and integrating speed from v0
to v and time from 0 to t, we have Bl æ E ö
Iinduced = ´ = E/ R
dv Bl
R çè Bl ÷ø
= dt The current of battery and the induced current are of
E - Bvl mR
same magnitude, hence net current through the circuit
v dv Bl t is zero.
ò0 E - Bvl = mR ò0 dt (28) (c) Since both the loops are identical (same area and number
of turns) and moving with a same speed in same
æ E - Bvl ö B l
2 2
- ln ç magnetic field. Therefore same emf is induced in both
÷= t
the coils. But the induced current will be more in the
è E ø mR
copper loop as its resistance will be lesser as compared
B2 l2 to that of the aluminium loop.
E - Bvl - t
=e mR (29) (c) As the aircraft flies, magnetic flux changes through its
E wings due to the vertical component of the earth’s
E magnetic field. Due to this, induced emf is produced
v= (1 - e- t / r ) across the wings of the aircraft. Therefore, the wings
Bl
of the aircraft will not be at the same potential.
mR (30) (c) Lenz’s Law is based on conservation of energy and
where t=
(Bl) 2 induced emf opposes the cause of it i.e., change in
magnetic flux.
DPP/ P 45 125
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 45
dI 1.0 22 I
1. (a). e = – L = – 10 × 10–3 = –1Volt. = P Þ IP = 0.01 A.
dt 0.01 220 0.1
\ | e | = 1 volt. 9. (c). Vp = 220V, Ip = 5S, Vs = 2200V
dI d Pp
2. (a). e = – L =–L [3t2 + 2t] Ps = , Is = ?
dt dt 2
= – L [6t + 2] = –10 × 10–3 [6t + 2]
(e)at t = 2 = – 10 × 10–3 (6 × 2 + 2) Vp Ip
Q VsIs =
= – 10 × 10–3 (14) = – 0.14 Volt 2
|e| = 0.14 volt. After putting the given value you will find
3. (a). The mutual inductance between two coils depends on Is = 0.25 A.
their degree of flux linkage, i.e., the fraction of flux linked 10. (d). During decary of current
with one coil which is also linked to the other coil. Here,
the two coils in arrangement (a) are placed with their planes Rt Rt 100´10-3
- E 100 100´10-3 1
parallel. This will allow maximum flux linkage. i = i0 e L
= eL = e = A.
R 100 e
dI1 0 - 10
4. (b). e2 = – M =- = 3 × 104 volt = 30 kV.. 11. (c). In a generator e.m.f. is induced according as Lenz’s
dt 3 ´10-3 rule.
5. (d). L2 and L3 are in parallel. Thus their combination gives The minus sign indicates that the direction of the induced
L 2 L3 e.m.f. is such as to oppose the change in current.
L' = = 0.25 H 12. (a). 'Immediately' after pressing the switch S, the current in
L 2 + L3
the coil L, due to its self-induction will be zero, that is
The L' and L1 are in series, thus the equivalent inductance i2 = 0.
is L = L1 + L' = 0.75 + 0.25 = 1H The current will only be found in the resistance R1 and this
6. (a). We use e = – L DI/Dt to determine the value of induced will be the total current in the circuit.
emf. (i) DI = (7 – 0) = 7A,
E 10 volt
Dt = (2 – 0) ms = 2ms \ i = i1 = = = 2.0 ampere.
R 2 5.0 volt
7
Thus e = – 4.6 × = – 16.1 × 103 volt 13. (a). (i) In series the same current i will be induced in both
2 ´ 10-3 the inductors and the total magnetic-flux linked with them
(ii) DI = 5 – 7 = – 2A, will be equal to the sum of the fluxes linked with them
dt = (5 – 2) ms = 3 ms individualy, that is,
(-2) F = L1i + L2i.
Thus e = – 4.6 × = 3.07 × 103 V If the equivalent inductance be L, then F = Li.
3 ´ 10-3 \ Li = L1i + L2i or L = L1 + L2.
7. (b). I = I0 (1 – e– t/t) (ii) In parallel, let the induced currents in the two coils be i1
1 and i2. Then the total induced current is
Where I = I and t = L/R
2 0 di di1 di 2
i = i1 + i2 \ = +
1 dt dt dt
Thus I = I (1 – e – t/t ) In parallel, the induced e.m.f. across each coil will be the
2 0 0
same.
1 di1 di 2
or = e – t/t or 2 = e+ t/t or log 2 = t/t Hence e = – L1
2 = –L2 .
dt dt
50 ´10-3 di
Thus t = t loge 2 = × 0.693 = 1.385 If the equivalent inductance be L, then e = – L .
0.025 dt
8. (a). VS = IS ZS Þ 22 = IS × 220
e di æ di1 di 2 ö e e
\ IS = 0.1A \ =- = – çè + +
dt ÷ø
=
L dt dt L1 L2
VS IP
=
VP IS
EBD_7156
126 DPP/ P 45
1 1 1 L1L 2
or = + or L= .
L L1 L 2 L1 + L2 dx
14. (d). If we try to find field of the small coil and then calculate A B
flux through long solenoid, the problem becomes very
difficult. So we use the following fact about mutual I
inductance. x
f 2 f1 C
M21 = M12, = F
I1 I2
Thus if I current flows in long solenoid, then flux f through
small coil is the same as the flux f2 that is obtained when I l
current flows through the small coil. Therefore, E D
f2 = f1 = (Field at small coil) × (area) × (turns)
æ N2 ö m N N AI
= ç m0 l I÷ (AN ) = 0 1 2
è 2 ø 1 l2
15. (a). The induced e.m.f. is a +l 2a + l
m 0 Ia é dx dx ù m 0 Ia æ 2a + l ö
Di f= ê ò + ò ú= 1n ç
e= –M or M =–
e
2p ê x x ú 2p è l ÷ø
Dt Di / D t ë l a +l û
Here e = 1500 volt. f m0 a æ 2a + l ö
M= ÞM= 1n ç ÷
1500 1500 ´ 0.001 I(primary) 2p è l ø
\M=– = = 0.5 henry..
(0 - 3.0) / 0.001 3.0
dI
dI p d ( I0 sin wt ) e = -M
16. (c). ES = M =M dt
dt dt
= MI0w |cos wt| m 0I0a æ 2a + l ö
e = -MI0 = - 1n ç
Þ Crest value = MI0w 2p è l ÷ø
= 1.5 ´ 1 × 2p × 50
= 471 V 2
e
é m0 1n 2a +l I ù at
ê 2p 2 0ú ( )
t=ë û
1 1 l
2 Heat produced =
17. (a) U = Li2 = ´100 ´10 -3 ´ (10 ) = 5J
2 2 R 8l
Vs 5 Vs 28. (a) Hysteresis loss in the core of transformer is directly
18. (c) Transformation ratio k = V Þ 3 = 60 Þ Vs = 100 V proportional to the hysteresis loop area of the core
p
material. Since soft iron has narrow hysteresis loop
ip Ns ip 1 area, that is why soft iron core is used in the transformer.
19. (b) = Þ = Þ i p = 0.04 A 29. (d) Efficiency of electric motor is maximum when the back
is Np 4 100
emf set up in the armature is half the value of the applied
Output 80 20 ´ 120 battery emf.
20. (a) h= Þ = 30. (a) Transformer works on ac only, ac changes in magnitude
Input 100 1000 ´ il
as well as in direction.
20 ´ 120 ´ 100
Þ il = = 3A.
1000 ´ 80
21. ()
22. (b)
23. (a)
24. (b)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (b)
Consider a strip at a distance x from the wire of thickness dx.
Magnetic flux associated with this strip
m 0 Ia
D f = B ad x = dx
2px
DPP/ P 46 127
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 46
1. (b) The coil has inductance L besides the resistance R . 12. (b)
V 120
Hence for ac it’s impedance resistance R 2 + X L2 will i= = = 0.016 A
2 2 2
R +w L 100 + 4p2 ´ 602 ´ 202
be larger than it’s impedance R for dc.
13. (a) The voltage across a L-R combination is given by
i 4
2. (b) ir.m.s. = 0 = = 2 2 amperee V 2 = VR2 + VL2
2 2
T VL = V 2 - VR2 = 400 - 144 = 256 = 16 volt.
3. (d) The current takes sec to reach the peak value.
4 14. (b) Reading of ammeter,
2p 1 Vrms Vo wC
In the given question = 200p Þ T = sec i rms = =
T 100 Xc 2
1 200 2 ´ 100 ´ (1 ´ 10-6 )

\ Time to reach the peak value = 400 sec =
2
4. (b) 50 c/s or Hz
= 2 × 10–2 A = 20 m A
2pt
5. (b) E = E0 cos wt = E0 cos R C
T
15. (a)
2 p ´ 50 ´ 1 p
= 10 cos = 10 cos = 5 3 volt. VR VR
600 6
~
i12 + i22 1 Let the applied voltage be V, volt.
6. (c) irms = = (i12 + i22 )1/ 2
22 Here, VR = 12 V, VC = 5V
7. (c) Hot wire ammeter reads rms value of current. Hence
V= VR2 + VC2 = (12 )2 + ( 5)2 = 13 V.
its peak value = irms ´ 2 = 14.14 amp
16. (c) Z = X L = 2p´ 60 ´ 0.7
V0 120
8. (b) Vrms = = = 84.8 V 120 120
2 1.414 \i = = = 0.455 amperee
Z 2p ´ 60 ´ 0.7
9. (d) Peak value to r. m. s. value means, current becomes
17. (d) Current will be max at first time when
1 100 pt + p/3 = p/2 Þ 100 pt = p/6 Þ t = 1/600 s.
times.
2 18. (d) Z = R 2 + X 2 = R 2 + (2p fL)2
If peak is at t = 0, current is of the form
2
1 æ 0.4 ö
i = i0 cos100pt Þ ´ i0 = i0 cos100pt = (30) 2 + ç 2 p ´ 50 ´ ÷ = 900 + 1600 = 50W
2 è p ø
p 1 V 200
Þ cos = cos100 pt Þ t = sec = 2.5 ´10 -3 sec. i= = = 4 ampere
4 400 Z 50
19. (d) In purely inductive circuit voltage leads the current by 90o .
10. (b) Z = R 2 + X L2 , X L = wL and w = 2pf
P 60
20. (a) Current through the bulb i = = = 6A
2 2 2 2 V 10
\ Z = R + 4p f L
60 W, 10 W
11. (b) The applied voltage is given by V = VR2 + VL2 i L
V = (200)2 + (150)2 = 250 volt 10 V VL

i
100 V, 50 Hz
EBD_7156
128 DPP/ P 46
V= VR2 + VL2 V = V0 sin ( wt - f)
(100)2 = (10)2 + VL2 Þ VL = 99.5 Volt

The peak value V0 = 220 2 = 311V
Also VL = iXL = i ´ (2pvL)
Þ 99.5 = 6 ´ 2 ´ 3.14 ´ 50 ´ L = Þ L = 0.052 H. and as in case of ac,
wL 2p ´ 200 1 4
21. (a) Phase angle tan f = = ´ = V0
R 300 p 3 Vrms = ;Vrms = 220 V
2
4
\ f = tan -1 26. (b) In case of ac,
3
22. (a) The root mean square voltage is effective voltage.
2 2 622
23. (c) E = 141 sin (628t), Vav = V0 = ´ 311 = V
p p p
E0 141
Erms = = = 100V and 2pf = 628 314
2 1.41 27. (a) As w = 2pf ,2pf = 314i.e., f = = 50Hz
2´ p
Þ f = 100 Hz 28. (d) When ac flows through an inductor current lags behind
the emf., by phase of p/2, inductive reactance,
24. (d) Time taken by the current to reach the maximum value X L = wL = p.2 f .L, so when frequency increases
T 1 1 correspondingly inductive reactance also increases.
t= = = = 5 ´ 10-3 sec 29. (c) Like direct current, an alternating current also produces
4 4v 4 ´ 50
magnetic field. But the magnitude and direction of the
and i0 = irms 2 = 10 2 = 14.14 amp field goes on changing continuously with time.
30. (b) We can use a capacitor of suitable capacitance as a
25. (a) As in case of ac, choke coil, because average power consumed per cycle
in an ideal capacitor is zero. Therefore, like a choke
coil, a condenser can reduce ac without power
dissipation.
DPP/ P 47 129
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 47
13. (b) Resonance frequency
1. (a) For resonant frequency to remain same
LC should be const. LC = const 1 1
w= = = 2500 rad/sec
-3
L LC 8 ´10 ´ 20 ´10-6
Þ LC = L' × 2C Þ L ' =
2
V 220
2. (b) At resonance, LCR circuit behaves as purely resistive Resonance current = = = 5A
R 44
circuit, for purely resistive circuit power factor = 1
3. (a) If the current is wattless than power is zero. Hence 100 10 -3 p
14. (c) P = Vr.m.s. ´ ir.m.s. ´ cos f = ´ ´ cos
phase difference f = 90° 2 2 3
4. (c) VL = 46 volts, VC = 40 volts, VR = 8 volts
102 ´ 10-3 1 10-1
= ´ = = 0.025 watt
E.M.F. of source V = 82 + (46 - 40)2 = 10 volts 2 2 4
15. (b) R = XL = 2XC
1
5. (c) Resonant frequency = does not depend on Z = R 2 + (X L - X C ) 2 XL–XC
2p LC
resistance. = (2X C )2 + (2X C - X C ) 2 Z
6. (a) At resonance LCR series circuit behaves as pure
= 4X 2C + X 2C
resistive circuit. For resistive circuit f = 0o
f
5R R
R R = 5X C =
7. (b) cos f = Z = 2
R2 + w2 L2 X L - XC 2XC - XC
tan f = =
12 R 2XC
= Þ cos f = 0.30
(12) + 4 ´ p ´ (60) 2 ´ (0.1) 2 -1 æ 1 ö
2 2 1
tan f = ; f = tan çè ÷ø
2 2
1 1
8. (a) f = Þ f µ 16. (d) Phase angle f = 90o , so power P = Vrms I rms cos f = 0
2p LC C
2
9. (b) In non resonant circuits Vrms (30)2
17. (b) P = = = 90 W
R 10
1
impedance Z = , with rise in 18. (c) At A : X C > X L
2
1 æ 1 ö
+ wC -
2 ç ÷ At B : X C = X L
R è wL ø
At C : X C < X L
frequency Z decreases i.e. current increases so circuit
19. (d) The instantaneous values of emf and current in
behaves as capacitive circuit.
inductive circuit are given by E = E0 sin at and
R 10 1
10. (c) cos f = = = Þ f = 60o pö
Z 20 2 æ
i = i0 sin ç w - ÷ respectively..
11. (d) è 2ø
1 æ pö
- 2pfL So, Pinst = Ei = E0 sin wt ´ i0 sin ç wt - ÷
XC - X L 2pfC è 2ø
12. (a) tan f = Þ tan 45o =
R R = E0i0 sin wt cos wt
1 1
ÞC= = E0i0 sin 2wt (sin 2wt = 2sin wt cos wt )
2pf (2pfL + R) 2
Hence, angular frequency of instantaneous power is
2w .
EBD_7156
130 DPP/ P 47
20. (d) The voltage VL and VC are equal and opposite so (DVL + DVC )max = DVC - DVL = 7.4 - 2.6 = 4.8 volt
voltmeter reading will be zero. 2 2
26. (c) E m = (DVR )max + ( DVC - DVL )max
Also R = 30W, X L = X C = 25W
= (8.8)2 + (4.8) 2 = 10 volt
V V 240
So i = = = = 8A 27. (a) If f then (DVL)max
R 2 + ( X L - X C )2 R 30
1
28. (a) Capacitive reactance XC = . When capacitance
1 L wC
21. (d) Since quality factor, Q = (C) increase, the capacitive reactance decreases. Due
R C
22. (d) to decrease in its values, the current in the circuit will
23. (a) æ ö
ç I= E ÷
24. (c) Reactance Z = ( X L - X C )2 + R 2 increase ç
è R 2
+ X 2 ÷ and hence brightness of
C ø
source (or electric lamp) will also increase.
= (80 - 50 )2 + 402 29. (b) The phase angle for the LCR circuit is given by
= 50 W
1
R 40 X L - X C wL - wC
Power factor = cos f = = = 0.8 tan f = =
Z 50 R R
Vrms 200V where XL, XC are inductive reactance and capacitive
Irms = = =4A reactance respectively when XL > XC then tan f is
Z 50W
Power current = Irms.cos f = 4 × 0.8 positive i.e. f is positive (between 0 and p/2). Hence
= 3.2 A emf leads the current.
Wattless current = Irms.sin f = 4 × 0.6 30. (a) If resistor is used in controlling ac supply, electrical
= 2.4 A energy will be wasted in the form of heat energy across
Sol. 25-27 the resistance wire. However, ac supply can be
DVL controlled with choke without any wastage of energy.
This is because, power factor (cos f) for resistance is
unity and is zero for an inductance. [P = EI cos f].
DVR
25. (d)
DVC
DPP/ P 48 131
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 48
N – m2 E0 = 2 3 × 102 N/C
1. (d) m0 = 4p × 10–7, e0 = 8.85 × 10–12
C2 P 2 1
10. (b) I = or = W/m2
1 meter A 4 p ´ 4 8p
so c = 3 ´ 108
m 0 e0 = sec
.
1 2
2. (b) Wavelength of visible spectrum is 3900 Å – 7800 Å. I= Î0 E0 c
2
3. (a) lg–rays < lx-rays < la–rays < lb–rays.
4. (c) Electric field between the plates of the capacitor is given 2I 2 ´ 1´ 36p´109
E0 = Î c or = 30 N/C
by 0 8p´ 3 ´108
s q
E= or B02
Î0 A Î0
11. (a) UB =
4µ0
Flux through the area considered
q A q E0 E
f= AÎ ´ 4 = 4Î Also =c \B = 0
0 0 B0 0 c
df E E0
Displacement corrent id = Î0 Hence B0 =
dt 1
µ0 Î0
dæ q ö i
= Î0 × dt ç 4 Î ÷ = 4
è 0ø
E 20µ0 Î0 100 ´ 8.84 ´ 10-12
5. (a) Electric field between the plates is \ UB = or
4µ0 4
Q
E= \ UB = 2.21 × 10–10 J/m3
Î0 A 12. (a) The speed of electromagnetic waves and in a medium
is given by
Q
\ fE = E. A or ×A 1
Î0 A
n=
(µe )
df E d æ Qö
\ id = Î0 or Î0 dt ç Î ÷ Where µ and e are absolute permeability and absolute
dt è 0ø permittivity of the medium.
We know that, µ = µ0µr and e = e0er. Hence
dQ
\ id = = i (charging current) 1 1 1
dt v= = ´
Hence id = 1A ( µ0µr .e0 e r ) (µ0 e 0 ) ( µr e r )
6. (c) E × B
7. (b) Since the direction of propogation of EM wave is given
c2
)
c
by E × B ( ^ ^
\ j ´ i = -k ^ or v =
( µr e r )
or er =
n2 (µr )
1
8. (d) Speed of E.M. wave = in medium hence (3 ´ 108 )2
µ0 Î0 µr Îr \ er = = 2.25
(2 ´ 108 )2 ´ 1
it will travel with different speed in different medium.
13. (a) Given By = 2 × 10–7 sin (0.5 × 103x + 1.5 × 1011t)
1 2 Comparing it with a standard equation for a progresive
9. (b) I = Î cE
2 0 0 wave travelling along the negative direction of x-axis
is
2I 2 ´ 500 ´109 ´ 36 p 2p æ 2px 2pvt ö
E0 = Î0 c or y = r sin (x + vt) = r sin çè + ÷
p´ 3 ´ 108 l l l ø
EBD_7156
132 DPP/ P 48
\ Speed and wavelength of wave becomes half and
æ 2px ö
= r sin ç + 2pnt ÷ frequency remain unchanged.
è l ø
11 For 25 - 27
2pn = 1.5 × 10
h = 150 km = 150 × 103 m
1.5 ´ 1011 Nm = 9 × 1010 per m3
n= = 23.9 × 109 Hz = 23.9 Hz D = 250 km = 250 × 103 m
2p
25. (a) Critical frequency of layer
14. (c) The given equation
Ey = 0.5 cos[2p × 108 (t – x/c)] ..... (1) fc = 9 N m = 9 ´ 9 ´ 1010 = 2.7 ´ 106 Hz.
indicates that the electromagnetic waves are 26. (b) Maximum usuable frequency
propagating along the positive direction of X-axis.
The standard equation of electromagnetic wave is given 2
D2 6
æ 250 ´ 103 ö
by Ey = E0 cosw(t – x/c) ..... (2) f = fc 1 + = 2.7 ´ 10 ´ 1 + ç
3÷
Comparing the given eq. (1) with the standard eq. (2), 4h 2 è 4 ´ 150 ´ 10 ø
we get w = 2p × 108 = 3.17 × 106 Hz.
or 2pn = 2p × 108 27. (c) If angle of incidence at this layer
\ n = 108 per second is fi , from second law of f = f c sec
f i.
c 3 ´ 108
Now, l = = =3m
n 108 f 3.17 ´ 106
sec fi = = = 1.174
15. (a) The maximum value of magnetic field (B0) is given by fc 2.7 ´ 106
E0 E0 fi = sec -1 (1.174) = 31.6°
B0 = = = 10–6 tesla
c c 28. (d) The electromagnetic waves of shorter wavelength do
The magnetic field will be along Z-axis not suffer much diffraction from the obstacles of earth's
The maximum magnetic force on the electron is
atmosphere so they can travel long distance.
Fb = |q (v × B)| = q n B0
= (1.6 × 10–19) × (2.0 × 107) × (10–6) 29. (b) The wavelength of these waves ranges between 300 Å
= 3.2 × 10–18 N and 4000 Å that is smaller wavelength and higher
16. (c) b-rays are beams of fast electrons. frequency. They are absorbed by atmosphere and
17. (b) convert oxygen into ozone. They cause skin diseases
and they are harmful to eye and cause permanent
c 3 ´ 108
18. (d) v = = 1.8 ×108m/sec blindness.
mr er = 1.3 ´ 2.14 30. (b) Radio waves can be polarised because they are
19. (c) lm > lv > lx transverse in nature. Sound waves in air are longitudinal
r r in nature.
20. (d) Direction of wave propagation is given by E×B .
mr m
21 . (c) Wave impedance Z = ´ 0
er e0
50
= ×376.6=1883W
2
22. (a)
23. (a) b- rays are beams of fast electrons.
me
24. (a) Refractive index = m 0e 0
e
Þ Then refractive index = =2
e0
134 DPP/ P 49
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 49
360 360 (5) (c) Small and erect image is formed only by convex mirror.
(1) (a) Here, n = = =4 Plane mirror from images equal to object and concave
q 90
mirror form images bigger than object.
\ n is an even number. (6) (b) The image will be formed by the plane mirror at a 30
M2 cm behind it, while the image by convex mirror will be
formed at 10 cm behind the convex mirror.
Since for convex mirror u = – 50 cm
I2 O v = 10 cm
1 1 1 -1 + 5 4
= + = =
f -50 10 50 50
c• M1
50
f= = 12.5 cm
I3 4
I1 Therefore the radius of curvature of convex mirror is
r = 2 f = 25 cm
Thus, number of images formed = n – 1 = 3. All these (7) (a) The image of object O from mirrror M1 is I1 and the
three images lie on a circle with centre at C (The point image of I1 (the vitual object) from mirror M2 is I3.
of intersection of mirrors M1 and M2 ) and whose radius The image of object O from mirror M2 is I2 and the
is equal to the distance between C and object. image of I2 (the virtual object) from mirror M1 is I4.
(2) (c) Here, [n] = 5 Þ n – 1 £ 5 £ n Notice that this interpretation, according to ray diagram
rules, is valid only for Fig. (A). All others are
360 360 inconsistent.
\ –1£5£
q q (8) (a) Angle betwen incident ray and mirror = 90º - 30º = 60º
360 360
or, q ³ or q £
6 5
\ 60º £ q £ 72º 60º 30° 30° X
(3) (d) For the given q = 50º, 30º
60º
360 360
n= = = 7.2
q 50
The integer value of (7.2) is 7.
Thus number of images formed is 7. By law of reflection Ð i = Ð r
(4) (a) The situation is illustrated in figure. So angle of reflection Ð r = 30º.
Hence angle between mirror and reflected ray = 60º
M2 (9) (b) As shown in figure, ray AB goes to mirror M1, gets
q reflected and travels along BC and then gets reflected
B
a C
by M2 and goes in CD direction. If the angle between
b a N2 M1 and M2 be a, then
N1 X
i M1
q 90º-i i
O A M1 E
a
B A
XA is the incident ray. BC is the final reflected ray. It a D
is given that BC is parallel to mirror M1. Look at the
a a a
assignment of the angles carefully. Now N2 is normal M2
O C
to mirror M2. Therefore b = q
Then from D OAB In D OBC , ÐOBC and ÐOCB are equal to a
q + b + 90º – i = 180º \ 3a = 180º
or q + q + 90º – i = 180º or i = 2q – 90º a = 60º
Thus if the angle of incidence is i = 2q - 90º, then the
final reflected ray will be parallel to the first mirror.
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 49 135
(10) (a) Here, Object distance , u = – 15cm (12) (d) u = –50 cm , f = 25cm
focal length , f = – 5 cm 1 1 1
Object height, h0 = 0.2 cm =- + ;
25 50 v
O 1 1 1 2 +1 3
= + = =
v 25 50 50 50
I 50
v= = 16.6 cm.
3
We know, mirror formula, 1 1 2
(13) (a) We know, + =
1 1 1
v u R
+ = uR
v u f Þv=
2u - R
uf dv (2u - R).R - uR.2 du
ÞV = = .
u-f dt (2u - R)2 dt
(-15)( -5) æ R ö du
2
= = – 7.5 cm = –ç .
-15 + 5 è 2u - R ÷ø dt
Again, magnification, 2
dv æ R ö
-7.5 \ Speed of image =ç
è 2u - R ÷ø
v 1 .
m =- =- =- dt
u -15 2
du æ R ö2
= V
Now, | m | =
hi dt çè 2u – R ÷ø 0
ho (14) (a) For shrot linear object du and dv represent size of
object and image respectively.
0.2
Þ hi = | m | h o = cm = 0.1 cm
2 \
\
Thus, the image is formed at 7.5 cm from the pole of

\
2
\ \
the mirror and its size is 0.1 cm. 1

(11) (a)
\ \ \ \ \
u b
P O u+ du
\ \
\\
C F I
1 1 1
We know, + =
v u f
v2
Þ dv = – .du
u2
Here, Object distance, u = – 30 cm
Focal length, f = + 20 cm v2
Þ |db| = |du|
1 1 1 u2
We know, mirror formula, + =
v u f 2
æ f ö
uf -30 ´ 20 =ç ÷ .b
Þv= = = + 12 cm èf–uø
u - f -30 - 20
Again, magnification , v 1 1 1 u u
15. (b) \ m = - .Also = + Þ = + 1
-v -12cm 2 u f v u f v
m= = =
u 30cm 5
u u -v f
Now, Image height = m × object height Þ- = 1- Þ =
v f u f -u
2
= ´ 0.5 cm = 0.2 cm f
5 so m =
Thus the image is formed behind the mirror at a distance f -u
of 12 cm from the pole. Image height is 0.2 cm.
136 DPP/ P 49
16. (b) Given u = – 15 cm, f = – 10 cm, O = 1 cm
-f
–n = Þ nf + nu = –f
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -f - u
+ = , = - = -
v u f v f u -10 -15
-(n + 1)
\ v = – 30 cm nu = –f –nf Þu= f
n
I v -30 22. (d) Here image can be real or virtual. If the image is real
=- =- =–2
O u -15 f = –30, u = ?, m = –3
I = – 2 × 1 = – 2 cm f -30
Image is inverted and on the same side (real) of size 2 m= Þ –3 = ; u = – 40 cm.
f -u -30 - u
cm. If the image is virtual
17. (b) As shown in the figure, when the object (O) is placed
between F and C, the image (I) is formed beyond C. It f -30
m= Þ 3= Þ u = –20 cm.
is in this condition that when the student shifts his eyes f -u -30 - u
towards left, the image appears to the right of the object 23. (b) By keeping the incident ray is fixed, if plane mirror
pin. rotates through an angle q reflected ray rotates through
an angle 2q
Movement towards left
F
q
I C O
q
q
A
18. (a)
I
30
60º º P
30º
30º N
B
O Q 24. (d) Real image
O
Ð i = Ð r = 30º I Virtual object
\ Ð OIQ = 60º
\ IOQ = 90º – 60º = 30º
19. (d) The image formed by a convex mirror is always virtual.
20. (d) From the ray diagram.
M 25. (b,c) Convex mirror and concave lens form, virtual image
A 2L X N for all positions of object.
d/2 (26) (a); (27) (d)
D L B
d/2
X
O
In DANM and DADB
I
ÐADB = ÐANM = 90° 70 cm
ÐMAN = ÐBAN (laws of reflection)
Also ÐBAN = ÐABD
Þ ÐMAN = ÐABD 700 cm 100 cm 700 cm
\ DANM is similar to DADB
µ2 µ1 µ2 – µ1
– = , when x = 70 cm
x d /2 v u R
\ = or x = d
2L L
1.5 1.2 1.5 – 1.2
So, required distance = d + d + d = 3d. – =
v –70 20
f
21. (a) m = –n ; m = 20 ´ 70 ´ 1.5
f -u Þv=
–1.2 ´ 20 + 0.3 ´ 70
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 49 137
Þ v = – 700 cm Similarly, for x = 80 cm
µ2 µ1 µ2 – µ1
v = 80 cm
– = and for x = 90 cm
v u R
v = 70 cm
1.2 1.5 1.2 –1.5 28. (d)
– =
v 900 –20 29. (d) When an object is placed between two plane parallel
mirrors, then infinite number of images are formed.
900 ´ 200 ´ 1.2 Images are formed due to multiple reflections. At each
Þv=
1.5 ´ 200 – 900 ´ 3 reflection, a part of light energy is absorbed. Therefore,
Þ v = – 90 cm distant images get fainter.
30. (d) The size of the mirror does not affect the nature of the
image except that a bigger mirror forms a brighter
image.
138 DPP/ P 50
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 50
(a) We know that d = A (m – 1)
( )
(1) 2 2
Þ sin2 a < m1 - m 2 sin a < m12 - m22
d
or m = 1 +
A amax = sin–1 m12 - m22
Here A = 6 °, d = 3° , therefore
3 B
m=1+ = 1.5
6
i
(2) (c) According to given problem
A = 30°, i1 = 60° and d = 30° and as in a prism
r
d = (i1 + i2) – A, 30° = (60 + i2) – 30 i.e., i2 = 0 a O A
So the emergent ray is perpendicular to the face from
which it emerges.
Now as i2 = 0, r2 = 0 (6) (b) From the information given, it is clear that the apparent
But as r1 + r2 = A , r1 = A = 30° depth is 2.58 mm and the real depth is 4mm. Therefore,
So at first face the refractive index will be
1× sin 60° = m sin 30° i.e., m = 3 R 4
m= = = 1.55
c c 3 A 2.58
(3) (a) As are know, m = Þ v = = × 3 × 108 (7) (d) The apparent shift of the bottom point upwards will be
v m 4
x = x1 + x2
= 2.25 × 108 m/s
As, c = n l0 and v = n l æ 1ö æ 1 ö
= t1 ç 1 - m ÷ + t2 çè 1 - m ÷ø
v 1 è 1ø 2
Þ l / l0 = =
c m
æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
3 = 4 çè 1 - (4 / 3) ÷ø + 2 çè 1 - (3 / 2) ÷ø
i.e., l = l0/m = × 6000Å = 4500Å
4
(4) (d) Herer + 90º + r’ = 180º æ 3ö æ 2ö
= 4 çè 1 - ÷ø + 2 çè 1 - ÷ø = 1.67 cm.
Þ r’ = 90º – r 4 3
or, r’ = (90º – i) as Ð i = Ðr
C
Now, according to Snell’s law : (8) (d) Since v =
sin i = m sin r’ = m sin (90º – i) n
or, tan i = m The time taken are
or, i = tan–1 m = tan–1 (1.5) 20 (1.63) 20 (1.47)
(5) (b) Here the requirement is that i > c t2 = , t1 =
C C
m2 Therefore , the difference is
Þ sin i > sin c Þ sin i > m
1 20(1.63 - 1.47) 20 ´ 0.16
t2 - t1 = = = 1.07 × 10–8 sec.
sin a C 3 ´ 108
From Snell's law m1 = (9) (b) As the beam just suffers TIR at interface of region III
sin r
Also in DOBA and IV
r + i = 90° Þ r = (90 – i) Region I Region II Region III
Hence from equation (ii)
sin a = m1 sin(90 – i)
q n0 n0 n0
sin a
Þ cos i = m n0 2 6 8
1
2 q 0.2 m 0.6 m
æ sin a ö
sin i = 1 - cos 2 i = 1 - ç ÷ ...(iii) n n
è m1 ø nosin q
n0
sin q1 = 0 sin q2 = 0 sin 90°,
From equation (i) and (ii) 2 6 8
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 50 139
If the net deviation for the mean ray is zero,
1 -1 1
sin q Þ q = sin (m – 1) A = (m' – 1) A'
8 8
(10) (b) The ray of light returns back from the polished face (m - 1) 1.517 - 1
or, A' = A= ´ 5° = 4.2°.
AC. (m '- 1) 1.620 - 1
The angular dispersion produced by the crown prism
A is
dv – dr = (mv – mr) A
E 30º and that by the flint prism is
i 60º d 'v – d 'r = (m'v – m'r) A'
D
30º The net angular dispersion is ,
F d = (mv – mr) A – (m'v – m'r) A'
= (1.523 –1.514) × 5° – (1.632–1.613) × 4.2°
B C = – 0.0348°.
The angular dispersion has magnitude 0.0348°.
\ ÐADE = 90º. From the figure it is clear that the angle (14) (a) mv = 1.5230, mr = 1.5145, w = ?
of refraction at face AB is 30º. Hence from Snell’s law Mean refractive index,
sin i m v + m r 1.5230 + 1.5145
m= =
sin r m=
2 2
sin i m = 1.5187
As m = 2 and r = 30º \ 2 = sin 30º m v - mr
w=
m -1
2 1
or sin i = = = sin 45º 1.5230 - 1.5145 0.0085
2 2 = = = 0.0163
1.5187 - 1 0.5187
\ i = 45º
(11) (a) A = r1 + r2 = 60 .......(1) (15) (c) Here, w = 0.021; m = 1.53; w ' = 0.045;
In minimum deviation position m' = 1.65; A' = 4.2°
r1 = r2 .......(2) For no dispersion, wd+w'd'=0
From eqs. (1) and (2) or w A (m – 1) + w ' A ' (m – 1) = 0
A = 2r1 = 60º w ' A ' ( m '- 1)
\ r1 = 30º or A = –
w ( m - 1)
sin i sin 50º 0.045 ´ 4.2 ´ (1.65 - 1)
\n= = = 1.532 =– = – 11.04°
sin r sin 30º 0.021 ´ (1.53 - 1)
A + dm 60 + d m Net deviation,
sin sin d + d ' = A (m – 1) + A' (m ' – 1)
n= 2 or 1.532 = 2
= – 11.04 (1.53 –1) + 4.2 (1.65 –1)
A sin 30 °
sin = – 11.04 × 0.53 + 4.2 × 0.65
2
= – 5.85 + 2.73 = 3.12°
60 + d m 1.532 (16) (d) At first face of the prism as i1 = 0,
sin = = 0.766 sin 0 = 1.5 sin r 1 i.e., , r1 = 0
2 2
And as for a prism
\ dm = 40º r1 + r2 = A so r2 = A ......(1)
(12) (b) d1 = d2 But at second face, as the ray just fails to emerge
(m1 – 1) A1 = (m2 – 1) A2
i.e., r2 = qC ......(2)
(1.5 – 1) 6 = (1.6 – 1) A2
So from Eqn,.(1) and (2)
A2 = 5º
A = r2 = q C
(13) (a) The deviation produced by the crown prism is
d = (m – 1) A é1ù é2ù
and by the flint prism is But as qC = sin –1 ê ú = sin –1 ê ú = 42°
ë ûm ë3û
d ' = (m' – 1) A' So A = 42°
The prisms are placed with their angles inverted with (17) (a) Here, mb= 1.532 and mr = 1.514 A = 8° .
respect to each other . The deviations are also in Angular dispersion
opposite directions. Thus, the net deviation is = (mb – mr) A = (1.532 – 1.514) × 8
D = d – d ' = (m – 1) A – (m' – 1) A' ...........(1) = 0.018 × 8 = 0.144° .
140 DPP/ P 50
(18) (c) Velocity of the ball when it reaches at the height of 12.8 (21) (c) dPrism = (µ - 1)A = (1.5 - 1)4° = 2°
m. above the surface is v = 2 ´10 ´ 7.2 = 12 m/s
\ dTotal = dPrism + dMirror
Height of the ball from surface as seen by fish
= (µ – 1)A + (180 – 2i) = 2° + (180 – 2 × 2) = 178°
dh ¢ dh (22) (a) From the following figure
h¢ = mh Þ =m
dt dt
u=0
r i
20 u = 12 m/s a
12.8 m n
r + i = 90° Þ i = 90° – r
For ray not to emerge from curved surface i > C
Þ sin i > sin C Þ sin (90° – r) > sin C Þ cos r > sin C
1 ì 1ü
4 Þ 1 - sin 2 r > í\ sin C = ý
Þ v¢ = mv = ´ 12 = 16 m/s. n î nþ
3
(19) (a) Suppose, the angle of the crown prism needed is A and
that of the flint prism is A’. We have
Þ 1-
n
sin 2 a
2
n
>
1
2 n
Þ 1>
1
2 (1 + sin 2 a )
m - mr Þ n2 > 1 + sin2 a Þ n > 2 {sin i ® 1}
w= v or,, mv – mr = (m – 1) w
m -1 Þ Least value = 2
The angular dispersion produced by the crown prism
is (23) (a) w depends only on nature of material.
(mv – mr) A = (m –1) w A (24) (a)
Similarly , the angular dispersion produced by the flint (25) (c);
prism is (m´ – 1) w´ A´ 26. (b), 27 (a)
For achromatic combination , the net dispersion should The normal shift produced by a glass slab is,
be zero. Thus ,
(m – 1) w A = (m´ – 1) w´ A´ æ 1ö æ 2ö
Dx = ç1 - ÷ t = ç1 - ÷ (6) = 2cm
è mø è 3ø
A ' (m - 1) w 0.517 ´ 0.03
or , = = = 0.50 ......(1)
A (m '- 1) w ' 0.621 ´ 0.05 i.e., for the mirror, the object is placed at a distance
(32 – Dx) = 30 cm from it.
The deviation in the yellow ray produced by the crown
Applying mirror formula,
prism is d = (m – 1) A and by the flint prism is d´ = (m´
– 1) A´. The net deviation produced by the combination 1 1 1
+ =
is v u f
d – d´ = (m – 1) A – (m´ – 1) A´
or 1° = 0.517 A – 0.621 A´ ......(2) 1 1 1
+ =-
Solving (1) and (2 ), A = 4.8° and A´ = 2.4°. Thus, the v 30 10
crown prism should have its refracting angle 4.8° and or, v = – 15 cm
that of the flint prism should be 2.4°. (a) When x = 5 cm: The light falls on the slab on its return
(20) (a) For TIR at AC journey as shown. But the slab will again shift it by a
q>C distance.
B A
Þ sin q ³ sin C q
6 cm
1 q
Þ sin q ³
w µg I
µw C Dx
Þ sin q ³
µg
8 15 cm
Þ sin q ³
9
Dx = 2 cm. Hence, the final real image is formed at a
distance (15 + 2) = 17 cm from the mirror.
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 50 141
(b) When x = 20 cm: This time also the final image is at a (29) (b) The velocity of light in a material medium depends upon
distance of 17 cm from the mirror but it is virtual as its colour (wavelength). If a ray of white light is incident
shown. on a prism, then on emerging the different colours are
deviated through different angles.
Also dispersive power w =

( mV - m R )
( mY - 1)
i.e. w depends upon only m
I
(30) (c) Apparent shift for different coloured letter is
Dx
æ 1ö
d = h ç1 - ÷
è mø
(28) (b) As rays of all colours emerge in the same direction (of Þ lR > lV so mR < mV
incidence of white light), hence there is no dispersion, Hence dR < dV i. e. red coloured letter raised least.
but only lateral displacement in a glass slab.
DPP/ P 51 141
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 51
1. (a). According to sign convention, it is given that
2 - 60 40
u = – 0.6 m, R = 0.25 m, µ1 = 1 (air), µ2 = 1.5 v= ´ =- = – 3.63 cm
3 11 11
\ AI = 3.63 cm
3. (c).
u v
Therefore, using x1 f f x2
µ1 µ2 µ2 - µ1 , we get
- + = • • • • •
u v R O F1 F2 I
1.5 1 1.5 - 1 1 0.5
= + =– +
v (- 0.6) 0.25 0.6 0.25
5 1
=– +2= As in case of thin lens the distance of either foci from the
3 3
optical centre is f ,
Þ v = 4.5 m
| u | = ( f + x1 ) and | v | = ( f + x2 )
The image is formed on the other side of the object (i.e.
inside the refracting surface). Substituting thses values of u and v in lens formula with
2. (a). On viewing from the closer surface A (near to object) proper sign
: 1 1 1
- =
The final image is formed at I. ( f + x 2 ) - ( f + x1 ) f
x1 + x 2 + 2f 1
=
or ( f + x1 )( f + x 2 ) f
i.e., fx1 + fx2 + 2f 2 = f 2 + fx1+ fx2 + x1 x2
O C or, x1 x2 = f 2
A
A
1cm
· B
I O C Far 4. (b). According to Lens-maker’s formula :
Nearing surface
surface 1 é 1 1 ù mL
= (m – 1) ê - ú with m =
f R
ë 1 R 2û m M
From sign convention Here f = 30 cm and R1 =10 cm and R2 = ¥

u = OA = – 4 cm, v = ?
1 é1 1ù
R = AC = – 5cm So, =(m–1) ê - ú
30 ë10 ¥ û
µ2 2
µ= µ = 3 3m – 3 = 1 or, m = ( 4 / 3 )
1 5. (a). For combination of lenses
m 1 µ -1 2/3 1 2/3 -1 1 1 1 1 1 25 1
- = Þ v +4 = -5 = + = + = =
v u R f f1 f 2 10 15 150 6
Therefore, f = 6 cm.
2 1 1 4 - 15 - 11
Þ = - = =
3v 15 4 60 60
EBD_7156
142 DPP/ P 51
6. (c). Let f2 is the focal length of the diverging lens. Then , 9. (b). The focal length of lens in water is given by
1 1 1
= + a mg -1 1.2 - 1
f f1 f2 fl = fa = 1.2 fa
a mg -1
-1 1.33
It is given that f1 = +20 cm, f = 30 cm a ml
1 1 1
= + 0.2 ´ 1.33
30 20 f 2 fl = - fa
0.13
1 1 1 2-3 1 Hence f is negative and as such it behaves as a divergent
or f = 30 - 20 = 60 = - 60 lens.
2
10. (a). The focal length of an equiconvex lens is given by
Thus f2 = – 60 cm
7. (a). As radius of curvature of silvered surface is 22 cm, so, 1 2 (m - 1)
=
f R
1
It is given that = + 5 and m = 1.5
f
2 (1.5 - 1)
Therefore, 5 =
R
1
or R = metre = 20 cm
5
11. (b). The question is based on the conventional method of
R -22 measurement of focal length by displacement method.
fM = = = –11 cm = – 0.11 m According to this method where D is the distance between
2 2
object and the image, and x is the displacement given to
1 1 1 the object.
and hence, PM = – = = D
f M -0.11 0.11 From the data x = 25 cm and D = 75 cm .
Further as the focal length of lens is 20 cm, i.e. 0.20 m, its Thus
power will be given by : (75)2 - (25) 2 (75 - 25) (75 + 25)
f= =
1 1 4 ´ 75 4 ´ 75
PL = = D
f L 0.20
50 ´ 100 50
Now as in image formation, light after passing through the = = = 16.7 cm
4 ´ 75 3
lens will be reflected back by the curved mirror the lens
again P = PL + PM + PL = 2PL + PM A1 A2
12. (c). m1 = and m2
2 1 210 O O
i.e. P = + = D A1A 2
0.20 0.11 11 Þ m1m2 =
So the focal length of equivalent mirror O2
Also it can be proved that m1m2 = 1
1 11 110
F=– =- m=- cm So O = A1A 2
P 210 21
i.e. the silvered lens behaves as a concave mirror of focal 13. (c). Effective power P = P1 + P2 = 4 – 3 = 1D
length (110/21) cm. So for object at a distance 10 cm in 14. (d). One part of combination will behave as converging
front of it, lens and the other as diverging lens of same focal length.
As such total power will be zero.
1 1 21 15. (c). Let the image of an object at O is formed at the same
+ =- i.e. v = –11 cm
v -10 110 point as shown in figure. The distance of O from the plane
i.e. image will be 11 cm in front of the silvered lens surface is x. The rays suffer refraction at first surface
8. (b). On covering the lens half by a black paper will reduce (curved) as they reach lens. After wards become parallel
the intensity of image and not the part of image. So full and gets reflected form plane surface and so retrace the
image is formed. path and image is formed at O itself.
DPP/ P 51 143
20 ´ 100 cm 40 ´ 100
So – =
3.5 cm u
x i.e., u = – 7 cm
· i.e., film is at a distance of 7 cm in front of projection lens.
O
And from lens formula 1 - 1 = 1 , here we have
v u f
1 1 1
m 1 m -1 - = or f @ 7 cm = 70 mm
- = 4000 -7 f
v u R
[as ( 1/4000) << (1/7) ]
u = – x, v = ¥ i.e., focal length of projection lens is 70 mm.
m 1 m -1 20. (a). As final image is at 25 cm in front of eye piece
+ =
¥ x R 25
1 1 1
- = i.e., ue = –
R -25 u e 5 6
x=
m -1
ve -25
As such O behaves as equivalent to centre of curvature of And so, me = = =6 ...(1)
u e (-25 / 6)
equivalent concave mirror.
Now for objective,
R v = L – ue = 20 – (25/6) = (95/6)
\ Radius = x =
m -1 So if object is at a distance u from the objective,
16. (a). As here f = 10 cm and v = 5m = 500 cm
6 1 1 95
- = i.e., u = – cm
1 1 1 95 u 0.95 94
So from lens formula - = , we have
v u f i.e. object is at a distance (95/94) cm in front of field lens.
1 1 1 é 500 ù v (95 / 6) é 94 ù
- = i.e., u=– ê cm = = -ê ú
ë 49 úû
Also, m = ...(2)
500 u 10 u (-95 / 94) ë6û
v 500 So total magnification,

So that m= = = – 49
u -500 / 49 é 94 ù
M = m xme = – ê ú × (6) = – 94
Here negative sign means the image is inverted with respect ë6û
to object. Now as here object is (2 cm × 2cm ) so the size
i.e., final image is inverted, virtual and 94 times that of
of picture on the screen
object.
Ai = ( 2 × 49 cm) × ( 2 × 49cm) = ( 98 × 98) cm2
21. (a). As object is distant, i.e., u = – ¥ , so
17. (a). As power of a lens is reciprocal of focal length in m,
1 1 1
1 1 - = i.e. v = f0 = 12 cm
P= = diopter = 20 D v -¥ f 0
-2 0.05
5 ´ 10 m
i.e. objective will form the image IM at its focus which is
18. (b). For relaxed eye, MP is minimum and will be
at a distance of 12 cm from O. Now as eye- piece of focal
D 25 length – 4 cm forms image I at a distance of 24 cm from it,
MP = = = 5×
f 5 24
1 1 1
While for strained eye, MP is maximum and will be - = Þ ue = = 4.8 cm.
-24 u e -4 5
D i.e, the distance of IM from eye lens EA is 4.8 cm. So the
MP = 1 + = 1 + 5 = 6×
f length of tube L = OA – EA = 12 – 4.8 = 7.2 cm.
I v
19. (a). As in case of projector, m = =
O u
EBD_7156
144 DPP/ P 51
26. (a) For lens L2, image must form at centre of curvature of
the curved surface after refraction through plane part
I f0=12 cm
µ2 µ
+ w =0
> f0 fe – R2 x '
4.8 cm
q0
> q
ue Þ x¢ = 8 cm
>> O E A
(
)
>>
(
)q IM
27. (b) Length of tube = x + x¢ = 18 cm
q0
B 28. (a) Focal length of lens immersed in water is four times
L= 7.2 cm >> >
the focal length of lens in air. It means
24 cm
fw = 4fa = 4×10 =40 cm
29. (d) Focal length of the lens depends upon its refractive
22. (d) In case of astronomical telescope if object and final
image both are at infinity. 1
index as µ ( m - 1) .
MP = – (f0/fe) and L = f0 + fe f
So here –(f0/fe) = – 5 and f0 + fe = 36
Since mb > mr so fb < fr
Solving these for f0 and fe, we get
Therefore, the focal length of a lens decreases when red
f0 = 30 cm and fe = 6 cm
light is replaced by blue light.
1 30. (b) The light gathering power (or brightness) of a telescope
23. (a) Resolving power of microscope µ
l µ (diameter)2. So by increasing the objective diameter even
far off stars may produce images of optimum brightness.
24. (a) Light gathering power µ Area of lens aperture or d2
25. (b) For lens L1, ray must move parallel to the axis after
refraction
µ1 µw µ1 – µw
+ = Þ x = 10cm
¥ x R1
DPP/ P 52 145
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 52
From eqs. (1) and (2)
I1 9
1. (d) =
I2 1 2 ´ 51 ´ 10-8
d= = 5.1 × 10-4 m
2 ´ 10-3
2
é I1 ù
ê + 1ú 2 Imax
-1
Imax
=ê
I2 ú = é 9 + 1ù Imax - I min I
ê ú ê ú 7. (b) V = = min .... (1)
Imin I1 ë 9 - 1û Imax + Imin Imax
ê - 1ú +1
ëê I2 ûú Imin
Imax 42 4 æ I1 ö
2
= =
Imin 22 1 ç +1 ÷
Imax ç I2 ÷
2. (a) a1 = 6 units, a2 = 8 units =
Imin ç I1 ÷ .... (2)
ç -1 ÷
2 ç I ÷
é a1 ù 2 è 2 ø
é6 ù
ê + 1ú +1
Imax ë a 2 û
= = ëê 8 ûú According to question
Imin é a 2 2
ù é6 ù I1 1
1
ê a - 1ú êë 8 - 1úû = .... (3)
ë 2 û I2 4
From eqs. (2) and (3)
Imax 49
= 2
Imin 1 æ 1 ö 9
ç +1÷
3. (b) The separation between the sucessive bright fringes Imax 4 ÷ = 4 =9 .... (4)
=ç
is- Imin ç 1 ÷ 1
ç -1 ÷
Dl 1´ 600 ´10 -9 è 4 ø 4
b= =
d 0.1 ´ 10 -3 From eqs. (1) and (4)
b = 6.0 mm.
4. (b) wa = l/d [9 - 1] 8
V= = = 0.8
[9 + 1] 10
(w a ) water l water
\ wa µ l Þ =
wa l (m - 1)t (1.6 - 1) ´ 7 ´ 10 -6
8. (c) l = =
n 7
(w a ) water l
Þ = l = 6 × 10–7 meter Þ l = 6000 Å
wa m water l
1
Þ (wa)water = 0.15° 9. (d) b µ \ d On increasing d three times
d
5. (b) I' = I1 + I2 + 2 I1 I2 cos f b will become 1/3 times.
10. (b) \ PR = d Þ PO = d secq and CO = PO cos 2q
I1 = I, I2 = 9I, f = p
= d sec q cos 2q is
I' = I + 9I + 2 9I2 cos p = 10I – 6I = 4I O
Q R
Dl qq
6. (a) d = .... (1)
b
C
According to quesion.
l = 5100 × 10-10m
q
2
b= × 10–2 m .... (2) A
10 P
D = 2m, d = ?. B
EBD_7156
146 DPP/ P 52
Path difference between the two rays
D = CO + PO = (d sec q + d secq cos 2q) P
Phase difference between the two rays is
f = p (One is reflected, while another is direct)
Therefore condition for constructive interference Y
S1
should be
q q
l 3l d
D = , .......
2 2
l S2
or d sec q(1 + cos 2q) = Dx
2
D
or
d
cos q
(2 cos 2 q =
l
2
)Þ cos q =
l
4d As Dx = d sin q
11. (b) n1l1 = n2l2
10 × 7000 = n2 × 5000 2p
Phase difference f = (Path difference)
n2 = 14 l
12. (a, c) Path difference between the rays reaching infront of
2p 2p
slit S1 is. = ( d sin q ) = (150 sin q) = p sin q
S1P – S2P = (b2 + d2)1/2 – d l 300
For distructive interference at P IR = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 cos q
S1 P Here I1 = I2 and f = p sin q
æ p sin q ö
\ IR = 2I1 [(p sin q)] = 4I1 cos2 ç ÷
è 2 ø
b
æ p sin q ö
S2 IR will be maximum when cos2 ç ÷ =1
d è 2 ø
\ (IR)max = 4I1 = Io
( 2n - 1) l
S1P – S2P = æ p sin q ö
2 Hence I = Io cos2 ç ÷
è 2 ø
( 2n - 1) l If q = 0, then I = Io cosq = Io
i.e., (b2 + d2)1/2 – d =
2 If q = 30°, then I = Io cos2 (p/4) = Io/2
1/ 2 If q = 90°, then I = Io cos2(p/2) = 0
æ b2 ö ( 2n - 1) l
Þ d ç1 + ÷ -d = 15. (b) I = R2 = a12 + a22 + 2a1 a2 cos d
ç d2 ÷ 2
è ø
p
= I + 4I + 4I cos = 5I
æ b2 ö ( 2n - 1) l 2
Þ d ç1 + + ...... ÷ - d = 16. (b) Suppose the amplitude of the light wave coming from
ç 2d 2 ÷ 2
è ø the narrower slit is A and that coming from the wider
(Binomial Expansion) slit is 2A. The maximum intensity occurs at a place
where constructive interference takes place. Then the
b ( 2n - 1) l b2 resultant amplitude is the sum of the individual
Þ = Þ = 2n - 1 d
2d 2 ( ) amplitudes.
Thus,
b2 b 2 Amax = 2A + A = 3A
For n = 1,2 ............, l =
,
d 3d The minimum intensity occurs at a place where
13. (b) Distance of mth bright fringe from central fringes is destructive interference takes place. The resultant
mDl amplitude is then difference of the individual
Xm = amplitudes.
d
Thus, Amin = 2A – A = A.
c 3×108 Imax (Amax )2 (3A)2
14. (a, b) For microwave l = = = 300 m \ = = =9
f 106 Imin (Amin )2 (A)2
DPP/ P 52 147
I1 2 lD
17. (b) = 23. (a) Fringe width b =
I2 1 d
a1 I 2 According to de Broglie,
= 1 =
a2 I2 1 h h
Wavelength l = =
At the point of constructive interference, the resultant p 2meV
amplitude becomes (a1 + a2) = 2 + 1 at the point of As V increases, l decreases, b decreases.
destructive interference, the resultant amplitude is 1
Also b µ and b µ D .
(a1 – a2) = 2 –1 d
Imax (a1 + a 2 ) 2 ( 2 + 1) 2 (m - 1)tD
\ I = = = 34 24. (a) n =
min (a1 - a 2 ) 2 ( 2 - 1) 2 d
18. (d) For destructive interference : lD D b
Path difference= S1 P – S2 P = (2n –1) l/2. but b = Þ =
d d l
For n = 1, S1 P – S2 P= (2 × 1 – 1) l/2 = l/2.
n = (m – 1) t b/l
n =2, S1 P– S2 P = (2 × 2 – 1) l/2 = 3l/2.
20b = (m – 1) 2.5 × 10–3 { b/5000 × 10–8}
n = 3, S1 P – S2 P = (2× 3–1) l/2 = 5l/2.
n = 4, S1P – S2 P = (2 × 4 – 1) l/2 = 7l/2. 20 ´ 5000 ´ 10-8
n = 5,S1 P – S2 P = (2 × 5 – 1) l/2= 9l/2. m–1= = 0.4
n =6,S1 P – S2 P = (2× 6– 1) l/2 = 11l/2. 2.5 ´ 10-3
So, destructive pattern is possible only for path m = 1.4.
difference = 11l/2. dy
19. (b) The distance of a bright fringe from zero order fringe is 25. (a) S1P – S2P =
D
given by-
For central maxima,
nlD
Xn = dy
d – d sin f = 0
Dx = (n 0 + kt)
D & d is constant D
n1 l1 = n2 l2
n1 = 16, l1 = 6000 Aº, l2 = 4800 Å P
n1l1 16 ´ 6000
n2 = = = 20
l2 4800 y
20. (c) n1 l1 = n2 l2 for bright fringe 2
n = (n0 + kt)
n (7.5 × 10–5) = (n + 1) (5 × 10–5)
d f O
5.0 ´ 10-5 l
n= = 2.
2.5 ´ 10-5 S1
nlD 3lD
21. (b) Xn = or X3 = D
d d
3 ´ (5000 ´10-8 cm) ´ 200cm

X3 = = 1.5 cm. D sin f
0.02cm \y = ( y -coordinates of central maximum).
n0 + kt
2 dy – kD sin f
Imax æa +a ö a +a 26. (b) = = velocity of central maximum.
22. (b, d) =9 Þ ç 1 2 ÷ =9 Þ 1 2 =3 dt (n0 + kt )2
Imax è a1 – a 2 ø a1 – a 2
27. (d) For central maxima to be formed at O
a1 3 + 1 a1 æn ö
Þ = Þ a = 5 There I1 : I2 = 4 : 1 n ' ç –1÷ b = d sin f
a2 3 – 1 2 è n' ø
EBD_7156
148 DPP/ P 52
Here n' = n0 + kt, n = refractive index of plate. when a white light as a source is used, the central fringe
d sin f is white around which few coloured fringes are
n = n0 + kt + observed on either side.
b
28. (d) When d is negligibly small, fringe width b which is 30. (d) When one of slits is covered with cellophane paper,
proportional to 1/d may become too large. Even a single the intensity of light emerging from the slit is decreased
fringe may occupy the whole screen. Hence the pattern (because this medium is translucent). Now the two
cannot be detected. interfering beam have different intensities or
29. (d) In Young's experiments fringe width for dark and white amplitudes. Hence intensity at minima will not be zero
fringes are same while in Young's double slit experiment and fringes will become indistinct.
148 DPP/ P 53
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 53
1. (b). The distance of first diffraction minimum from the
central principal maximum x = lD/d 12.5 ´ 10-3
q = l/a =
2
x l l
\ sin q = = Þd=
D d sin q 12.5 ´ 10-3 12.5 ´ 10-3 ´ 10-3
l= ×a=
2 2
5000 ´ 10-8 l = 6.25 × 10–6 m = 6250 mm
Þd= = 2 × 5 × 10–5
sin 30º 6. (a). Slit width = a = 0.2mm,
Þ d = 1.0 × 10–4 cm.
2ld
2. (b). Here, l1 = 5890Å = 5890 × 10–10 m b=
l2 = 5896 Å = 5896 × 10–10 m a
a =2mm = 2 × 10–6 m, D = 2m b 2l
Angular width Wq = =
3l1 x1 D a
For first maxima, sin q = =
2a D 2 ´ 6328
q= = 0.36°
3l1D 3l 2 D 0.2
Þ x1 = and x2 = 7. (a). Here distance of the screen from the slit,
2a 2a
D = 2m, a = ?, x = 5 mm
\ spacing between the first maxima of two sodium lines
= 5 × 10–3 m,l = 5000Å
3D = 5000 × 10–10 m
= x2 – x1 = (l – l1) For the first minima, sin q = l/a = x/D,
2a 2
3 ´ 2(5896 - 5890) ´ 10-10 Dl 2 ´ 5000 ´ 10-10

a= = = 2 × 10–4 m
= =9× 10–4 m. x 5 ´ 10-3
2 ´ 2 ´ 10-6
8. (d). Here, l = 6500Å = 6.5 × 10–7 m, a = 0.5 mm =
ax 5 × 10–4 m,
3. (d). = nl
f D = 1.8 m
Angular separation of two dark bands on each side of central
ax 0.3 ´ 10-3 ´ 5 ´ 10-3 bright band 2q = 2l/a
l= =
n.f 3 ´1 Actual distance between them,
–7
l = 5 × 10 m 2x = 2l/a x D
l = 5000Å 2 ´ 6.5 ´ 10-7 ´ 18
2x =
æ lö 5 ´ 10-4
4. (b). q = sin–1 çè ÷ø .....(1)
a 2x = 4.68 × 10–3 m
According to question 2fl
l = 2 × 10–3 m 9. (c). Width of central maxima =
a
a = 4 × 10–3 m .....(2)
From equation (1) and (2) 2 ´ 2 ´ 6000 ´ 10-10
= = 12 mm
æ 1ö 0.2 ´ 10-3
q = sin–1 çè ÷ø
2 l
q = 30° 10. (a). q = .....(a)
a
5. (a). Here the width of principal maxima is 2.5 mm, therefore
its half width is x
q= .....(b)
f
b 2.5
= = 1.25 × 10–3m From eqs. (a) and (b)
2 2
l x
=
b / 2 12.5 ´ 10 -3 a f
Diffraction angle q = =
D 2 fl
\aq=l x= .....(c)
a
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 53 149
According to question x = ?, f = 40 cm Now, if I0 is the intensity of unpolarised light incident
l = 5896 × 10–8 cm on polaroid P1, the intensity of light transmitted through
a = 0.5 × 10–1 cm .....(d) it,
From eqs. (c) and (d)
1 1 W
-8 I1 = I0 = I0 = (32) = 16 2 ....(2)
40 ´ 5896 ´ 10 2 2 m
x= 96 = 0.047cm
5 ´ 10-2 Now as angle between transmission axes of polaroids
P1 and P2 is q, in accordance with Malus law, intensity
1.22l 1.22l of light transmitted through P2 will be
11. (a). dq = or a =
a dq I2 = I1 cos2q = 16 cos2q [from Eq. (2)] ....(3)
According to question And as angle between transmission axes of P2 and P3
is f, light transmitted through P3 will be
10-3 ´ p
dq = 10–3 degree = Radian, I3 = I2cos2f = 16 cos2q cos2f [from Eq.(3)]
180 Above equation in the light of (1) becomes,
l = 5 × 10–5 I3 = 16 cos2q cos2 (90º – q) = 4(sin2q)2 ....(4)
1.22 ´ 5 ´ 10-5 ´ 180 According to given problem, I3 = 3 W/m2
a=
10-3 ´ 3.14 So, 4(sin 2q)2 = 3 i.e., sin2q = ( 3 /2)
a = 3.5 cm or 2q = 60º i.e. q = 30º
12. (a). Since the reflected light is very highly polarised, it Further in accordance with Eq. (4), I3 will be max. when
implies that incident light falls at polarising angle of sin 2q = max., i.e.,
incidence qP. From Brewster's law, sin 2q = 1 or 2q = 90º, i.e., q = 45º
m = tanqp 16. (c) In double refraction light rays always splits into two
\ qP = tan–1 (m) = tan–1 (4/3) = 53.1º rays (O–ray & E–ray). O–ray has same velocity in all
Since qP is the angle which the rays from sun make direction but E– ray has different velocity in different
with the normal to the interface, angle with the interface direction.
will be 90º – 53.1º = 36.9º.
For calcite me < m0 Þ ve > v0
13. (a). Angle of incident light with the surface is 30º. Hence
angle of incidence = 90º – 30º = 60º. Since reflected For quartz me > m0 Þ v0 > ve
light is completely polarised, therefore, incidence takes 17. (c) At polarizing angle, the reflected and refracted rays
place at polarising angle of incidence qp. are mutually perpendicular to each other.
\ qp = 60º 18. (d) The amplitude will be A cos60° = A/2
Using Brewster's law
m = tan qp = tan 60º 2lD
19. (c) Width of central maxima =
\ m= 3 d
14. (d). If unpolarised light is passed through a polariod P1, its
2 ´ 2.1 ´ 5 ´10 -7
intensity will become half. = =1.4×10–3 m = 1.4 mm
0.15 ´ 10 -2
1
So I1 = I with vibrations parallel to the axis of P1. 20. (a) Using d sinq = nl, for n = 1
2 0
Now this light will pass through second polaroid P2
l 550 ´ 10-9
whose axis is inclined at ana angle of 30º to the axis of sin q = = =10–3 = 0.001 rad
P1 and hence, vibrations of I1. So in accordance with d 0.55 ´ 10 -3
Malus law, the intensity of light emerging from P2 will
be A 1
21. (b) A = np dl Þ nd = = constant Þ n µ
pl d
2
æ 1 ö æ 3ö 3 (n = number of blocked HPZ) on decreasing d, n
I2 = I1 cos2 30º = çè I0 ÷ø ç ÷ = I0
2 2
è ø 8 increases, hence intensity decreases.
I2 3 I0
= 22. (b) Intensity of polarized light =
I0 8 = 37.5 % 2
15. (a). If q is the angle between the transmission axes of first I0 I 0
polaroid P1 and second P2 while f between the Þ Intensity of untransmitted light = I 0 - =
2 2
transmission axes of second polaroids P2 and P3, then
23. (a)
according to given problem,
q + f = 90º or f = (90º – q) ....(1)
150 DPP/ P 53
24. (a) It magnitude of light vector varies periodically during 28. (a) When a polaroid is rotated in the path of unpolarised
it's rotation, the tip of vector traces an ellipse and light light, the intensity of light transmitted from polaroid
is said to be elliptically polarised. This is not in nicol remains undiminished (because unpolarised light
prism. contains waves vibrating in all possible planes with
rotated in path of plane polarised light, its intensity
rn2 will vary from maximum (when the vibrations of the
25. (a) Multiple focii of zone plate given by f p =
( 2 p - 1) l , plane polarised light are parallel to the axis of the
polaroid) to minimum (when the direction of the
where p = 1, 2, 3 ........ vibrations becomes perpendicular to the axis of the
26. (a) Angular width is the angle subtended by the distance crystal). Thus using polaroid we can easily verify that
between first minima on either side at the centre of the whether the light is polarised or not.
slit. It is given by f = 2 q , where q is the angle of 29. (d) The nicol prism is made of calcite crystal. When light
diffraction. is passed through calcite crystal, it breaks up into two
For first diffraction minimum, a sin q = 1 l rays
l (i) the ordinary ray which has its electric vector
or sin q = l/a or q=
a perpendicular to the principal section of the crystal and
(ii) the extra ordinary ray which has its electric vector
2l
\ Angular width f = 2 q = i.e. f µl parallel to the principal section. The nicol prism is made
a
in such a way that it eliminates one of the two rays by
f1 l1 f 70 total internal reflection, thus produces plane polarised
= ; \ l 2 = l1 2 = 6000 ´ = 4200 Å
f2 l 2 f1 100 light. It is generally found that the ordinary ray is
27. (b) On immersing in liquid, a wavelength l = 6000 Å must eliminated and only the extra ordinary ray is transmitted
be behaving as l' = 4200 Å to get the same decrease in through the prism. The nicol prism consists of two
angular width. Therefore, refractive index of medium calcite crystal cut at - 68° with its principal axis joined
l 6000 by a glue called Canada balsam.
m= = = 1.43.
l¢ 4200 30. (d) The clouds consists of dust particles and water droplets.
Their size is very large as compared to the wavelength
of the incident light from the sun. So there is very little
scattering of light. Hence the light which we receive
through the clouds has all the colours of light. As a
result of this, we receive almost white light. Therefore,
the cloud are generally white.
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 54 151
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 54
0.101 8. (b).
0.101
1. (a). la = Å, V =
V 0.004 6.62 ´ 10-34
l=
V = 25.25 V , V = 637.5 V 2 ´ 9.1 ´ 10-31 ´ 13.6 ´ 1.6 ´ 10-19
Ea =qa × Va » 1275 eV Þ l = 3.3 × 10–10 m = 3.3 Å
h 12.27
2. (d). l = 9. (c). l = Å
mv V
c 3 ´ 108 Þ V = 40–20 = 20 Volt
Q v= = = 1.5 × 107 m/sec
20 20 12.27
h = 6.626 × 10–34 J-s, m = 1.67 × 10–27 kg Þ l= Å = 2.75 Å
20
6.626 ´10 -34 150
\ l= 10. (d). Wavelength of electrons is l = Å
1.67 ´10-27 ´ 1.5 ´ 107 V
Þ l = 2.64 × 10–14 m Now, electrons have energy of 40 KeV, therefore they
1 1 1 are accelerated through a potential difference of 40 ×
3. (a). Q l µ Þ le µ , lp µ 103 volt.
m me mp
150
mp l= = 0.061 Å
le 40 ´ 103
\ l = me
p \ Resolving limit of electron microscope = 0.061 Å
11. (d). The linear momentum of the photon
h h
4. (c). l = Þv= , h 6.63 ´ 10-34 kg - m
mv ml = = = 5.43 × 10–27
l 122 ´ 10 -9 s
6.6 ´ 10-34
v= = 7.2 × 105 m/s p
9.1 ´ 10-31 ´ 10 ´ 10-10 Q p = mv Þ v =
m
1
5. (b). l µ
m
, 5.43 ´ 10-27
Þv= = 3.25 m/s
1.67 ´ 10-27
le mp 1836
= = 150
lp me 1 12. (b). V = volt, to determine the p.d. through which it was
le2
h accelerated to achieve the given de-broglie wavelength.
6. (a). lp = Then the same p.d. will retard it to rest. Thus,
2m p ep V
150
h V= volt, V = 3765 Volt = 3.76 kV
Þ ld = 0.2 ´ 0.2
2md ed V
hc h
13. (b). lphoton = and lproton =
ld m p ep E 2me
\ = Q md = 2mp,
lp m d ed λ photon λ photon 1
2m
Þ =c Þ µ
λ electron E λ electron E
l mp ep 1
ed = ep Þ d = =
lp 2m p e p 2
7. (d). Kmax of photoelectrons doesn't depends upon intensity
of incident light.
152 DPP/ P 54
18. (b). P = 10 × 103 watt, n = ?, l = 300 m
1 2 hc hc 1 2
14. (d). hv – W0 = mvmax Þ l - l = 2 mvmax nhc
2 0 P=
lt
æ l0 - l ö 1 2 2hv æ l0 - l ö
Þ hc ç ll ÷ = 2 mvmax Þ vmax = ç ÷ 6.62 ´ 10-34 ´ 3 ´ 108 ´ n
è 0 ø m è ll 0 ø 104 =
300 ´ 1
When wavelength is l and velocity is v, then
300 ´ 104
n= = 1.5 × 1031
2hv æ l 0 - l ö 6.62 ´ 10-34 ´ 3 ´ 108
v= ç ÷ ....(i)
m è ll 0 ø
hc f0
19. (b). V0 = – = 3.74 – 1.07 = 2.67 V
3l el e
When wavelength is and velocity is 'v' then 20. (a). The stopping potential for curves a and b is same.
4
\ fa = fb
2hc é l 0 - ( 3l / 4 ) ù Also saturation current is proportional to intensity
v¢ = ê ú ...(ii) \ Ia < I b
m êë ( 3l / 4 ) ´ l 0 úû
21. (c). hn = hn0 + Ek
Divide equation (ii) by (i), we get 6.6 × 10-34 × 3 × 1015 = 4 × 1.6 × 10–19 + Ek
19.8 × 10-19 – 6.4 × 10-19 = Ek
v¢ él0 - ( 3l / 4 ) ùû ll 0 Ek = 13.4 × 10–19 J
= ë ´
v 3 l0 - l 1
ll0 Þ mv2max = 13.4 × 10–19
4 2
æ4ö
1/ 2 éël0 - ( 3l - 4 ) ùû 2 ´ 13.4 ´ 10-19
v¢ = v ç ÷ vmax =
è3ø l 0l m
æ4ö
1/ 2 2 ´ 13.4 ´ 10-19
i.e v¢ > v ç ÷ = = 1.73 × 106 m/s
è3ø 9 ´ 10-31
22. (b). The maximum kinetic energy is
h
15. (d). De-Broglie wavelength l = p hc 1242 eV - nm
Kmax = –f= – 2.5 eV
l 280 nm
1 = 4.4 eV – 2.5 eV = 1.9 eV
Þ lµ
p Stopping potential V is given by eV = Kmax
i.e. graph will be a rectangular hyperbola. K max 1.9
V= = eV = 1.9 V
16. (d). If the incident light be of threshold wavelength (l0), e e
then the stopping potential shall be zero. Thus 23. (a). Q 2 d sin f = nl
hc 6.6 ´ 10-34 ´ 3 ´ 108 (2d sin f)max 2d sin 90º

=
l0 = , l0 = lmax = n min 1 = 2 × 10 Å
f 4.2 ´ 1.6 ´ 10-19
l0 = 2.946 × 10–7 m = 2946 Å lmax = 20Å
\ Possible wavelengths are 5Å, 10Å and 20Å.
hn hn 0
17. (b). Relation between V0 – n., V0 = - 12400
e e 24. (c). lmin = Å = 1.24 Å
Put it in the form of y = mx – c, 10000
hn0 c 3 ´ 108
here V0 = y, n = x, =c nmax = = = 2.4×1018 Hz.
e l min 1.24 ´ 10-10
æ hö 12400
\ y = çè ÷ø x – c 25. (b) DE =
e 4500Å
h D = 2.75 eV
\m= For photoelectric effect, DE > W0 (work function).
e
EBD_7156
DPP/ P 54 153
26. (a) DE = W0 + E ; (Ek) = DE – W0
hv h
For maximum value of (Ek), W0 should be minimum 28. (c) Mass of moving photon m = 2 = and E = mc2
c cl
W0 for lithium = 2.3 eV
\ (Ek) = 2.75 – 2.3 = 0.45 eV 29. (c) Less work function means less energy is required for
ejecting out the electrons.
27. (c) The maximum magnitude of stopping potential will be
30. (a) de-Broglie wavelength associated with gas molecules
for metal of least work function.
\ required stopping potential is 1
varies as l µ
hv – f0 T
Vs = = 0.45 volt.
e
DPP/ P 55 153
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 55
2 8. (a) K.E. = - (T.E.)
1. (a) For n = 1 , maximum number of states = 2n = 2 and
9. (a) For Lyman series
for n = 2, 3, 4 maximum number of states would be 8,
18, 32 respectively, Hence number of possible elements c é 1 1 ù 3RC
vLyman = = Rc ê - ú=
= 2 + 8 + 18 + 32 = 60 l max ëê (1)
2
(2)2 úû 4
1 æ1 1 ö For Balmer series

2. (d) = RZ 2 ç 2 - ÷
l ç1 2 2 ÷ø é 1
è c 1 ù 5RC
vBalmer = = Rc ê - ú=
For di-ionised lithium the value of Z is maximum l max ëê (2)
2
(3)2 úû 36
3. (c) Lyman series lies in the UV region.
vLyman 27
4. (c) Transition A (n = ¥ to 1): Series limit of Lyman series \ =
vBalmer 5
Transition B (n = 5 to n = 2) Third spectral line of
Balmer series 1 æ 1 1 ö
10 (c) = Rç - ÷
Transition C (n = 5 to n = 3 ) : Second spectral line of l ç n2 n 2 ÷
è 1 2 ø
Paschen series
5. (b) Let the energy in A, B and C state be EA, EB and EC For first line of Lymen series n1 = 1 and n2 = 2
then from the figure For first line of Balmer series n2 = 2 and n2 = 3
l Lymen 5
l1 So, =
l Balmer 27
l3
l2 æ h ö
11. (d) Angular momentum L = n ç ÷
è 2p ø
h h
For this case n = 2 , hence L = 2 ´ =
( EC - EB ) + ( E B - E A ) = ( EC - E A ) 2p p
hc hc hc mv 2 1 e2 e
or + = 12. (c) = Þv=
l1 l 2 l3 a0 4 pe0 a02 4 pe0 a0 m
l1l 2 13. (d) We have to find the frequency of emitted photons. For
Þ l3 = emission of photons the transition must take place from
l1 + l2
a higher energy level to a lower energy level which are
6. (a) In the revolution of electron, coulomb force provides given only in options (c) and (d).
the necessary centripetal force Frequency is given by
Ze2 mv 2 Ze2 æ 1 1ö
Þ 2
= Þ mv 2 = hn = -13.6 ç - ÷
r r r çè n 2 n 2 ÷ø
2 1
1 2 Ze2 For transition from n = 6 to n = 2,

\ K.E. = mv =
2 2r -13.6 æ 1 1 ö 2 æ 13.6 ö
n1 = ç - 2÷ = ´ç ÷
e h è6 2
2 ø 9 è h ø
+r For transition from n = 2 to n = 1,
-13.6 æ 1 1 ö 3 æ 13.6 ö
1 1 n2 = - = ´ç ÷.
7. (a) P.E. µ - and K.E. µ h çè 22 12 ÷ø 4 è h ø
r r
As r increases so K.E. decreases but P.E. increases. \ n2 > n1
EBD_7156
154 DPP/ P 55
14. (d) E = - Z 2 ´13.6 eV = -9 ´13.6 eV = -122.4 eV 21. (a) Here radius of electron orbit r µ 1/ m and energy
E µ m , where m is the mass of the electron.
So ionisation energy = +122.4 eV
Hence energy of hypothetical atom
15. (c) For third line of Balmer series n1 = 2, n2 = 5
a0
E0 = 2 ´ (-13.6 eV ) = -27.2 eV and radius r0 =
1 é1 1 ù n12 n22 2
\ = RZ 2 ê - ú gives Z 2 =
l 2 2
êë n1 n2 úû (n22 - n12 )lR 2prn
22. (a) Time period, Tn = (in nth state)
On putting values Z = 2 vn
13.6 Z 2 -13.6(2) 2 i.e. Tn µ

rn
But rn µ n 2 and vn µ
1
From E = - = = -54.4 eV
n 2
(1) 2 vn n
é1 Therefore, Tn µ n 3 .
1 1 ù 1 é 1 1 ù 5R
16. (b) l = R ê 2 - 2 ú Þ l = Rê
2
- ú= Given Tn = 8Tn , Hence n1 = 2n 2. Þ n1 is even
ëê n1 n2 úû 3® 2 ëê (2) (3)2 úû 36 1 1
23. (d) 2.55eV = E4 – E2.
1 é 1 1 ù 3R Therefore other photon will have energy
and = Rê - ú=
l 4® 2 êë (2) 2
(4)2 úû 16 = E2– E1 = 10.2 eV.
Energy given to H-atom excitation = E2 – E1 = 12.75 eV.
l 20 20 Consider perfectly inelastic collision for other answer.
\ 4® 2 = Þ l 4® 2 = l0
l3®2 27 27
24. (a) Balmer series lies in the visible region.
1 é 1 1 ù 4
17. (a) = Rê - ú Þ l max = » 1213 Å 25. (b), 26. (d), 27. (a)
l max êë (1) 2 2
(2) úû 3R
Since 6 different types of photons are emitted implies 4C2
i.e. highest excitation state is n = 4
1 é 1 1ù 1
= Rê - ú Þ l min = » 910 Å Since emission energies are equal, lesser and greater so initial
and l 2 ¥ R
min ëê (1) úû state
18. (a) Maximum energy is liberated for transition En ® 1 and 12420 é1 1 ù
e= = 13.6Z2 ê - ú
minimum energy for En ® En-1 l ë 4 16 û
Þ Z2 = 16 Þ Z = 4
E1
Hence - E1 = 52.224 eV .....(i) 1 1
n2 E 4®1 = 13.6 (16) - = 20.4eV
1 16
E1 E1
and - = 1.224 eV ......(ii)
n 2
( n - 1) 2 1 1
E 4®3 = 13.6 (16) - = 10.6 eV
Solving equations (i) and (ii) we get 9 16
E1 = -54.4 eV and n = 5
28. (b) Bohr postulated that electrons in stationary orbits
13.6 Z 2 around the nucleus do not radiate.
Now E1 = - = -54.4 eV . Hence Z = 2 This is the one of Bohr’s postulate. According to this
12
the moving electrons radiate only when they go from
e0 n 2 h 2 one orbit to the next lower orbit.
19. (d) Radius R = 29. (b) Rutherford confirmed the repulsive force on a-particle
pnZe2
due to nucleus varies with distance according to inverse
Ze 2 mZ 2 e4 square law and that the positive charges are
Velocity v = and energy E = - 2 2 2 concentrated at the centre and not distributed
2e0nh 8e0 n h throughout the atom.
Now, it is clear from above expressions R.v µ n 30. (b) When the atom gets appropriate energy from outside,
20. (c) At closest distance of approach then this electron rises to some higher energy level.
Kinetic energy = Potential energy Now it can return either directly to the lower energy
level or come to the lowest energy level after passing
1 ( Ze)(2e)
Þ 5 ´ 106 ´1.6 ´10-19 = ´ through other lower energy lends, hence all possible
4pe0 r transitions take place in the source and many lines are
seen in the spectrum.
For uranium Z = 92, so r = 5.3 ´ 10 -12 cm
DPP/ P 56 155
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 56
1. (c). The energy produced per second is 9. (b). By the forumula N = N0e–lt
0.631×t
106 N 1 0.6931
= 1000 × 103 J= eV 6.25 × 1024 eV Given N = and l = Þ 20 = e 3.8
1.6 ´ 10-19 0 20 3.8
The number of fissions should be, thus Taking log of both sides
0.6931 ×t
6.25 ´ 1024 or log 20 = log10 e
number = = 3.125 × 1016 3.8
200 ´ 106
0.6931 ×t ´ 0.4343
2 or 1.3010 = Þ t = 16.5 days
2. (b). No. of atoms in 2kg 92 U235 = × NA 3.8
235
10. (b). A = 238 - 4 = 234, Z = 92 - 2 = 90
2 11. (a). Dm = 0.03 a.m.u., A = 4
= × (6.02 × 1026) = 5.12 × 1024
235 Dm ´ 931
Þ DE =
5.12 ´ 10 24 A
Fission rate = = 1.975 × 1018 per sec
30 ´ 24 ´ 60 ´ 60 0.03 ´ 931
Usable energy per fission = 185 MeV Þ DE = = 7 MeV
4
\ Power output 12. (a). Q DE = Dm × 931 MeV
= (185 × 106)(1.975 × 1018)(1.6 × 10–19) watt
= 58.4 × 106 watt = 58.46 MW DE 2.23
Þ Dm = = = 0.0024 a.m.u.
931 931
6 ´1023
3. (d). \ 6 gm of 6C12 contains atoms = and each
2 R Al (27)1/3 3 6
13. (a). R = = =
atom of 6C12 contains electron, protons and neutrons Te (125)1/3 5 10
= 6, 6, 6
14. (d). R = R0 A1/3 = 1.2 × 10-15 × (64)1/3
\ No. of electron, protons and neutron in 6 gm of
12 23 23 23 = 1.2 × 10–15 × 4 = 4.8 fm
6C = 18 × 10 , 18 × 10 , 18 × 10 15. (b). Number of protrons in nucleus = atomic number = 11
4. (c). Use r = Mass/volume
Number of electrons = number of protons = 11.
1.66 ´ 10-27 ´ 16 Number of neutrons = mass number A – atomic number Z
= = 2.35 × 1017 kg m-3 N = 24 – 11 = 13
(4 / 3)p(3 ´ 10 -15 )
16. (d). Q equivalent mass of each photon = 1/2000 amu
5. (a). Mass defect Dm = M (Ra 226) – M(Rn 222) – M (a) Q 1 amu = 931 MeV
= 226.0256 – 222.0175 – 4.00026 = 0.0053 u.
6. (a). E = mc2 = (1.66 × 10–27) (3 × 108)2 J 931
\ Energy of each photon = = 0.465 MeV
= 1.49 × 10–10 J 2000
17. (c). Deuterium, the isotope of hydrogen consits of one proton
1.49 ´ 10-10 and neutron. Therefore mass of nuclear constituents of
= MeV = 931.49 MeV
1.6 ´ 10-13 deuterium = mass of proton + mass of neutron
7. (b). E = mc2 = 1.00759 + 1.00898 = 2.01657 amu.
= (9.1 × 10–31) (3 × 108)2 J = 0.51 MeV mass of nucleus of deuterium = 2.01470 amu.
8. (c). DE = D mc2 Mass defect = 2.01657 – 2.01470 = 0.00187 amu.
Binding energy = DE = 0.00187 × 931 MeV = 1.741 MeV.
0.5
Dm = kg = 0.005 kg
100
c = 3 × 108 m/s DE Dm ´ 931
18. (a). E = = MeV
DE = 0.005 × (3 × 108)2 A A
DE = 4.5 × 1014 J or watt-sec Dm = (3mp + 4mn) – mass of Li7
Dm = (3 × 1.00759 + 4 × 1.00898) – 7.01653
4.5 ´ 1014 Dm = 0.04216 a.m.u.
DE = = 1.25 × 10111 watt hour
60 ´ 60
0.04216 ´ 931 39.25
DE = 1.25 × 108 kWH DE = = = 5.6 MeV
7 7
EBD_7156
156 DPP/ P 56
19. (d). The sun radiates energy in all directions in a sphere. At 25. (c) The number of 12C atoms in 1g of carbon,
a distance R, the energy received per unit area per
second is 1.4 KJ (given). Therefore the energy released NA 6.022 ´ 1023
N= ´mÞ N = ´1
in area 4pR2 per sec is = 1400 × 4pR2 Joule the energy 12 12
released per day = 1400 × 4pR2 × 86400J = 5.02 × 1022 atoms.
where R = 1.5 × 1011 m, Thus The ratio of 14C/12C atoms = 1.3 × 10–12 (Given)
DE = 1400×4 × 3.14 × (1.5 × 1011)2 × 86400
\ Number of 14C atoms = 5.02 × 1022 × 1.3 × 10–
The equivalent mass is 12
Dm = DE/c2
= 6.5 × 1010
11 2
1400 ´ 4 ´ 3.14 ´ (1.5 ´ 10 ) ´ 86400
Dm = 0.693
9 ´ 1016 \ Rate of decay R0 = lN0 = T N0
1/ 2
Dm = 3.8 × 1014 kg
0.693 ´ 6.5 ´ 1010
B.E. \ R0 =
20. (b) 5730 ´ 365 ´ 24 ´ 3600
A
+ = 0.25 Bq = 0.25 (decays/s)
Fusion Fission
+ 26. (c) For 10g sample, number of decays = 0.5 per second.
i.e. R = 0.05 and R0 = 0.25 for each gram of 14C
A R 1 ln ( R0 / R ) ln ( R0 / R )
t /T 10 / 5
= e -lt Þ t = =
æ1ö æ1ö R0 l 1 (0.693 / T1/ 2 )
21. (c) Nt = N0 ç ÷ = 50000 ç ÷ = 12500
è2ø è2ø
5730 years æ 0.25 ö
Þt= ´ ln ç = 13310 years
22. (d). Power received from the reactor, 0.693 è 0.05 ÷ø
P = 1000 KW = 1000 × 1000 W = 106 J/s 27. (d) If there are no other radioactive ingredients, the sample
is very recent. But the error of measurement must be
106 high unless the statistical error itself is large. In any
P= eV/sec.
1.6 ´ 10-19 case, for an old sample, the activity will not be higher
P = 6.25 × 1018 MeV/sec than that of a recent one.
\ number of atoms disintegrated per sec 28. (d) The penetrating power is maximum in case of gamma
rays because gamma rays are an electromagnetic
6.25 ´ 1018 radiation of very small wavelength.
= = 3.125 × 1016 29. (b) b-particles, being emitted with very high velocity (up
200
to 0.99 c). So, according to Einstein's theory of
Energy released per hour = 106 × 60 × 60 Joule relatively, the mass of a b-particle is much higher
DE compared to is its rest mass (m0). The velocity of
Mass decay per hour = Dm = electrons obtained by other means is very small
c2 compared to c (Velocity of light). So its mass remains
nearly m0. But b-particle and electron both are similar
106 ´ 60 ´ 60 particles.
Þ Dm =
(3 ´ 108 )2 30. (b) Electron capture occurs more often than positron
emission in heavy elements. This is because if positron
Þ Dm = 4 × 10–8 kg emission is energetically allowed, electron capture is
23. (a) necessarily allowed, but the reverse is not true i.e. when
24. (a) In fusion two lighter nuclei combines, it is not the electron caputre is energetically allowed, positron
radioactive decay. emission is not necessarily allowed.
DPP/ P 57 157
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 57
1. (a) With temperature rise conductivity of semiconductors 19. (b) In forward biasing the diffusion current increases and
increases. drift current remains constant so not current is due to
2. (b) the diffusion.
3. (b) In insulators, the forbidden energy gap is very large, in In reverse biasing diffusion becomes more difficult so
case of semiconductor it is moderate and in conductors net current (very small) is due to the drift.
the energy gap is zero. 20. (a) In a triclinic crystal a ¹ b ¹ c and a ¹ b ¹ g ¹ 90º
4. (c) In intrinsic semiconductors, the creation or liberation 21. (a)
of one free electron by the thermal energy creates one 22. (a) In figure (1), (2) and (3). P-crystals are more positive
hole. Thus in intrinsic semiconductors ne = nh as compared to N-crystals.
23. (a) Wood is non-crystalline and others are crystalleine.
5. (b) Both P-type and N-type semiconductors are neutral 24. (a) Resistance of conductors (Cu) decreases with decrease
because neutral atoms are added during doping. in temperature while that of semi-conductors (Ge)
6. (d) Conductor has positive temperature coefficient of increases with decrease in temperature.
resistance but semiconductor has negative temperature
coefficient of resistance. DV p (180 - 120)
25. (b) rp = = = 1.2 ´ 104 ohm
7. (d) DI p -3
(15 - 10) ´10
8. (c) At zero Kelvin, there is no thermal agitation and
therefore no electrons from valence band are able to
DI p (15 - 7 ) ´ 10 -3
shift to conduction band. 26. (a) gm = = = 5.33 ´ 10 -3 ohm -1
9. (c) Antimony is a fifth group impurity and is therefore a DVg ( - 2 .0 ) - ( - 3 .5 )
donor of electrons.
10. (d) At 0K temperature semiconductor behaves as an 27. (a) m = rp ´ g m = (1.2 ´ 10 4 ) ´ ( 5.33 ´ 10 -3 ) = 64
insulator, because at very low temperature electrons
cannot jump from the valence band to conduction band.
11. (b) Formation of energy bands in solids are due to Pauli’s 28. (a) According to law of mass action, ni2 = ne nh . In
exclusion principle. intrinsic semiconductors ni = ne = nh and for P-type
12. () semiconductor ne would be less than ni, since nh is
13. (a) In conductors valence band and conduction band may necessarily more than ni.
overlaps. 29. (d) Resistivity of semiconductors decreases with
14. (b) With rise in temperature, conductivity of semiconductor temperature. The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate with
increases while resistance decreases. larger amplitudes at higher temperatures there by
i increasing its conductivity not resistivity.
15. (a) Because vd = 30. (c) We cannot measure the potential barrier of a PN-
(ne )eA
junction by connecting a sensitive voltmeter across its
16. (b) In reverse biasing, width of depletion layer increases. terminals because in the depletion region, there are no
17. (b) Because in case (1) N is connected with N. This is not free electrons and holes and in the absence of forward
a series combination of transistor. biasing, PN- junction offers infinite resistance.
18. (d) Resistance in forward biasing R fr » 10W and
resistance in reverse biasing
R fr 1
RRw » 105 W Þ =
RRw 104
EBD_7156
158 DPP/ P 58
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 58
12. (a)
1. (b) N N
Forward reverse
biased P biased
2. (d) a is the ratio of collector current and emitter current

C = A.B = A + B = A + B (De morgan’s theorem)
while b is the ratio of collector current and base current.
Hence output C is equivalent to OR gate.
10 -19
Ne 10 ´1.6 ´10
3. (a) Emitter current Ie = = = 1.6 mA
t 10-6
2
Base current Ib =
100
× 1.6 = 0.032 mA C = AB. AB = A.B + A.B = AB + AB = AB
In this case output C is equivalent to AND gate.
But, Ie = Ic + Ib
\ Ic = Ie – Ib = 1.6 – 0.032 = 1.568 mA 13. (c) For ‘XNOR’ gate Y = A B + AB
Ic 1.568 Ic 1.568 i.e. 0.0 + 0.0 = 1.1 + 0.0 = 1 + 0 = 1
\ a= = = 0.98 and b = I = = 49
Ie 1.6 0.032
b 0.1 + 0.1 = 1.0 + 0.1 = 0 + 0 = 0
4. (d)
1.0 + 1.0 = 0.1 + 1.0 = 0 + 0 = 0
90
5. (d) iC = ´ iE Þ 10 = 0.9 ´ iE Þ I E = 11mA 1.1 + 1.1 = 0.0 + 1.1 = 0 + 1 = 1
100
14. (d) The output D for the given combination
Also i E = i B + i C Þ i B = 11 - 10 = 1mA D = ( A + B).C = ( A + B) + C
6. (d) b = 50, R = 1000W, Vi = 0.01V If A = B = C = 0 then
i V 0.01 D = (0 + 0) + 0 = 0 + 0 = 1 + 1 = 1
b = c and ib = i = = 10-5 A
ib Ri 103 If A = B = 1, C = 0 then
Hence ic = 50 ´ 10-5 A = 500 mA D = (1 + 1) + 0 = 1 + 0 = 0 + 1 = 1
0.8 15. (a) The Boolean expression for ‘NOR’ gate is Y = A + B

7. (c) a = 0.8 Þ b = =4
(1 - 0.8) i.e. if A = B = 0 (Low), Y = 0 + 0 = 0 = 1 (High)
16. (d) The Boolean expression for ‘AND’ gate is R = P.Q
Di
Also b = c Þ Dic = b ´ Dib = 4 ´ 6 = 24mA Þ 1.1 = 1,1.0 = 0, 0.1 = 0, 0.0 = 0
Dib
17. (a) The given Boolean expression can be written as
8. (b) ie = ib + ic Þ ic = ie - ib
Y = ( A + B).( A.B) = ( A.B).( A + B) = ( A A).B + A( B.B)
9. (b)
= A.B + A B = A B
10. (d) For CE configuration voltage gain = b´ RL / Ri
Power gain A B Y
Power gain = b2 ´ RL / Ri Þ =b 0 0 1
Voltage gain
1 0 0
11. (b) For ‘OR’ gate X = A + B 0 1 0
i.e. 0 + 0 = 0, 0 + 1 = 1,1 + 0 = 1, 1 + 1 = 1 1 1 0
DPP/ P 58 159
18. (c) The Boolean expression for the given combination is But I e = I c + I b = 0.96 I e + I b
output Y = ( A + B ).C
Þ I b = 0.04 I e
The truth table is
A B C Y = (A + B).C I c 0.96 I e
\ Current gain, b = = = 24
0 0 0 0 I b 0.04I e
1 0 0 0
23. (a)
0 1 0 0
24. (b)
0 0 1 0
25. (a)
1 1 0 0
26. (b) The probability that a state with energy E is occupied
0 1 1 1
is given by
1 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
P(E) = (E -E ) / kT , where EF is the Fermi energy,,
Hence A = 1, B = 0, C = 1 e F +1
19. (d) For ‘NAND’ gate C = A.B T is the temperature on the Kelvin scale, and k is the
Boltzmann constant. If energies are measured from the
i.e. 0.0 = 0 = 1, 0.1 = 0 = 1 top of the valence band, then the energy associated with
a state at the bottom of the conduction band is E = 1.11
1.0 = 0 = 1,1.1 = 1 = 0
eV. Furthermore, kT = (8.62 × 10–5 eV/K) (300K) =
0.02586 eV. For pure silicon, EF = 0.555 eV and
20. (d)
(E – EF)/kT = (0.555eV) / (0.02586eV) = 21.46. Thus,
1
P(E) = = 4.79 ´ 10 -10
21.46
e +1
For the doped semi-conductor,
(E – EF) / kT = (0.11 eV) / (0.02586 eV) = 4.254
1
Hence option (d) is true. and P(E) = 4.254 = 1.40 ´ 10 -2 .
e +1
27. (a) The energy of the donor state, relative to the top of the
21. (c)
valence bond, is 1.11 eV – 0.15 eV = 0.96 eV. The
Fermi energy is 1.11 eV – 0.11 eV = 1.00 eV. Hence,
(E - E F ) / kT = (0.96eV - 1.00eV)
/(0.02586eV) = -1.547
1
and P(E) = = 0.824
-1.547
e +1
True Table 28. (d) In diode the output is in same phase with the input
X Y therefore it cannot be used to built NOT gate.
X Y P = X + Y Q = X.Y R = P+Q
29. (a) This is Boolean expression for ‘OR’ gate.
0 1 1 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 30. (d) Statement -1 is true but statement -2 is false.
Hence X = 1, Y = 0 gives output R = 1
Ic
22. (c) I = 0.96
e
Þ I c = 0.96 I e If A = 1, B = 0, C = 1 then Y = 0
EBD_7156
160 DPP/ P 59
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 59
20. (a) The critical frequency of a sky wave for relection from
1. (a) By using fc ; 9 ( N max )1/ 2 Þ f c = 2.84MHz
a layer of atmosphere is given by fc = 9( N max )11/ 2
2. (d) Carrier frequency > audio frequency
3. (a) A maximum frequency deviation of 75 kHz is permitted Þ 10 ´106 = 9( N max )11/ 2
for commercial FM broadcast stations in the 88 to 108
MHz VHF band. 2
æ 10 ´106 ö 12 -3
4. (c) Carrier + signal ® modulation. Þ N max = ç ÷ ; 1.2 ´10 m
ç 9 ÷
5. (c) 270W è ø
6. (a) m1 > m2
21. (b) Core of acceptance angle q = sin -1 n12 - n22
fc 60
7. (c) MUF = = = 175MHz 22 (a) Remote sensing is the technique to collect information
cos q cos 70o
about an object in respect of its size, colour, nature,
8. (d) coordinated waves of a particular wavelength location, temperature etc without physically touching
9. (d) Surgery needs sharply focused beam of light and laser it. There are some areas or location which are
can be sharply focused. inaccessible. So to explore sensing is used. Remote
10. (d) Laser beams are perfectly parallel. So that they are very sensing is done through a satellite.
narrow and can travel a long distance without 23. (b)
spreading. This is the feature of laser while they are 24. (a) Laser beams are perfectly parallel. They are
monochromatic and coherent, these are characteristics monochromatic and coherent. These are characteristics
only. only.
11. (b) The formula for modulating index is given by
25. (d) f c = 9 N m = 9 ´ 9 ´ 1010
d Frequency var iation 10 ´ 103
mf = = = =5 = 2.7 ´ 106 Hz = 2.7 MHz
vm Modulating frequency 2 ´ 103
12. (b) fa < f f ( 250 ´ 103 )2

D2
26. (b) f = f c 1 + = 2.7 ´ 10 6 ´ 1 +
13. (c) An antenna is a metallic structure used to radiate or 4h 2 4 ´ (150 ´ 103 )
2
receive EM waves.
14. (a) Varying the local oscillator frequency = 3.17 × 106Hz
15. (b) In the channel or in the transmission line 27. (c) f = fc = sec fi
Frequency deviation 50
16. (a) Carrier swing = = = 7.143
Modulating frequency 7 f 3.17×106
Secfi = = = 1.174
f c 2.7 ´106
17. (c) In optical fibre, light travels inside it, due to total
internal reflection.
fi = sec –1 (1.174) = 31.6° .
18. (b) The process of changing the frequency of a carrier wave
(modulated wave) in accordance with the audio 28. (d) TV signals (frequency greater than 30 MHz) cannot
frequency signal (modulating wave) is known as be propagated through sky wave propagation.
frequency modulation (FM). Above critical frequency, an electromagnetic wave
19. (d) Following are the problems which are faced while penetrates the ionosphere and is not reflected by it.
transmitting audio signals directly. 29. (d) The electromagnetic waves of shorter wavelength do
(i) These signals are relatively of short range. not suffer much diffraction from the obstacles of earth’s
(ii) If every body started transmitting these low frequency atmosphere so they can travel long distance.
signals directly, mutual interference will render all of Also, shorter the wavelength, shorter is the velocity of
them ineffective. wave propagation.
(iii) Size of antenna required for their efficient radiation 30. (b) A dish antenna is a directional antenna because it can
would be larger i.e. about 75 km. transmit or signals in all direction.
DPP/ P 60 161
DAILY PRACTICE
PROBLEMS
PHYSICS
SOLUTIONS 60
1. (b) Voltmeter measures voltage across two points so it is 15. (c) In reverse-bias mode, a reverse current flows.
connected in parallel and ammeter measures current Therefore, (c) represents the form.
so it is connected in series. 16. (c) Larger the length, lesser will be the potential gradient,
P R so more balancing length will be required.
2. (a) = so by changing the gap resistance of copper 17. (a) LED is a p-n junction diode which always operates on
Q S forward bias.
strip gets cancelled. 18. (b) Emitter current is the sum of base and collector current
3. (b) Potential gradient = Potential drop/unit length by Kirchhoff's 1st law.
rl Irl
V = IR = I 19. (b) V = IR = \ potential gradient = k
A A
when A is decreased, k will increase.
V Ir
\ = ] 20. (d) Positive terminal is at lower potential
l A (0V) and negative terminal is at higher potential + 5V.
4. (d) Refractive index is the property of the material, hence 21. (d)
it does not depend on angle of the prism.
V 30.0
5. (a) A meter-bridge is a device which is based on the 22. (d) V = 30.0, I = 0.020 A, R = = = 1.50 kW
principle of Wheatstone bridge. I 0.020
6. (a) A potentiometer is device which is used to compare V DR DV DI
e.m.f.'s of two cells as well as to determine the internal Error : As R = \ = +
I R V I
resistance of a cell. It is based on the principle that when
a current flows through a wire of uniform thickness and æ DV DI ö
Þ DR = R çè + ÷
material, potential difference between its two points is V Iø
directly proportional to the length of the wire between
the two points. æ 0.1 0.001ö
= 1.50 × 103 çè + ÷ = 0.080 kW
7. (c) When a p-n junction diode is connected in reverse 30.0 0.020 ø
biased mode, a reverse current flows. 23. (a) u = – 0.30 m, v = – 0.60m
8. (b) A Zener diode is a heavily doped p-n junction diode By mirror formula,
which operates on reverse bias beyond breakdown
voltage. 1 1 1
+ =
9. (c) In a transfer characteristics Vi is plotted along x-axis v u f
and V0 along y-axis. 1 -1 1 -3.0
Þ = - Þ f= Þ f = 0.20m
Χ IC f 0.30 0.60 0.60
10. (a) Current gain in CE configuration is b = .
ΧI B 1 1 1 -df -dv -du
Þ = + Þ 2 = 2 - 2
Ic >> IB, hence it is maximum. f v u f v u
rl V Ir é 0.01
11. (c) V = IR = I \ <k< , 0.01 ù
A l A Þ df = (0.20)2 ê 2
+ ú
increase in I, will increase k, so it will decrease ëê (0.60) (0.30)2 ûú
sensitivity. Þ df = 0.0055 » 0.01m
12. (c) Þ Focal length f = (0.20 ± 0.01) m
13. (c) According to the figure the voltmeter and the resistor 24. (d) As shown in the figure.
are connected in parallel.
14. (b) Here I = 4A P l l
= , Pµ
Q 100 - l 100 - l
c
æ 30 ´ p ö pc P(unknown)Q
q = 30° = ç ÷ =
è 180 ø 6
I 4 4´6´7 2´6´7
Now, k = = = =
q æpö 22 11 G
ç ÷
è6ø
B
84
= = 7.6 A / rad l 100l
11
EBD_7156
162 DPP/ P 60
27. (c) because balance point depends upon the value of
DP Dl D (100 - l)
= + unknown and known resistance only.
P l 100 - l 28. (c) Potentiometer is used to measure the potential
Dl Dl difference between the two points of a wire.
= + 29. (a) Let j be the current density.
l 100 - l
I
0.1 0.1 DP Then j ´ 2pr 2 = I Þ j =
= + Þ ´ 100 = 0.42% 2 pr 2
40.0 60.0 P
25. (b) As shown in the figure, when the object (O) is placed rI
\ E = rj =
between F and C, the image (I) is formed beyond C. It 2pr 2
is in this condition that movement towards left
a r uur a
rI
//// '
Now, DVBC =- ò E. dr = - ò 2
dr
a + b 2 pr
/ //
Movement towards left a+b

////
F
//////////////
a
| |||
rI é 1 ù rI rI
|||
|||
=- - = -
||||
I C O
2p ëê r ûú a + b 2pa 2p (a + b)
///
//
/// On applying superposition as mentioned we get
' rI rI
when the student shifts his eye towards left, the image DVBC = 2 ´ DVBC = -
pa p(a + b)
appears to the right of the object pin.
26. (c) For a spherical mirror, the graph plotted between (1/u) rI
30. (c) E=
and (1/v) will be a straight line with a negative slope 2 pr 2
of (– 1) and position intercept (1/f) on the (1/v) axis
1 1 1
=- +
v u f
1/ f
tan q = -1
q
(1/u)
O 1/ f

DPPS Neet Disha Physics Original_Part64

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DPPS Neet Disha Physics Original_Part64

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DPPS Neet Disha Physics Original_Part64

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

t.me/Ebooks_Encyclopedia27. t.

24. (c) Dimensions of angular momentum, [ L] = éë ML T ùû

Dimensions of Young¢s modulus,

hG kgm 2s-1 ´ m3kg -1s-2

8. (c) 4MgL so maximum permissible error in Y 5.00 ± 0.05

16. (b) H = I2Rt Dv æ Ds Dt ö

1 2 14. (b) Let u1, u2, u3 and u4 be velocities at time t = 0, t1,

12. (c) Speed of the object at reaching the ground n = 2 gh

AC = (AB)2 + (BC) 2 = (400)2 + (300) 2 = 500 m r r æ - ˆj + kˆ ö

Velocity of the ball at the time of collision

u P v cosa \v= [(560 ) 2 + ( 294 .3) 2 ] = 632.6 cm/sec

u2 Let t be the time taken by the ball for these horizontal

y = r sin q where q = wt r (k – 4p2 n2 m) = k l0

12m/s E \ vT2 + 4gL + gL = 4v 2T - 4gL Þ 3v 2T = 9gL

vrm vrm= 4 km/hr v A = u cos q iˆ + (u sin q - gt) ˆj.vAB = (2u cos q) ˆi

v B = -u cos q ˆi + (u sin q - gt) ˆj ; a BA = g - g = 0

(i) horizontal component of 100 cos 30º = 50 3 N 1 1 1 a1a 2 5 ´ 15

F N let the acceleration be a, then

(i) the weight mg downward by the earth R2

F = mR1 + mR2 + T ..... (1) W’

Taking point 'C' at the origin, position vector of point y1

Hence the distance of centre of mass from C = l

2. (b) The angular momontum of a system of particles is con 2 2p 2

a = 1980 degree/s 2 Equations of motion are

é2 ù r12 + r22 + ..... + rn2

I = I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 2mgh 2mgh 2mgh

Moment of inertia of Rod AB about point P and

g 1 rad It is not a universal constant.

Vp = 10 Ve GM gR 2 9.8 ´ 6.42 ´ 1012

2pR e 6.28 ´ 6.4 ´ 10 6 For satellite revolving very near to earth R e + h = R e

9. (b) x 19. (b) Velocity of efflux when the hole is at depth h, v = 2 gh

l(nm) double and length becomes half, so rate of melting will

be twice i.e. æç ö÷ = 2 æç ö÷ = 2 ´ 0.1 = 0.2 gm/sec.

And, from Wein's law λ A ´ TA = λ B ´ TB

1 5802 - 1934 3968 2 1 1

23. (a) According to Newton's law of cooling. If K1 < K2

6. (d) PV g = constant Adiabatic

g -1 14. (d) W = PDV = 2.4 × 104 × 1 × 105 = 24J

Þ DT = 675 - 300 = 375 K DU (DQ)V mCV DT 1

19. (c) From graph it is clear that P3 > P1 .

\ (DU ) ab + (DU )bc + (DU )ca = 0 Þ m CP (DT ) A = m Cu (DT ) B

\ 7000 + 0 + (DU )ca = 0 Þ (DU )ca = -7000 J .... (ii) CP

V1 T1 V (273 + 27) 300 5 7

number of moles will not be equal i.e. μ A ¹ μ B

l T l The increase in extension is Dl which is the amplitude

2nuus 2 ´ 256 ´ 330 ´ 5 OC i.e. x = 0, 0 £ y £ L

1 l n æn ö 270 v 2.87 ´ 104 Y 1 2.87 ´ 10 4

= 2.0 ´ 1011 N/m 2

30. (c) End correction obtained in the experiment.

3. (b) FA = Force on C due to charge placed at A kq 2 kq 2

+ 1µC 1 (+5 ´ 10-6 ( -7 ´ 10 -6 ) 1 35 ´ 10 -12

Fnet = ( FA ) 2 + ( FB ) 2 + 2 FA FB cos120o = 1.8 N

25. (b) Net charge inside the sphere = òsphere r dV

æ Q ö 1 (-6 ´ 10-6 ) 1 (12 ´ 10-6 )

Þ W = Q[(e1$i + e2 $j + e3 k$ ).(ai$ + b $j )] = Q( e1a + e2b )

(F+ > F– as E+ > E–)

Eq. (1) and (2),

11 Imagine, A being pulled on the left side, then abcd becomes

0.2 ´10-3 ir 0.1 ´ 10-7

E 2.4 ´ 10-3 V 10.0V